2010 4runner

User Manual: 2010-4runner

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 682

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Index
1-6. Theft deterrent system

Before driving

Engine immobilizer
system .............................. 106
Alarm .................................. 109
Theft prevention labels
(for U. S. A.) ..................... 111

1-1. Key information
Keys ..................................... 30
1-2. Opening, closing and
locking the doors

1-7. Safety information

Smart key system.................
Wireless remote control .......
Side doors ............................
Back door .............................

Correct driving posture .......
SRS airbags .......................
Front passenger occupant
classification system.........
Child restraint systems .......
Installing child restraints .....

33
47
51
56

1-3. Adjustable components
(seats, mirrors,
steering wheel)

Front seats ...........................
Rear seats............................
Head restraints .....................
Seat belts .............................
Steering wheel .....................
Inside rear view mirror..........
Outside rear view mirrors .....

61
65
76
79
86
87
89

1-4. Opening and closing the
windows and moon roof
Power windows .................... 91
Power back window ............. 94
Moon roof ............................. 98
1-5. Refueling
Opening the fuel tank
cap ................................... 102

2
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

112
114
129
135
139

When driving

2-1. Driving procedures
Driving the vehicle ..............
Engine (ignition) switch
(vehicles without a
smart key system) ............
Engine (ignition) switch
(vehicles with a smart
key system) ......................
Automatic transmission ......
Turn signal lever .................
Parking brake .....................
Horn....................................

154

164

167
173
179
180
181

2-5. Driving information

2-2. Instrument cluster

Off-road precautions...........
Cargo and luggage.............
Vehicle load limits...............
Winter driving tips...............
Trailer towing......................
Dinghy towing.....................

Gauges and meters ............ 182
Indicators and warning
lights ................................. 189
Accessory meter ................. 194
2-3. Operating the lights and
wipers
Headlight switch..................
Fog light switch ...................
Windshield wipers and
washer ..............................
Rear window wiper and
washer ..............................

198
204
205
207

2-4. Using other driving
systems
Cruise control......................
Intuitive parking assist.........
Rear view monitor system
(rear view mirror-attached
type)..................................
Four-wheel drive system
(part-time 4WD models)....
Four-wheel drive system
(full-time 4WD models) .....
Active traction control
system ..............................
AUTO LSD system
(2WD models)...................
Rear differential lock
system ..............................
Downhill assist control
system ..............................
Crawl Control ......................
Multi-terrain Select ..............
Driving assist systems ........

209
213

218
223
226
230
232
235
238
241
245
253

262
267
273
275
280
293

Interior features

3-1. Using the air conditioning
system and defogger
Manual air conditioning
system..............................
Automatic air conditioning
system..............................
Rear window and
outside rear view
mirror defoggers...............
Windshield wiper de-icer ....

296
302

313
317
324

333
341
348
355
360
361

3
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

310
312

3-2. Using the audio system
Audio system types ............
Using the radio ...................
Using the CD player ...........
Playing MP3 and WMA
discs .................................
Operating an iPod® ............
Operating a USB
memory ............................
Optimal use of the audio
system..............................
Using the AUX adapter.......
Using the steering wheel
audio switches..................

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Index

3-3. Using the Bluetooth®
audio system

3-6. Using the storage features

Bluetooth® audio system....
Using the Bluetooth®
audio system ....................
Operating a Bluetooth®
enabled portable
player ...............................
Setting up a Bluetooth®
enabled portable
player ...............................
Bluetooth® audio system
setup ................................

364
367

372

374
379

3-4. Using the hands-free
phone system
(for cellular phone)
Hands-free phone system
(for cellular phone)
features ............................
Using the hands-free
phone system
(for cellular phone) ...........
Making a phone call ...........
Setting a cellular phone......
Security and system
setup ................................
Using the phone book ........

380

384
392
396
401
405

3-5. Using the interior lights
Interior lights list ................. 413
• Interior lights .................... 414
• Personal lights ................. 414

4
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

List of storage features .......
• Glove box .........................
• Console box .....................
• Coin holder .......................
• Tissue pocket ...................
• Pen holder ........................
• Auxiliary box .....................
• Cup holders ......................
• Bottle holders ...................

416
417
418
419
420
421
422
423
427

3-7. Other interior features
Sun visors...........................
Vanity mirrors .....................
Clock...................................
Outside temperature
display ..............................
Power outlets (12V DC)......
Power outlets (120V AC) ....
Seat heaters .......................
Armrest ...............................
Floor mat ............................
Compass ............................
Luggage compartment
features ............................
Garage door opener ...........
Safety Connect ...................

429
430
431
433
436
439
446
448
449
450
456
462
469

Maintenance and care

5-1. Essential information

4-1. Maintenance and care
Cleaning and protecting
the vehicle exterior............ 478
Cleaning and protecting
the vehicle interior............. 481
4-2. Maintenance
Maintenance
requirements..................... 484
General maintenance.......... 486
Emission inspection and
maintenance (I/M)
programs........................... 490
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Do-it-yourself service
precautions .......................
Hood ...................................
Engine compartment...........
Tires ....................................
Tire inflation pressure .........
Wheels ................................
Air conditioning filter............
Wireless remote control/
electronic key battery........
Checking and replacing
fuses .................................
Light bulbs...........................

When trouble arises

491
494
495
514
520
524
526
528
531
541

Emergency flashers............
If your vehicle needs to
be towed...........................
If you think something is
wrong ...............................
Fuel pump shut off
system..............................
Event data recorder............

554
555
561

565
578
590
592
594

595
6

596
598
603
606

5
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

562
563

5-2. Steps to take in an
emergency
If a warning light turns on
or a warning buzzer
sounds..............................
If you have a flat tire ...........
If the engine will not start....
If the shift lever cannot
be shifted from P ..............
If you lose your keys...........
If you cannot operate
back door opener .............
If the electronic key does
not operate properly
(vehicles with a smart
key system) ......................
If the vehicle battery is
discharged........................
If your vehicle overheats ....
If the vehicle becomes
stuck.................................

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Index

Vehicle specifications

6-1. Specifications
Maintenance data
(fuel, oil level, etc.) ........... 610
Fuel information ................. 623
Tire information .................. 626
6-2. Customization
Customizable features ....... 638
6-3. Initialization
Items to initialize................. 644

For owners
Reporting safety defects
for U.S. owners ................ 646
Seat belt instructions
for Canadian owners
(in French)........................ 647

Index
Abbreviation list........................ 650
Alphabetical index .................... 652
What to do if... .......................... 661

6
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

7
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

4RUNNER

CUSTOMER EXPERIENCE CENTER

2 0 1 0

1-800-331-4331

QUICK REFERENCE
GUIDE

Printed in U.S.A. 9/09
08-TCS-03067

00505-QRG10-4RUN

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

2010
4Runner

Doors-Child safety locks
Rear door
OVERVIEW

This Quick Reference Guide is a summary of basic vehicle
operations. It contains brief descriptions of fundamental
operations so you can locate and use the vehicle’s main
equipment quickly and easily.
The Quick Reference Guide is not intended as a substitute for
the Owner’s Manual located in the vehicle’s glove box. We
strongly encourage you to review the Owner’s Manual and
supplementary manuals so you will have a better understanding
of the vehicle’s capabilities and limitations.
Your dealership and the entire staff of Toyota Motor Sales,
U.S.A., Inc. wish you many years of satisfied driving in your
new 4Runner.

Moving the lever to “LOCK” will allow the door to be opened only from
the outside.

Spare tire & tools
Tool location
Tool bag
FEATURES/OPERATIONS

Jack
Spare tire

! A word about safe vehicle operations

Removing the spare tire

This Quick Reference Guide is not a full description of
4Runner operations. Every 4Runner owner should review the
Owner’s Manual that accompanies this vehicle.

All information in this Quick Reference Guide is current at
the time of printing. Toyota reserves the right to make
changes at any time without notice.

(3)

(1) Assemble the jack handle.
(2) Insert the jack handle end through the opening in the bumper, and into
the lowering screw.
(3) Turn the jack handle counterclockwise.
Refer to the Owner’s Manual for tire changing and jack positioning
procedures.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES

Pay special attention to the boxed information highlighted in
color throughout the Owner’s Manual. Each box contains safe
operating instructions to help you avoid injury or equipment
malfunction.

(2)
(1)

INDEX

Air Conditioning/Heating
Audio
Auto lock functions1,2
Automatic Transmission
Bluetooth® audio
Clock
Cruise control
Four-wheel drive
Garage door opener (HomeLink®)3
iPod®/USB/AUX audio jack
Light control-Instrument panel
Lights1 & turn signals
Moonroof1
Parking brake
Power outlets-12V DC
Power outlets-120V AC
Seat adjustments-Front
Seat adjustments-Second row seats
Seat heaters
Seats-Folding down second row seats
Seats-Head restraints
Seats-Returning third row seats
Seats-Stowing third row seats
Telephone controls (Bluetooth®)
Tilt and telescopic steering wheel
VSC OFF button
Windows1
Window-Back window1
Windshield wipers & washers

SAFETY AND

Door locks
Doors-Child safety locks
Seat belts
Seat belts-Shoulder belt anchor
Spare tire & tools
Tire Pressure Monitoring (warning) System

EMERGENCY FEATURES

18-19
20-21
9
9
23
14
17
10
19
21
15
16
14
9
23
22
11
11
18
12
13
13
13
22
10
15
14
15
17
24
25
24
24
25
24

Visit your Toyota dealer for information on customizing this feature.
Programmable by customer. Refer to the Owner’s Manual for instructions and
more information.

HomeLink® is a registered trademark of Johnson Controls, Inc.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES

FEATURES/OPERATIONS

8
6
8
4-5
4
2-3
6
7

FEATURES/OPERATIONS

Engine maintenance
Fuel tank door and cap
Hood release
Indicator symbols
Instrument cluster
Instrument panel
Keyless entry1
Smart Key system1

OVERVIEW

OVERVIEW
Instrument panel
Steering wheel controls

Manual Air

Without Smart Key system

With Smart Key system

Center console box

Power rearview mirror controls
Instrument panel light control
Intuitive parking assist switch and indicator1
Tilt and telescopic steering lock release
“RSCA OFF” (Roll Sensing of Curtain shield Airbags “OFF”) switch
120V AC Power outlet ON/OFF switch1
Windshield wiper de-icer switch1
Headlight, turn signal and front fog light1 control
Wiper and washer controls
Accessory meter/Outside temperature display
Emergency flasher switch
Audio system1 or navigation system2
Back window and outside rearview mirror defoggers switch
Front passenger seat belt reminder light
Front passenger occupant classification indicator
Engine immobilizer/Theft deterrent system indicator1
12V DC Power outlet
2

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Conditioning

Automatic Air Conditioning

2WD models
OVERVIEW

Part-time 4WD models

1
2

If equipped
For vehicles with a navigation system, refer to the “Navigation System
Owner’s Manual.”
3

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES

USB adapter1
AUX adapter
Four-wheel drive selector1
Hood release
Steering wheel audio controls1,2
Voice command button1,2
Telephone switches1,2
Ignition switch (standard key)/“ENGINE START STOP” button (Smart Key)1
Party mode switch
Cruise control1
Seat heater switch1
120V AC Power outlet1
Power back window switch

FEATURES/OPERATIONS

Full-time 4WD models

OVERVIEW

Instrument cluster
Non-Optitron type meters

Optitron type meters

Tachometer
Speedometer
Display change button
Engine coolant temperature
Fuel gauge
Eco driving indicator zone display
Odometer, trip meter and average fuel consumption display
Shift position and shift range indicators
Voltmeter

Indicator symbols
Brake system warning1
Driver/Front passenger seat belt reminder1
(alarm will sound if speed is over 12 mph)
Charging system warning1
AIR BAG ON and AIR BAG OFF indicator
Low engine oil pressure warning1
Malfunction/Check Engine indicator1
Engine oil replacement reminder1
Low fuel level warning1
Open door warning1
Airbag SRS warning1
Low Tire Pressure Warning1
Headlight low/high beam indicator
Turn signal indicator
1

For details, refer to “If a warning light turns on or a warning buzzer sounds...” Section 5-2,
2010 Owner’s Manual.
2 For details, see “SRS airbags” Section 1-7, 2010 Owner’s Manual.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Front fog light indicator

Roll Sensing of Curtain shield Airbag OFF indicator2

OVERVIEW

Power steering system warning1

Multi-terrain select
Engine immobilizer/Theft deterrent system indicator
Smart Key system warning
Unengaged Park warning light1
Crawl Control indicator
Low speed four-wheel drive indicator3
Center differential lock indicator3

Four-wheel drive indicator3
Slip indicator1
AUTO Limited Slip Differential indicator

FEATURES/OPERATIONS

Vehicle Stability Control OFF indicator

Downhill Assist Control indicator
Kinetic Dynamic Suspension System indicator1
Cruise control/Cruise control SET indicator4
Anti-lock Brake System warning1
Automatic Transmission fluid temperature warning1

Rear differential lock indicator
Intuitive parking assist indicator
Traction Control OFF indicator
Eco driving indicator light
3
4

If this light flashes, refer to “Four-wheel drive system,” Section 2-4, 2010 Owner’s Manual.
If this light flashes, refer to “Cruise control,” Section 2-4, 2010 Owner’s Manual.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES

Active traction control indicator

OVERVIEW

Fuel tank door and cap
Turn
Pull

NOTE: Tighten until one click is heard. If the cap is not properly sealed,
Check Engine “
” indicator may illuminate.

Keyless entry
Locking
Without Smart Key system

With Smart Key system

Push

Unlocking
Without Smart Key system

With Smart Key system

Push ONCE: Driver door
TWICE: All doors

NOTE: If a door is not opened within 60 seconds of unlocking, all doors will
relock for safety.

Panic button

Push and hold

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Smart Key system (if equipped)
Start function

Depress
brake pedal

OVERVIEW

Green indicator ON

Push

Carrying

NOTE: Gear shift lever must be in Park and brake pedal depressed.

Power (without starting engine)
Without depressing the brake pedal, pressing the “ENGINE START STOP”
switch will change the operation mode in succession from:

ACCESSORY

FEATURES/OPERATIONS

Accessories such as the radio will operate.

Power ON; the engine not running.

OFF

All systems OFF.

Locking

Unlocking
Front door unlock*

Front door lock

Touch
Grasp

Carry remote to lock

Carry remote to unlock

Back door lock/unlock/open
Lock

Open

Push

Push
Carry remote to lock/unlock/open

* Driver door unlocking function can be programmed to unlock driver door
only, or all doors. Grasping passenger door handle will unlock all doors.
NOTE: Doors may also be locked/unlocked using remote.
7
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES

Unlock

OVERVIEW

Hood release
Pull up latch and
raise hood

Pull

Engine maintenance

Windshield and back window washer fluid tank
Power steering fluid reservoir
Engine oil level dipstick
Engine coolant reservoir
Engine oil filler cap
NOTE: Regularly scheduled maintenance, including oil changes, will
help extend the life of your vehicle and maintain performance.
Please refer to the “Warranty Maintenance Guide.”

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

FEATURES/OPERATIONS
Auto lock functions
OVERVIEW

Automatic door locks can be programmed to operate in four different
modes, or turned OFF.
-Doors lock when shifting from Park.
-Doors lock when the vehicle speed is approximately 12 mph or higher.
-Doors unlock when shifting into Park.
-Doors unlock when the driver’s door is opened within 10 seconds after
turning the “ENGINE START STOP” switch or engine switch OFF.
Refer to the Owner’s Manual for more details.

Automatic Transmission

Park*
Reverse
Neutral
Drive
“S” mode

* The engine/“ENGINE START STOP” switch must be “ON” and the brake
pedal depressed to shift from Park.

FEATURES/OPERATIONS

P
R
N
D

“S” (Sequential) mode
Shift the shift lever to “S” position from “D” position.
Floor shift type:
+: Upshift (push and release)
-: Downshift (pull and release)
Downshifting increases power going uphill, or provides engine braking
downhill. For best fuel economy during normal driving conditions, always
drive with the shift lever in the “D” position.

BRAKE

Set: Depress
Release: Depress again

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES

Parking brake

FEATURES/OPERATIONS

Four-wheel drive (if equipped)
Part-time four-wheel drive models
H2

High speed (2WD)
High speed (4WD)
Turn to “H4” with speed
below 50 mph.
Neutral
Low speed (4WD)
Shift to “N” position,
then push and turn to
“L4.”

Full-time four-wheel drive models

H4F

High speed

H4L

High speed
(center differential locked)

L4L

Low speed
(center differential locked)
Shift to “N” position, then
push and turn to “L4L.”

Tilt and telescopic steering wheel
Lock release lever

Angle
Length

Hold wheel, push lever down, set angle and length, and return lever.
NOTE: Do not attempt to adjust while the vehicle is in motion.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Seat adjustments-Front
Power seat

Manual seat

OVERVIEW
FEATURES/OPERATIONS

Seat position (forward/backward)
Height crank (driver side only)
Seatback angle
Lumbar support (driver side only)
Driver seat: seat position, cushion angle and height
Passenger seat: seat position (forward/backward)
Seatback angle
Lumbar support (driver side only)

Seat adjustments-Second row seats
Vehicles without third row seats

Vehicles with third row seats

SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES

Seat position (forward/backward)
Seatback angle
11

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

FEATURES/OPERATIONS

Seats-Folding down second row seats
Without third row seats
(2) Lower

(1) Push
(3) Stow
(5) Push down

(6) Fold down
(4) Pull up

With third row seats
(2) Lower

(1) Push
(3) Stow

(4) Pull up

(5) Fold down

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Seats-Stowing third row seats
(if equipped)
OVERVIEW

From inside

(1) Stow

(2) Pull up

(4) Pull up

(3) Pull up

(5) Fold down

From outside

(1) Stow

(2) Pull up

(3) Pull up

(4) Fold down

(3) Raise

FEATURES/OPERATIONS

Seats-Returning third row seats
(if equipped)
(2) Pull
(1) Raise

Seats-Head restraints
Third row

Lock release button

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES

Front and second row

FEATURES/OPERATIONS

Clock

H- Hour set
M- Minute set

Windows
Driver side

Up
Window lock switch

Down

Automatic operation Push the switch completely down or pull it
completely up and release to fully open or close. To stop window midway,
lightly push the switch in the opposite direction.
Window lock switch Deactivates all passenger windows. Driver’s window
remains operable.

Moonroof (if equipped)
Sliding operation

Tilting operation

Open

Tilt

Push once to open/close completely.
To stop partway, press switch lightly.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Window-Back window
Operating from inside

Operating from outside

OVERVIEW

With Smart Key system

Open

Without Smart Key system

Window lock switch

Open Close

Turn and hold
FEATURES/OPERATIONS

Light control-Instrument panel

+
Brightness control

VSC OFF button

The VSC OFF button is used to switch between modes related to the TRAC,
VSC and Auto LSD (2WD) functions.
Refer to Section 2-4 of the Owner’s Manual for more information.
15

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES

VSC OFF

FEATURES/OPERATIONS

Lights & turn signals
Headlights
Type A

Type B

Headlights
Parking lights
DRL ON
DRL OFF

Headlights
Parking lights
Auto
DRL OFF

Low beam
High beam flasher
High beam

-Automatic light cut off system Will automatically turn lights off after a
delay of 30 seconds, or the lock switch on remote may be pushed after
locking.

Turn signals
Right turn
Lane change

Lane change
Left turn

Front fog lights (if equipped)

Turn

Front fog lights come on only when the headlights are on low beam.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Windshield wipers & washers
Front
OVERVIEW

Single wipe

Adjust frequency*

Interval wipe
Slow
Fast
Pull to wash and wipe

* Intermittent windshield wiper frequency adjustment
Rotate to increase/decrease wipe frequency.

Rear
Wash and wipe
Wipe
Interval wipe

NOTE: Rear wiper and washer operate only when back window is fully
closed.

FEATURES/OPERATIONS

Wash and wipe

Cruise control (if equipped)
Turning system ON/OFF

Functions

Resume/Increase speed

Set/Decrease speed

System ON/OFF

Refer to the Owner’s Manual for more details.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES

Cancel

FEATURES/OPERATIONS

Seat heaters (if equipped)
Front passenger’s seat

Driver’s seat

Air Conditioning/Heating
Automatic Air Conditioning

Temperature selector (driver side)
Fan speed
Air Conditioning ON/OFF
Fresh or recirculated cabin air
Temperature selector (front passenger side)
“DUAL” button
Indicator ON: Separate temperature settings for driver and
passenger.
Indicator OFF: Synchronize temperature settings for driver and
passenger.
Rear window and outside rear view mirror defoggers
Airflow vent
In “
” mode, use fresh air (“
” indicator OFF) to reduce window
fogging. “ ” mode uses fresh air only.
Climate control OFF
Automatic climate control ON
Adjust the temperature setting, and airflow vents and fan will adjust
automatically.
18

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Manual Air Conditioning
OVERVIEW

Garage door opener (HomeLink®)*

Refer to the Owner’s Manual for more details.
For programming assistance, contact HomeLink® at 1-800-355-3515, or
visit http://www.homelink.com.
* HomeLink® is a registered trademark of Johnson Controls, Inc.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES

Garage door openers manufactured under license from HomeLink®* can be
programmed to operate garage doors, estate gates, security lighting, etc.

FEATURES/OPERATIONS

Fan speed
Fresh or recirculated cabin air
Airflow vent
In “
” mode, use fresh air (“
” indicator OFF) to reduce
window fogging. “ ” mode uses fresh air only.
Rear window and outside rear view mirror defoggers
Select for maximum cooling. Air intake will automatically be set to
recirculate.
Temperature selector
Air Conditioning ON/OFF

FEATURES/OPERATIONS

Audio
Type 1

Preset buttons - functions in other
modes indicated above number

Eject CD
Push to adjust
tone & balance

Push to turn
ON/OFF

View genre/
Push to skip
up/down folder

Seek station/
CD track select
Station/CD
track scan

AM/Satellite
radio

Mode

View radio/CD
information

Type 2 additional functions

Mode

Type 3 additional functions
Load CD(s)

CD PLAYER
To scan tracks on a disc Push “SCAN.” Push again to hold selection.
CD Changer (Type 3 only)
-To load one disc Push “LOAD” and insert one disc.
-To load multiple discs Push and hold “LOAD” until you hear a beep.
Insert one disc. Shutter will close and then re-open for next disc.
To select a file (MP3/WMA only) Turn “TUNE.FILE” or “TUNE.SCROLL.”
To select a folder (MP3/WMA only) Push either side of “TYPE/FOLDER.”

RADIO
To preset stations Tune in the desired station and hold down a preset
button (1-6) until you hear a beep. Push desired preset button (1-6) to
select.
To scan stations Push “SCAN.” Push and hold to scan preset stations. Push
again to hold selection.
20

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Steering wheel controls (if equipped)
OVERVIEW

Volume control

“
”
Use to search within the selected audio medium (radio, CD, iPod, etc.).
“MODE”
Push to turn audio ON and select an audio mode. Push and hold to turn
audio system OFF.

Party mode switch

FEATURES/OPERATIONS

Party mode increases audio amplification in back door speakers,
optimizing audio performance outside vehicle when rear hatch is open.

iPod®/USB (if equipped)/
AUX audio jack
iPod®/USB

AUX

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES

iPod®/USB adapter
By connecting a USB-compatible portable audio device or USB memory to
the USB adapter, you can listen to music from the portable audio device or
USB memory through the vehicle’s speaker system.
AUX jack
By inserting a mini plug into the AUX jack, you can listen to music from a
portable audio device through the vehicle’s speaker system while in AUX
mode.

FEATURES/OPERATIONS

Telephone controls (Bluetooth®)
(if equipped)
Audio unit

Microphone

Steering wheel telephone switches

Start call
End call

Volume

Voice command button

Bluetooth® technology allows dialing or receipt of calls without taking
hands from the steering wheel or using a cable to connect the compatible
telephone and the system.
Refer to “Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone),” Section
3-4 in the Owner’s Manual for more details, or go to Toyota.com and enter
“Bluetooth” in the keyword search.

Power outlets-120V AC (if equipped)
Inside center console

ON/OFF
Main switch

Luggage
compartment

Push

NOTE: The 120V AC power outlet can only be used when engine is running.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Bluetooth® audio (if equipped)
Audio unit

Microphone
OVERVIEW

Steering wheel audio switches

Volume
Selects a track and album
Turns the power on,
selects an audio source

Refer to “Bluetooth® audio system,” Section 3-3 in the Owner’s Manual for
more details.

Power outlets-12V DC
Glove box

Luggage compartment
(with the 120V AC outlet)

Luggage compartment
(without the 120V AC outlet)

NOTE: Designed for car accessories. Ignition switch/“ENGINE START STOP”
switch must be in the “ACC” or “ON” position to be used.
23
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES

Center panel

FEATURES/OPERATIONS

The Bluetooth® audio system enables you to enjoy music played on a
portable digital audio player from the vehicle speaker via wireless
communication.

SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES
Door locks
Unlock
Lock

Seat belts
Take up slack
Too high

Keep as low on
hips as possible

If belt is fully extended, then retracted even slightly, it cannot be
re-extended beyond that point, unless fully retracted again. This feature
is used to help hold child restraint systems securely.
To find more information about seat belts, and how to install a child
restraint system, refer to the Owner’s Manual.

Seat belts-Shoulder belt anchor
Push up or squeeze lock
release to lower

Tire Pressure Monitoring (warning)
System
If tire pressure becomes critically low on any of the tires, “
” indicator
light will come on. Correctly adjusting tire inflation will turn off the light
after a few minutes. If the light does not turn off, have the system
checked by your Toyota dealer.
Refer to the Owner’s Manual for more details.
24

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

For your information
Main Owner’s Manual
Please note that this manual applies to all models and all equipment, including options. Therefore, you may find some explanations for equipment not
installed on your vehicle.
All specifications provided in this manual are current at the time of printing.
However, because of the Toyota policy of continual product improvement, we
reserve the right to make changes at any time without notice.
Depending on specifications, the vehicle shown in the illustrations may differ
from your vehicle in terms of equipment.

Noise from under vehicle after turning off the engine
Approximately five hours after the engine is turned off, you may hear sound
coming from under the vehicle for several minutes. This is the sound of a fuel
evaporation leakage check and, it does not indicate a malfunction.

Accessories, spare parts and modification of your Toyota
A wide variety of non-genuine spare parts and accessories for Toyota vehicles are currently available on the market. You should know that Toyota does
not warrant these products and is not responsible for their performance,
repair, or replacement, or for any damage they may cause to, or adverse
effect they may have on, your Toyota vehicle.
This vehicle should not be modified with non-genuine Toyota products. Modification with non-genuine Toyota products could affect its performance,
safety or durability, and may even violate governmental regulations. In addition, damage or performance problems resulting from the modification may
not be covered under warranty.

24
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Installation of a mobile two-way radio system
As the installation of a mobile two-way radio system in your vehicle may
affect electronic systems such as the multi-port fuel injection system/sequential multi-port fuel injection system, cruise control system, anti-lock brake
system, SRS airbag system and seat belt pretensioner system, be sure to
check with your Toyota dealer for precautionary measures or special instructions regarding installation.

Scrapping of your Toyota
The SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner devices in your Toyota contain
explosive chemicals. If the vehicle is scrapped with the airbags and seat belt
pretensioners left as they are, this may cause an accident such as fire. Be
sure to have the systems of the SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner
removed and disposed of by a qualified service shop or by your Toyota
dealer before you scrap your vehicle.

Perchlorate Material
Special handling may apply,
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
Your vehicle has components that may contain perchlorate. These components may include airbag, seat belt pretensioners, and wireless remote control batteries.

25
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

CAUTION
■ General precautions while driving
Driving under the influence: Never drive your vehicle when under the influence of alcohol or drugs that have impaired your ability to operate your vehicle. Alcohol and certain drugs delay reaction time, impair judgment and
reduce coordination, which could lead to an accident that could result in
death or serious injury.
Defensive driving: Always drive defensively. Anticipate mistakes that other
drivers or pedestrians might make and be ready to avoid accidents.
Driver distraction: Always give your full attention to driving. Anything that distracts the driver, such as adjusting controls, talking on a cellular phone or
reading can result in a collision with resulting death or serious injury to you,
your occupants or others.
■ General precaution regarding children’s safety
Never leave children unattended in the vehicle, and never allow children to
have or use the key.
Children may be able to start the vehicle or shift the vehicle into neutral.
There is also a danger that children may injure themselves by playing with
the windows, the moon roof, or other features of the vehicle. In addition, heat
build-up or extremely cold temperatures inside the vehicle can be fatal to
children.

26
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Symbols used throughout this manual
Cautions & Notices
CAUTION
This is a warning against something which, if ignored, may cause death or
serious injury to people. You are informed about what you must or must not do
in order to reduce the risk of death or serious injury to yourself and others.

NOTICE
This is a warning against something which, if ignored, may cause damage to
the vehicle or its equipment. You are informed about what you must or must
not do in order to avoid or reduce the risk of damage to your Toyota and its
equipment.

Symbols used in illustrations
Safety symbol
The symbol of a circle with a slash through it means “Do not”, “Do
not do this”, or “Do not let this happen”.

Arrows indicating operations
Indicates the action (pushing, turning,
etc.) used to operate switches and other
devices.
Indicates the outcome of an operation
(e.g. a lid opens).

27
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

28
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Before driving

Adjusting and operating features such as door locks,
mirrors, and steering column.

When driving

Driving, stopping and safe-driving information.

Interior
features

Air conditioning and audio systems, as well as other interior features for a comfortable driving experience.

Maintenance
and care

Cleaning and protecting your vehicle, performing do-ityourself maintenance, and maintenance information.

When trouble
arises

What to do if the vehicle needs to be towed, gets a flat
tire, or is involved in an accident.

Vehicle
specifications

Detailed vehicle information.

For owners

Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners and seat belt
instructions for canadian owners.

Index

Alphabetical listing of information contained in this
manual.

1
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Pictorial index

Exterior

Windshield wipers P. 205

Headlights (low beam)
P. 198

Moon roof∗

Hood P. 494

P. 98

Outside rear view mirrors
P. 89

Headlights (high beam)
P. 198

Parking lights and front side
marker lights P. 198
Fog lights∗ P. 204
Front turn signal lights and daytime
running lights P. 179, 198

8
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Stop/tail and rear side
marker lights P. 198
Rear window defogger P. 310
Rear window wiper P. 207

Side doors

P. 51

Fuel filler door P. 102

Tires
●Rotation
●Replacement
●Inflation pressure
●Information

License plate lights P. 198
P. 514

Back door

P. 578

P. 56

Rear turn signal lights P. 179

P. 621
P. 626

∗: If equipped
9
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Pictorial index

Interior

Seat belts
Head restraints

P. 76

Power window switches

P. 91

P. 79

Console box P. 418
Tissue pocket P. 420
Pen holder P. 421
SRS driver airbag P. 114

Cup holders∗ P. 423

SRS knee airbags

Bottle holders
P. 427

P. 114

SRS front
passenger
airbag P. 114

Glove box
Rear seats∗

P. 417

P. 65

CTHPIAS047

Floor mats

Armrest P. 448

P. 449

Cup holders P. 423
Rear seats

P. 65

Front seats

SRS side airbags P. 114

10
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

P. 61

A
SRS curtain shield airbags P. 114

Personal lights P. 414
Interior light P. 414

Interior light P. 414

Sun visors P. 429

CTHPIAS006

Garage door opener switches
“SOS” button∗
Moon roof switches∗
Active traction control switch∗
VSC off switch
Rear differential lock switch∗
Downhill assist control switch∗

P. 462
P. 469
P. 98
P. 230
P. 232
P. 235
P. 238

Auxiliary box∗ P. 422
Crawl Control switch∗ P. 241
Multi-terrain Select switch∗ P. 245
Rear view monitor system∗ P. 218
Inside rear view mirror

P. 87

Vanity mirrors P. 430

∗: If equipped
11
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Pictorial index

Interior

Door lock switch

Power window switches

P. 91

Inside door lock button

P. 52

CTHPIAS007

Window lock switch

12
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

P. 91

Seat heater switches∗

Cup holders P. 423

P. 446

Coin holder P. 419

CTHPIAS087

Power back window
switch P. 94

Power outlets∗ P. 439

∗: If equipped
13
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Pictorial index

Instrument panel

Headlight switch P. 198
Turn signal lever P. 179
Fog light switch∗ P. 204
Gauges and meters P. 182
Windshield wiper and washer switch P. 205
Rear window wiper and washer switch P. 207
Accessory meter P. 194
Compass P. 450
Clock P. 431
Outside temperature display P. 433
Emergency flasher switch
P. 554

Glove box
P. 417

CTHPIAS059

USB adapter∗
P. 348

Shift lever P. 173

Power outlets
P. 436

Parking brake pedal P. 180
Hood lock release lever P. 494
Bottle holders P. 427
14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Audio sytem∗ P. 313
Navigation system*1

Vehicles with a manual air conditioning system
Rear window and outside rear
view mirror defoggers P. 310

Front passenger’s seat belt
reminder light P. 567

Intuitive parking assist
indicator light∗ P. 213
Security indicator
light P. 106, 109

Front passenger “AIR BAG ON” and
“AIR BAG OFF” indicator P. 129

CTHPIAS060

Vehicles with an automatic air conditioning system
Rear window and outside rear
view mirror defoggers P. 310

Front passenger’s seat belt
reminder light P. 567

Intuitive parking assist
indicator light∗ P. 213
Security indicator
light P. 106, 109

Front passenger “AIR BAG ON” and
“AIR BAG OFF” indicator P. 129

CTHPIAS061

∗: If equipped
*1: Refer to “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.
15
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Pictorial index
B

Instrument panel

Vehicles without a smart key system
Engine (ignition) switch P. 164

Audio remote control
switches∗,*2 P. 361

Telephone switch∗,*2 P. 385
Talk switch∗,*2 P. 385

CTHPIAS079

Horn P. 181

Cruise control switch∗

Party mode switch

P. 209

P. 359

Vehicles with a smart key system
Engine (ignition) switch P. 167
Audio remote control
switches∗,*2 P. 361

Telephone switch∗,*2 P. 385
Talk switch∗,*2 P. 385

CTHPIAS080

Horn P. 181

Cruise control switch∗
P. 209

16
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Party mode switch
P. 359

C
Outside rear view mirror switches

P. 89

Instrument panel light control dial
P. 187

Intuitive parking assist switch∗
P. 213

CTHPIAS062

Windshield wiper de-icer switch∗
P. 312

Tilt and telescopic steering lock
release lever P. 86
“RSCA OFF” switch P. 127

Power outlet main switch∗ P. 439

∗: If equipped
*2: For vehicles with a navigation system, refer to the “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.
17
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Pictorial index

Instrument panel

D
Standard type transmission

Power outlets P. 436
AUX adapter
P. 360

Shift lock override button P. 592

Cup holders P. 423

CTHPIAS084

Multi-mode type transmission (2WD)

Power outlets P. 436
AUX adapter
P. 360

Shift lock override button P. 592

Cup holders P. 423

18
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

CTHPIAS034

D
Multi-mode type transmission (part-time 4WD)

Power outlets P. 436
AUX adapter

Front-wheel drive control lever

P. 360

P. 223

Shift lock override button P. 592

Cup holders P. 423

CTHPIAS035

Multi-mode type transmission (full-time 4WD)

Power outlets P. 436
AUX adapter

Four-wheel drive control switch

P. 360

P. 226

Shift lock override button P. 592

Cup holders P. 423

CTHPIAS036

19
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Pictorial index

Luggage compartment

Luggage compartment lights

P. 57

Child restraint anchor brackets P. 139

CTHPIAS064

Slide deck∗ P. 459
Storage compartment∗ P. 458

20
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Vehicles without third row seats
Tool bag P. 578

Cargo net hooks

Jack P. 578

P. 457

Grocery bag hooks
P. 459

Cargo hooks
P. 456

Cargo net
hooks P. 457
Grocery bag hooks∗ P. 459

CTHPIAS066

Vehicles with third row seats
Cargo net hooks
P. 457

Tool bag P. 578
Jack P. 578

Grocery bag
hooks
P. 459

Cargo hooks
P. 456

Cargo net
hooks P. 457
CTHPIAS067

∗: If equipped
21
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Pictorial index

Luggage compartment

B
Vehicles without third row seats

Power outlets P. 436

Power outlets∗ P. 439

Cargo net hooks P. 457
Grocery bag hooks P. 459

Cargo hooks
P. 456

CTHPIAS028

Cargo net hooks
P. 457

Grocery bag hooks∗ P. 459

22
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

B
Vehicles with third row seats

Power outlets P. 436
Storage compartment∗ P. 458
Cargo net hooks P. 457
Grocery bag hooks P. 459

Power outlets∗ P. 439

CTHPIAS029

Cargo hooks P. 456
Cargo net hooks P. 457

∗: If equipped
23
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

1-1. Key information

Keys
The following keys are provided with the vehicle.

Vehicles without a smart key system
Master keys
Operating the wireless remote
control function (→P. 47)

Valet key
Key number plate

Vehicles with a smart key system
Electronic keys
• Operating the smart key
system (→P. 33)
• Operating the wireless
remote control function
(→P. 47)

Mechanical keys
Key number plate

30
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

1-1. Key information

Using the mechanical key (vehicles with a smart key system)
To take out the mechanical key,
push the release button and take
the key out.

■ When required to leave the vehicle’s key with a parking attendant
Lock the glove box as circumstances demand. (→P. 417)
Vehicles without a smart key system: Carry the master key for your own use
and provide the attendant with the valet key.
Vehicles with a smart key system: Remove the mechanical key for your own
use and provide the attendant with the electronic key only.
■ Key number plate
Keep the plate in a safe place such as your wallet, not in the vehicle. In the
event that a key (without a smart key system) or mechanical key (with a
smart key system) is lost, a new key can be made by your Toyota dealer
using the key number plate. (→P. 594)
■ When riding in an aircraft
When bringing a key with wireless remote control function onto an aircraft,
make sure you do not press any buttons on the key while inside the aircraft
cabin. If you are carrying the key in your bag etc., ensure that the buttons
are not likely to be pressed accidentally. Pressing a button may cause the
key to emit radio waves that could interfere with the operation of the aircraft.

31
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Before driving

After using the mechanical key,
store it in the electronic key. Carry
the mechanical key together with
the electronic key. If the electronic
key battery is depleted or the
entry function does not operate
properly, you will need the
mechanical key. (→P. 596)

1-1. Key information

NOTICE
■ To prevent key damage
Observe the following:
● Do not drop the keys, subject them to strong shocks or bend them.
● Do not expose the keys to high temperatures for a long periods of time.
● Do not get the keys wet or wash them in an ultrasonic washer etc.
● Do not attach metallic or magnetic materials to the keys or place the keys
close to such materials.
● Do not disassemble the keys.
● Do not attach a sticker or anything else to the surface of the electronic key.
● Do not place the keys near objects that produce magnetic fields, such as
TVs, audio systems, glass top ranges, or medical electrical equipment,
such as low-frequency therapy equipment.
■ Carrying the electronic key on your person (vehicles with a smart key
system)
Carry the electronic key 3.9 in. (10 cm) or more away from electric appliances that are turned on.
■ In case of a smart key system malfunction or other key-related problems (vehicles with a smart key system)
Take your vehicle with all the electronic keys provided with your vehicle to
your Toyota dealer.
■ When a vehicle key is lost (vehicles with a smart key system)
If the key remains lost, the risk of vehicle theft increases significantly. Visit
your Toyota dealer immediately with all remaining electronic keys that was
provided with your vehicle.

32
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

Smart key system∗

The following operations can be performed simply by carrying the
electronic key on your person, for example in your pocket.
(The driver should always carry the electronic key.)
1

Before driving
CTH12AS048

Locks and unlocks the side doors (→P. 34)
Locks, unlocks and opens the back door (→P. 35)
Opens the back door (→P. 34)
Starts the engine (→P. 167)

∗: If equipped
33
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

Unlocking and locking the side doors (front door handles only)
Grip the handle to unlock the
door.
Make sure to touch the sensor on
the back of the handle.
The doors cannot be unlocked for
3 seconds after the doors are
locked.

Touch the lock sensor (the
indentation on the upper part of
the door handle) to lock the
doors.

Opening the back door
Press the back door opener.
The back door can be opened
even if it is locked.

34
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

Unlocking and locking the back door
Press the button to unlock the
door.

Press the button to lock the door.
The back window can be closed
by pressing and holding this button. (→P. 94)

35
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Before driving

The back window can be opened
by pressing and holding this button. (→P. 94)

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

Antenna location and effective range
■ Antenna location
Antennas outside the cabin
Antennas inside the cabin
Antenna outside the luggage
compartment

CTH12AS050

36
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

■ Effective range (areas within which the electronic key is
detected)
When locking or unlocking the doors

When starting the engine
or changing “ENGINE
START STOP” switch
modes
The system can be operated when the electronic
key is inside the vehicle.

37
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Before driving

CTH12AS051

The system can be operated when the electronic
key is within about 2.3 ft.
(0.7 m) either of the outside
front door handles and back
door. (Only the doors
detecting the key can be
operated.)

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

■ Operation signals
A buzzer sounds and the emergency flashers flash to indicate that the doors
have been locked/unlocked. (Locked: once; Unlocked: twice)
■ When the door cannot be locked by the lock sensor on the upper part
of the door handle
Touch both lock sensors on the upper and
lower part of the door handle simultaneously.

■ Alarms and warning indicators
A combination of exterior and interior alarms as well as warning lights is
used to prevent theft of the vehicle and accidents resulting from erroneous
operation.
When any warning lights come on, take appropriate measures depending on
which warning light comes on. (→P. 565)

38
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

The following table describes circumstances and correction procedures
when only alarms are sounded.
Alarm

Situation

Correction procedure

An attempt was made to
lock the doors using the
entry function while the
electronic key was still
inside the vehicle.
An attempt was made to
lock either front door by
opening a door and putting
the inside lock button into
the lock position, then
closing the door by pulling
on the outside door handle
with the electronic key still
inside the vehicle.

Before driving

Exterior alarm
sounds once for
10 seconds

Retrieve the electronic key from the
vehicle and lock the
doors again.

Exterior alarm
sounds once for
10 seconds

An attempt was made to
lock the vehicle using the
entry function while a door
was open.

Close all of the doors
and lock the doors
again.

Interior alarm
sounds continuously

An attempt was made to
open the door and exit the
vehicle when the shift lever
was not in P.

Shift the shift lever to
P.

Interior alarm
pings repeatedly

The “ENGINE START
STOP” switch was turned
to ACCESSORY mode
while the driver's door was
open
(The driver's door was
opened when the
“ENGINE START STOP”
switch was in ACCESSORY mode.)

Turn the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch
off and close the
driver's door.

39
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

Alarm

Interior alarm
sounds once.

Situation
The “ENGINE START
STOP” switch was pressed
after the doors were
unlocked with the mechanical key.
The “ENGINE START
STOP” switch was pressed
two consecutive times
without the electronic key
being present.

Correction procedure

Touch the electronic
key to the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch
while depressing the
brake pedal.

■ Security feature
If a door is not opened within approximately 60 seconds after the vehicle is
unlocked, the security feature automatically locks the vehicle again.
■ Battery-saving function
In the following circumstances, the entry function is disabled in order to prevent the vehicle battery from discharging and the electronic key battery from
depleting.
● When the entry function has not been used for 5 days or more
● When the electronic key has been left within approximately 6 ft. (2 m) of
the vehicle for 10 minutes or more
● If the entry function has not been used for 14 days or more, the vehicle
cannot be unlocked by a door other than the driver's door. To unlock the
vehicle, grip the driver's door handle or use the wireless remote control
or the mechanical key.
The system will resume operation when
● The vehicle is locked using the door handle lock switch when carrying the
electronic key on your person.
● The vehicle is locked/unlocked using the wireless remote control.
(→P. 47)
● The vehicle is locked/unlocked using the mechanical key. (→P. 596)

40
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

■ Conditions affecting operation
The smart key system uses weak radio waves. In the following situations,
the communication between the electronic key and the vehicle may be
affected, preventing the smart key system, wireless remote control and
immobilizer system from operating properly. (Way of coping →P. 596)

● When the electronic key battery is depleted

● When carrying a portable radio, mobile phone, cordless phone or other
wireless communication device
● When the electronic key is in contact with, or is covered by the following
metallic objects
• Cards to which aluminum foil is attached
• Cigarette boxes that have aluminum foil inside
• Metallic wallets or bags
• Coins
• Hand warmers made of metal
• Media such as CDs and DVDs
● When multiple electronic keys are in the vicinity
● When other wireless keys (that emit radio waves) are being used nearby
● When carrying the electronic key together with the following devices that
emit radio waves
• Another vehicle's electronic key or a wireless key that emits radio
waves
• Personal computers or personal digital assistants (PDAs)
• Digital audio players
• Portable game systems
● If window tint with a metallic content or metallic objects are attached to
the back window

41
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Before driving

● Near a TV tower, electric power plant, gas station, radio station, large display, airport or other facility that generates strong radio waves or electrical noise

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

■ Note for the entry function
● Even when the electronic key is within the effective range (detection
areas), the system may not operate properly in the following cases:
• The electronic key is too close to the window or outside door handle,
near the ground, or in a high place when the doors are locked or
unlocked.
• The electronic key is on the instrument panel or floor, in the glove box,
or in the auxiliary box of the instrument panel.
● As long as the electronic key is within the effective range, the doors may
be locked or unlocked by anyone. However, only the doors detecting the
electronic key can be used to unlock the vehicle.
● The doors may lock or unlock if the electronic key is within the effective
range and a large amount of water splashes on the door handle, such as
in the rain or in a car wash. The doors will automatically be locked after
approximately 60 seconds if a door is not opened and closed.
● If the wireless remote control is used to lock the doors when the electronic key is near the vehicle, there is a possibility that the door may not
be unlocked by the entry function. (Use the wireless remote control to
unlock the doors.)
■ Notes for locking the doors
● Touching the door lock sensor while wearing gloves may delay or prevent
lock operation. Remove the gloves and touch the lock sensor again.
● When the lock operation is performed using the lock sensor, recognition
signals will be shown up to two consecutive times. After this, no recognition signals will be given.
● If the door handle becomes wet while the electronic key is within the
effective range, the door may lock and unlock repeatedly. Place the key
in a position 6 ft. (2 m) or more separate from the vehicle while the vehicle is being washed. (Take care to ensure that the key is not stolen.)
● If the electronic key is inside the vehicle and a door handle becomes wet
during a car wash, a buzzer will sound outside the vehicle. To turn off the
alarm, lock all the doors.

42
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

● The lock sensor may not work properly if it comes into contact with ice,
snow, mud, etc. Clean the lock sensor and attempt to operate it again, or
use the lock sensor on the lower part of the door handle.
● Fingernails may scrape against the door during operation of the door
handle. Be careful not to injure fingernails or damage the surface of the
door.
● Gripping the door handle when wearing a glove may not unlock the door.
● A sudden approach to the effective range or door handle may prevent the
doors from being unlocked. In this case, return the door handle to the
original position and check that the doors unlock before pulling the door
handle again.
● If there is another electronic key in the detection area, it may take slightly
longer to unlock the doors after the door handle is gripped.
■ When the vehicle is not driven for extended periods
To prevent theft of the vehicle, do not leave the electronic key within 6 ft. (2
m) of the vehicle.
■ To operate the system properly
Make sure to carry the electronic key when operating the system. Do not get
the electronic key too close to the vehicle when operating the system from
the outside of the vehicle.
Depending on the position and holding condition of the electronic key, the
key may not be detected correctly and the system may not operate properly.
(The alarm may go off accidentally, or the door lock prevention function may
not operate.)
■ If the smart key system does not operate properly
● Locking and unlocking the doors: Use the mechanical key. (→P. 596)
● Starting the engine: →P. 597

43
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Before driving

■ Notes for the unlocking function

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

■ Electronic key battery depletion
● The standard battery life is 1 to 2 years.
● As the electronic key always transmits radio waves, the battery will
become depleted even if the electronic key is not used. The following
symptoms indicate that the electronic key battery may be depleted.
Replace the battery when necessary. (→P. 528)
• The smart key system or the wireless remote control does not operate.
• The detection area becomes smaller.
• The LED indicator on the key surface does not turn on.
● To avoid serious deterioration, do not leave the electronic key within 3 ft.
(1 m) of the following electrical appliances that produce a magnetic field:
•
•
•
•
•
•

TVs
Personal computers
Cellular phones, cordless phones and battery chargers
Recharging cellular phones or cordless phones
Glass top ranges
Table lamps

■ Precautions when disconnecting the battery
● In some cases, it may not be possible to unlock the doors using the smart
key system immediately after the battery has been disconnected. Use
the wireless remote control or the mechanical key to lock or unlock the
doors.
● The engine may not start on the first attempt after reconnecting the battery but will start normally after the second attempt. This is not a malfunction.
● The “ENGINE START STOP” switch mode is memorized by the vehicle.
When the battery is reconnected, the system will return to the mode it
was in before the battery was disconnected. Before disconnecting the
battery, turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch off.
If you are unsure what mode the “ENGINE START STOP” switch was in
when the battery was disconnected, be especially careful when reconnecting the battery.

44
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

■ When the electronic key battery is fully depleted
→P. 528
■ Customization that can be configured at Toyota dealer
Settings (e.g. smart key system) can be changed.
(Customizable features →P. 638)

Before driving

■ Certification for the smart key system
For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.
FCC ID: NI4TMIMB-2
FCC ID: NI4TMLF8-14
FCC ID: HYQ14ACX
FCC ID: HYQ13CZD
FCC ID: HYQ14ADF
FCC ID: HYQ13CZE
NOTE:
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation.
FCC WARNING:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible
for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
For vehicles sold in Canada
NOTE:
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not
cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

45
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

CAUTION
■ Caution regarding interference with electronic devices
● People with implanted pacemakers or cardiac defibrillators should keep
away from the smart key system antennas. (→P. 36)
The radio waves may affect the operation of such devices. If necessary,
the entry function can be disabled. Ask your Toyota dealer for details, such
as the frequency of radio waves and timing of emitting the radio waves.
Then, consult your doctor to see if you should disable the entry function.
● Users of any electrical medical device other than implanted pacemakers
and implanted cardiac defibrillators should consult the manufacturer of the
device for information about its operation under the influence of radio
waves.
Radio waves could have unexpected effects on the operation of such
medical devices.
Ask your Toyota dealer for details on disabling the entry function.

46
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

Wireless remote control
The wireless remote control can be used to lock and unlock the vehicle.

Vehicles without a smart key system
1

Locks all the doors

Before driving

Sounds the alarm
(press and hold) (→P. 48)
Unlocks all the doors

CTH12AS045

Pressing the button unlocks
the driver’s door. Pressing the
button again within 3 seconds
unlocks the other doors.

Opens the windows and
moon roof (press and hold)*

*: This

setting must be customized at your Toyota dealer.

Vehicles with a smart key system
Locks all the doors
Unlocks all the doors
Pressing the button unlocks
the driver’s door. Pressing the
button again within 3 seconds
unlocks the other doors.
CTH12AS046

Opens the windows and
moon roof (press and hold)*
Sounds the alarm
(press and hold) (→P. 48)

*: This

setting must be customized at your Toyota dealer.

47
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

■ Operation signals
A buzzer sounds and the emergency flashers flash to indicate that the doors
have been locked/unlocked. (Locked: once; Unlocked: twice)
■ Door lock buzzer
If an attempt to lock the doors is made when a door is not fully closed, a
buzzer sounds continuously. Fully close the door to stop the buzzer, and lock
the vehicle once more.
■ Panic mode
Vehicles without a smart key system
When

is pressed for longer

than about one second, an alarm will
sound intermittently and the vehicle
lights will flash to deter any person from
trying to break into or damage your
vehicle.
To stop the alarm, press any button on
the wireless remote control.
Vehicles with a smart key system
When
is pressed for longer
than about one second, an alarm will
sound intermittently and the vehicle
lights will flash to deter any person from
trying to break into or damage your
vehicle.
To stop the alarm, press any button on
the electronic key.
■ Security feature
If a door is not opened within approximately 60 seconds after the vehicle is
unlocked, the security feature automatically locks the vehicle again.
■ Alarm
Using the wireless remote control to lock the doors will set the alarm system.
(→P. 109)
48
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

■ Conditions affecting operation
Vehicles without a smart key system
The wireless remote control function may not operate normally in the following situations:
● Near a TV tower, radio station, electric power plant, airport or other facility that generates strong radio waves

● When multiple wireless keys are in the vicinity
● When the wireless key is in contact with, or is covered by, a metallic
object
● When a wireless key (that emits radio waves) is being used nearby
● When the wireless key has been left near an electrical appliance such as
a personal computer
Vehicles with a smart key system
→P. 41
■ If the wireless remote control does not operate properly (vehicles with
a smart key system)
Locking and unlocking the doors: Use the mechanical key. (→P. 596)
■ Key battery depletion
Vehicles without a smart key system
If the wireless remote control function does not operate, the battery may be
depleted. Replace the battery when necessary. (→P. 528)
Vehicles with a smart key system
→P. 44
■ When the electronic key battery is fully depleted
→P. 528
■ When riding in an aircraft
When bringing a key with wireless remote control function onto an aircraft,
make sure you do not press any buttons on the key while inside the aircraft
cabin. If you are carrying the key in your bag etc, ensure that the buttons are
not likely to be pressed accidentally. Pressing a button may cause the key to
emit radio waves that could interfere with the operation of the aircraft.
49
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Before driving

● When carrying a portable radio, cellular phone or other wireless communication devices

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

■ Customization that can be configured at Toyota dealer
Settings (e.g. wireless remote control system) can be changed.
(Customizable features →P. 638)
■ Certification for wireless remote control
For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.
FCC ID: HYQ14ACX
FCC ID: HYQ13CZD
FCC ID: HYQ14ADF
FCC ID: HYQ13CZE
FCC ID: HYQ12BBY
FCC ID: HYQ13BDC
NOTE:
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation.
FCC WARNING:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible
for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
For vehicles sold in Canada
NOTE:
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not
cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

50
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

Side doors
The vehicle can be locked and unlocked using the entry function,
wireless remote control, key or door lock switch.

■ Entry function (vehicles with a smart key system)

→P. 33

Before driving

■ Wireless remote control
→P. 47
■ Key
Turning the key operates the doors as follows:
Vehicles without a smart key system
Locks all the doors
Unlocks all the doors
Turning the key unlocks the
driver's door. Turning the key
again unlocks the other doors.

Vehicles with a smart key system
The doors can also be locked and unlocked with the mechanical
key. (→P. 596)

51
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

■ Door lock switch
Locks all the doors
Unlocks all the doors

CTH12AS013

■ Inside lock buttons
Locks the door
Unlocks the door
The front doors can be opened
by pulling the inside handle
even if the lock buttons are in
the lock position.
CTH12AS014

Locking the doors from the outside without a key
STEP 1

Move the inside lock button to the lock position.

STEP 2

Close the door.

Vehicles without a smart key system
The door cannot be locked if either of the front doors is open and
the key is in the engine switch.
Vehicles with a smart key system
The door cannot be locked if the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is
in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode, or the electronic key is
left inside the vehicle.
The key may not be detected correctly and the door may be locked.
52
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

Rear door child-protector lock
The door cannot be opened from
inside the vehicle when the lock
is set.

Automatic door locking and unlocking systems
The following functions can be set or canceled:
Function

Operation

Shift position linked
door locking function

Shifting the shift lever out of P locks all the
doors.

Shift position linked
door unlocking function

Shifting the shift lever to P unlocks all the
doors.

Speed linked door locking function

All the doors are locked when the vehicle
speed is approximately 12 mph (20 km/h) or
higher.

Driver's door linked door
unlocking function
(vehicles without a
smart key system)

All the doors are unlocked when the driver's
door is opened within 10 seconds after turning
the engine switch to “ACC” or “LOCK”.

Driver's door linked door
unlocking function
(vehicles with a smart
key system)

All the doors are unlocked when the driver's
door is opened within 10 seconds after turning
the “ENGINE START STOP” switch off.

53
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Before driving

CTH12AS015

These locks can be set to prevent
children from opening the rear
doors. Push down on each rear
door switch to lock both rear
doors.

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

■ Setting and canceling the functions
To switch between setting and canceling, follow the procedure
below:
STEP 1

Vehicles without a smart key system
Close all the doors and turn the engine switch to the “ON”
position. (Perform step 2 within 20 seconds.)
Vehicles with a smart key system
Close all the doors and turn the “ENGINE START STOP”
switch to IGNITION ON mode. (Perform step 2 within 20 seconds.)

STEP 2

Shift the shift lever to P or N, and
press and hold the driver's door
lock switch (
or
) for
approximately 5 seconds and
then release.

CTH12AS016

The shift lever and switch positions corresponding to the
desired function to be set are
shown in the following table.
Use the same procedure to cancel the function.
Shift lever
position

Function
Shift position linked door locking function
Shift position linked door
unlocking function
Speed linked door locking function
Driver's door linked door unlocking function

54
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Driver’s door lock
switch position

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

When the setting or canceling operation is complete, all the doors are
locked and then unlocked.
■ Using the mechanical key (vehicles with a smart key system)

The doors can also be locked and unlocked with the mechanical key.
(→P. 596)

Before driving

■ Customization that can be configured at Toyota dealer
Settings (e.g. door unlocking function) can be changed.
(Customizable features →P. 638)

CAUTION
■ To prevent an accident
Observe the following precautions while driving the vehicle.
Failure to do so may result in a door opening and an occupant falling out,
resulting in death or serious injury.
● Always use a seat belt.
● Always lock all the doors.
● Ensure that all doors are properly closed.
● Do not pull the inside handle of the doors while driving.
The doors may be opened and the passengers are thrown out of the vehicle and it may result in serious injury or death.
Be especially careful for the front doors, as the doors may be opened even
if the inside lock buttons are in locked position.
● Set the rear door child-protector locks when children are seated in the rear
seats.

55
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

Back door
The back door can be locked/unlocked and opened by the following
procedures:

■ Locking and unlocking the back door
Entry function (vehicles with a smart key system)
→P. 34
Wireless remote control
→P. 47
Door lock switch
→P. 52
Keys (vehicles without a smart key system)
Unlocks all the doors
Opens the back window
(turn and hold) (→P. 94)
Locks all the doors
Closes the back window
(turn and hold) (→P. 94)
CTH12AS018

■ Opening the back door from outside the vehicle
Back door opener
Raise the back door while
pushing up the back door
opener switch.

CTH12AS038

56
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

Rear step bumper
The rear step bumper is
intended for rear end protection
and easier step-up loading.

Before driving

CTH12AS019

■ When closing the back door
Lower the back door using the back door
handle, and make sure to push the back
door down from the outside to close it.

CTH12AS029

■ Luggage compartment lights
Each luggage compartment light has the following 3 positions:
Turns the light off
Turns the light on
Turns the light on/off linked to back
door position

CTH12AS033

If the luggage compartment lights remain on when the back door is not fully
closed and the luggage compartment light switch is in the “DOOR” position,
the lights will go off automatically after 20 minutes.
■ If the back door opener is inoperative or the battery is discharged
→P. 595
57
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

CAUTION
■ Caution while driving
● Keep the back door closed.
If the back door is left open, it may hit nearby objects while driving or luggage may be unexpectedly thrown out, causing an accident.
In addition, exhaust gases may enter the vehicle, causing death or a serious health hazard. Make sure to close the back door before driving.
● Before driving the vehicle, make sure that the back door is fully closed. If
the back door is not fully closed, it may open unexpectedly while driving,
causing an accident.
● Never let anyone sit in the luggage compartment. In the event of sudden
braking or a collision, they are susceptible to death or serious injury.
● Do not get on the rear step bumper.
■ When children are in the vehicle
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
● Do not leave children alone in the luggage compartment.
If a child is accidentally locked in the luggage compartment, they could
have heat exhaustion.
● Do not allow a child to open or close the back door.
Doing so may cause the back door to operate unexpectedly, or cause the
child’s hands, head, or neck to be caught by the closing back door, which
may result in death or serious injury of the child.
■ Operating the back door
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause parts of the body to be caught, resulting in serious injury.
● Remove any heavy loads, such as snow and ice, from the back door
before opening it. Failure to do so may cause the back door to fall closed
again after it is opened.

58
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

CAUTION
● When opening or closing the back door, thoroughly check to make sure
the surrounding area is safe.
● If anyone is in the vicinity, make sure they are safe and let them know that
the back door is about to open or close.

● Use caution when opening or closing the back door in windy weather as it
may move abruptly in strong wind.

Before driving

CTH12AS035

● The back door may fall if it is not
opened fully. It is more difficult to open
or close the back door on an incline
than on a level surface, so beware of
the back door unexpectedly opening or
closing by itself. Make sure that the
back door is fully open and secure
before using the luggage compartment.
● When closing the back door, take extra
care to prevent your fingers etc. from
being caught.

CTH12AS037

● When closing the back door, make sure
to press it lightly on its outer surface. If
the back door handle is used to fully
close the back door, it may result in
hands or arms being caught.

● Do not pull on the back door damper stay to close the back door, and do
not hang on the back door damper stay.
Doing so may cause hands to be caught or the back door damper stay to
break, causing an accident.
● Do not attach any accessories other than genuine Toyota parts to the back
door. Such additional weight on the back door may cause the back door to
fall closed again after it is opened.

59
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to the back door components
Do not allow more than one person to get on the rear step bumper at a time.
■ Back door damper stays
The back door is equipped with damper stays that hold the back door in
place.
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause damage to the back door damper stay, resulting
in malfunction.
● Do not attach any foreign objects, such
as stickers, plastic sheets, or adhesives
to the damper stay rod.
● Do not touch the damper stay rod with
gloves or other fabric items.
CTH12AS036

● Do not attach any accessories other
than genuine Toyota parts to the back
door.
● Do not place your hand on the damper
stay or apply lateral forces to it.

60
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

Front seats
Manual seat
Seat position
lever

adjustment
1

Vertical height adjustment
lever (driver’s side only)

Before driving

Seatback angle adjustment
lever
Lumber support adjustment
switch (driver’s side only)

CTH13AS055

61
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

Power seat
Seat position
switch

adjustment

Seatback angle adjustment
switch
Seat cushion (front) angle
adjustment switch (driver’s
side only)
Vertical height adjustment
switch (driver’s side only)
Lumber support adjustment
switch (driver’s side only)

CTH13AS010

Active head restraints
When the occupant’s lower back
presses against the seatback
during a rear-end collision, the
head restraint moves slightly forward and upward to help reduce
the risk of whiplash to the seat
occupant.
CTH13AS011

62
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

■ The auto away function for exiting the driver seat
If the seat is already close to the rearmost position, the auto away function
may not operate when the driver exits the vehicle.
1

■ Active head restraints

During
rear-end
collision
Inner
structure

CTH13AS012

63
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Before driving

Even small forces applied to the seatback may cause the head restraint to
move. Pushing up a locked head restraint forcibly may appear the head
restraint inner structure. These do not indicate problems.

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

CAUTION
■ Seat adjustment
● To reduce the risk of sliding under the lap belt during a collision, do not
recline the seat more than necessary.
If the seat is too reclined, the lap belt may slide past the hips and apply
restraint forces directly to the abdomen, or your neck may contact the
shoulder belt, increasing the risk of death or serious injury in the event of
an accident.
Adjustments should not be made while driving as the seat may unexpectedly move and cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
● After adjusting the seat, make sure that the seat is locked in position.

64
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

Rear seats
Vehicles without third row seats
■ Rear seat
Pull up the seatback angle
adjustment lever until the lock
is released.

Before driving

CTH13AS013

65
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

Vehicles with third row seats
■ Second row seats
Seat position
lever

adjustment

Seatback angle adjustment
lever

CTH13AS053

■ Third row seats
The third row seats do not have a seat adjustment function.

66
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

Folding down the rear seats (vehicles without third row seats)
■ Before folding down the rear seats
Adjust the head restraints to the
downmost position.

Before driving

CTH13AS014

Stow the rear seat belt buckles.

CTH13AS070

67
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

■ Folding down the rear seats
Swing the bottom cushions up by
pulling the lock release strap.
When returning the rear seat
cushions to their original positions, make sure they are locked
securely.
CTH13AS016

Push the lock release button and
fold down the seatbacks.
To return the rear seatbacks to
their original positions, lift them
up until they lock.

CTH13AS065

■ Folding down rear center seatback only
Pull the center seatback angle
lever behind the seatback and
fold the seatback down.
To return the rear center seatback
to its original position, lift it up
until it locks.
CTH13AS022

68
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

Folding down the second row seats (vehicles with third row seats)
■ Before folding down the second row seats
Adjust the head restraints to the
downmost position.

STEP 1

Before driving

CTH13AS045

Stow the second row seat belt
buckles.

STEP 2

CTH13AS071

69
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

■ Folding down the second row seats
Pull the seatback lock release
lever and fold the seatback
down.
To return the second row seatbacks to their original positions,
lift them up until they lock.
CTH13AS051

■ Folding down the second row center seatback only
Pull the center seatback angle
lever behind the seatback and
fold the seatback down.
To return the second row center
seatback to its original position,
lift it up until it locks.
CTH13AS052

70
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

Moving a second row seat for access to the third row seats (vehicles
with third row seats)
■ Getting in the vehicle (right side only)

Move the seat to the front-most
position.

CTH13AS057

■ Getting out of the vehicle (right side only)
Lift the lever on the back of the
seatback and fold down the seatback. The seat will slide forward.
Move the seat to the front-most
position.

CTH13AS058

■ After passengers have entered/exited the vehicle
Lift up the seatback and slide the seat backward until it locks.

71
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Before driving

Pull up the lever and fold down
the seatback. The seat will slide
forward.

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

Folding down the third row seats (vehicles with third row seats)
■ Before folding down the third row seats
Pass the seat belts through the
seat belt hangers and secure the
seat belt plates.
This prevents the shoulder belts
from being damaged.
Make sure that the seat belts are
removed from the hangers before
using them.

CTH13AS072

■ Folding down the third row seats
From inside
Pull the strap to fold down the
head restraint.

STEP 1

CTH13AS025

Pull the lever up.

STEP 2

The seat cushion will slide backward.

CTH13AS026

72
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

Pull the lever to unlock the seatback and then fold the seatback
down.

STEP 3

From outside
Pull the strap to fold down the
head restraint.

STEP 1

CTH13AS028

Pull the lever up.

STEP 2

The seat cushion will slide backward and the seatback will be
unlocked.

CTH13AS029

Fold the seatback down.

STEP 3

CTH13AS064

73
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Before driving

CTH13AS027

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

■ Returning the third row seats
As the seat cushions cannot be pulled forward from outside, this
operation can only be performed from inside.
Raise the seatbacks to their original positions.

STEP 1

Make sure
securely.

they

are

locked

CTH13AS061

Pull the seat cushions forward.

STEP 2

CTH13AS062

Raise the head restraints.

STEP 3

CTH13AS063

74
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

CAUTION
■ When folding the rear seatbacks down
Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may result in death or
serious injury.

● Do not fold the seatbacks down while driving.

● Do not allow anyone to sit on a folded seatback or in the luggage compartment while driving.
● Do not allow children to enter the luggage compartment.
■ Seat adjustment
To reduce the risk of sliding under the lap belt during a collision, do not
recline the seat more than necessary.
If the seat is too reclined, the lap belt may slide past the hips and apply
restraint forces directly to the abdomen, or your neck may contact the shoulder belt, increasing the risk of death or serious injury in the event of an accident.
Adjustments should not be made while driving as the seat may unexpectedly
move and cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
■ After returning the rear seatback to the upright position
Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may result in death or
serious injury.
● Make sure the seatback is securely locked by pushing it forward and rearward on the top.
● Check that the seat belts are not twisted or caught in the seatback.

NOTICE
■ Stowing the seat belts
The seat belts and the buckles must be stowed before you fold down the
rear seatbacks.

75
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Before driving

● Stop the vehicle on level ground, set the parking brake and shift the shift
lever to P.

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

Head restraints
Head restraints are provided for all seats.

Front and second seats
Up
Pull the head restraints up.

Down
Lock release
button

Push the head restraint down
while pushing the lock release
button.
CTH13AS031

Third seats (vehicles with third row seats)
To use
To fold

CTH13AS034

76
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

■ Removing the head restraints (except third row seats)
Pull the head restraint up while pressing
the lock release button.

Before driving

CTH13AS036

■ Installing the head restraints (except third row seats)
Align the head restraint with the installation holes and push it down to the lock
position.
Press and hold the lock release button
when lowering the head restraint.
CTH13AS037

■ Adjusting the height of the head restraints
Make sure that the head restraints are
adjusted so that the center of the head
restraint is closest to the top of your ears.

CTH13AS035

■ Adjusting the second center seat head restraint
Always raise the head restraint one level from the stowed position when
using.

77
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

CAUTION
■ Head restraint precautions
Observe the following precautions regarding the head restraints. Failure to
do so may result in death or serious injury.
● Use the head restraints designed for each respective seat.
● Adjust the head restraints to the correct position at all times.
● After adjusting the head restraints, push down on them and make sure
they are locked in position.
● Do not drive with the head restraints removed.

78
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

Seat belts
Make sure that all occupants are wearing their seat belts before driving the vehicle.

■ Correct use of the seat belts

CTH13AS038

Before driving

● Extend the shoulder belt so
that it comes fully over the
shoulder, but does not
come into contact with the
neck or slide off the shoulder.
● Position the lap belt as low
as possible over the hips.
● Adjust the position of the
seatback. Sit up straight
and well back in the seat.
● Do not twist the seat belt.
■ Fastening and releasing the seat belt
To fasten the seat belt, push
the plate into the buckle
until a click sound is heard.
To release the seat belt,
press the release button.

Release button

CTH13AS039

79
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

■ Adjusting the seat belt shoulder anchor height (front seats)
Push the seat belt shoulder
anchor down while pressing
the release button.
Push the seat belt shoulder
anchor up.
Move the height adjuster up
and down as needed until you
hear a click.

CTH13AS040

Seat belt pretensioners (front seats)
The pretensioner helps the seat
belt to quickly restrain the occupant by retracting the seat belt
when the vehicle is subjected to
certain types of severe frontal
and side collision or a vehicle
rollover.
CTH13AS041

80
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

The pretensioner may not activate in the event of a minor frontal
or side impact or a rear impact.

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

■ Emergency locking retractor (ELR)
The retractor will lock the belt during a sudden stop or on impact. It may also
lock if you lean forward too quickly. A slow, easy motion will allow the belt to
extend so that you can move around fully.

■ Automatic locking retractor (ALR)

■ Pregnant women
Obtain medical advice and wear the seat
belt in the proper way. (→P. 79)
Women who are pregnant should position
the lap belt as low as possible over the
hips in the same manner as other occupants. Extend the shoulder belt completely over the shoulder and position the
belt across the chest. Avoid belt contact
over the rounding of the abdominal area.

CTH13AS042

If the seat belt is not worn properly, not
only the pregnant woman, but also the
fetus could suffer death or serious injury
as a result of sudden braking or a collision.

■ People suffering illness
Obtain medical advice and wear the seat belt in the proper way. (→P. 79)

81
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Before driving

When a passenger's shoulder belt is completely extended and then
retracted even slightly, the belt is locked in that position and cannot be
extended. This feature is used to hold the child restraint system (CRS) firmly.
To free the belt again, fully retract the belt and then pull the belt out once
more. (→P. 139)

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

■ Child seat belt usage
The seat belts of your vehicle were principally designed for persons of adult
size.
● Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child, until the child
becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle’s seat belt. (→P. 135)
● When the child becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle’s
seat belt, follow the instructions on P. 79 regarding seat belt usage.
■ Replacing the belt after the pretensioner has been activated
If the vehicle is involved in multiple collisions, the pretensioner will activate
for the first collision, but will not activate for the second or subsequent collisions.
■ Seat belt extender
If your seat belts cannot be fastened
securely because they are not long
enough, a personalized seat belt
extender is available from your Toyota
dealer free of charge.
CTH13AS044

82
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

CAUTION
■ Wearing a seat belt
Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of injury in the event of
sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.
Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.
● Always wear a seat belt properly.
● Each seat belt should be used by one person only. Do not use a seat belt
for more than one person at once, including children.
● Toyota recommends that children be seated in the rear seat and always
use a seat belt and/or an appropriate child restraint system.
● To achieve a proper seating position, do not recline the seat more than
necessary. The seat belt is most effective when the occupants are sitting
up straight and well back in the seats.
● Do not wear the shoulder belt under your arm.
● Always wear your seat belt low and snug across your hips.
■ Seat belt pretensioners
● Do not place anything, such as a cushion, on the front passenger's seat.
Doing so will disperse the passenger's weight, which prevents the sensor
from detecting the passenger's weight properly. As a result, the seat belt
pretensioner for the front passenger's seat may not activate in the event of
a collision.
● If the pretensioner has activated, the SRS warning light will come on. In
that case, the seat belt cannot be used again and must be replaced at
your Toyota dealer.
■ Adjustable shoulder anchor
Always make sure the shoulder belt is positioned across the center of your
shoulder. The belt should be kept away from your neck, but not falling off
your shoulder. Failure to do so could reduce the amount of protection in an
accident and cause death or serious injuries in the event of a sudden stop,
sudden swerve or accident. (→P. 80)

83
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Before driving

● Ensure that all passengers wear a seat belt.

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

CAUTION
■ Child restraint lock function belt precaution
Do not allow children to play with the child restraint lock function belt. If the
belt becomes twisted around a child’s neck, it will not be possible to pull the
belt out leading to choking or other serious injuries that could result in death.
If this occurs and the buckle cannot be unfastened, scissors should be used
to cut the belt.
■ Seat belt damage and wear
● Do not damage the seat belts by allowing the belt, plate, or buckle to be
jammed in the door.
● Inspect the seat belt system periodically. Check for cuts, fraying, and loose
parts. Do not use a damaged seat belt until it is replaced. Damaged seat
belts cannot protect an occupant from death or serious injury.
● Ensure that the belt and plate are locked and the belt is not twisted.
If the seat belt does not function correctly, immediately contact your Toyota
dealer.
● Replace the seat assembly, including the belts, if your vehicle has been
involved in a serious accident, even if there’s no obvious damage.
● Do not attempt to install, remove, modify, disassemble or dispose of the
seat belts. Have any necessary repairs carried out by your Toyota dealer.
Inappropriate handling of the pretensioner may prevent it from operating
properly, resulting in death or serious injury.
■ Using a seat belt extender
● Do not wear the seat belt extender if you can fasten the seat belt without
the extender.
● Do not use the seat belt extender when installing a child restraint system
because the belt will not securely hold the child restraint system, increasing the risk of death or serious injury in the event of an accident.
● The personalized extender may not be safe on another vehicle, when
used by another person, or at a different seating position other than the
one originally intended.

84
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

NOTICE
■ When using a seat belt extender
When releasing the seat belt, press on the buckle release button on the
extender, not on the seat belt.
This helps prevent damage to the vehicle interior and the extender itself.

Before driving
85
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

Steering wheel
The steering wheel can be adjusted to a comfortable position.

Hold the steering wheel and
push the lever down.

STEP 1

CTH13AS007

Adjust to the ideal position by
moving the steering wheel
horizontally and vertically.

STEP 2

After adjustment, pull the lever
up to secure the steering
wheel.
CTH13AS008

CAUTION
■ Caution while driving
Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving.
Doing so may cause the driver to mishandle the vehicle and cause an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.
■ After adjusting the steering wheel
Make sure that the steering wheel is securely locked.
Otherwise, the steering wheel may move suddenly, possibly causing an
accident, and resulting in death or serious injury.

86
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

Inside rear view mirror
Glare from the headlights of vehicles behind can be reduced by
using the following functions:

Manual anti-glare inside rear view mirror (if equipped)
1

Normal position

Before driving

Anti-glare position

CTH13AS001

Auto anti-glare inside rear view mirror (if equipped)
In automatic mode, sensors are used to detect the headlights of
vehicles behind and the reflected light is automatically reduced.
Turns automatic mode on/off
The indicator comes on when
automatic mode is turned on.

CTH13AS054

Vehicles without a smart key
system
The mirror will revert to the
automatic mode each time the
engine switch is turned to the
“ON” position.
Vehicles with a smart key
system
The mirror will revert to the
automatic mode each time the
“ENGINE
START
STOP”
switch is turned to IGNITION
ON mode.

87
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

■ To prevent sensor error (vehicles with auto anti-glare inside rear view
mirror)
To ensure that the sensors operate properly, do not touch or cover them.

CTH13AS047

CAUTION
■ Caution while driving
Do not adjust the position of the mirror while driving.
Doing so may lead to mishandling of the vehicle and cause an accident,
resulting in death or serious injury.

88
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

Outside rear view mirrors
Mirror angle can be adjusted using the switch.

To select a mirror to adjust,
press the switch.

STEP 1

Left
Before driving

Right

CTH13AS004

To adjust the mirror, press the
switch.

STEP 2

Up
Right
Down
Left
CTH13AS005

Folding the mirrors
Push the mirror back in the direction of the vehicle's rear.

CTH13AS066
CTH13AS006

89
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

■ Mirror angle can be adjusted when
Vehicles without a smart key system
The engine switch is in the “ACC” or “ON” position.
Vehicles with a smart key system
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON
mode.
■ When the mirrors are fogged up
Turn on the mirror defoggers to defog the mirrors. (→P. 310)

CAUTION
■ When driving the vehicle
Observe the following precautions while driving.
Failure to do so may result in loss of control of the vehicle and cause an
accident, resulting in death or serious injury.
● Do not adjust the mirrors while driving.
● Do not drive with the mirrors folded.
● Both the driver and passenger side mirrors must be extended and properly
adjusted before driving.
■ When a mirror is moving
To avoid personal injury and mirror malfunction, be careful not to get your
hand caught by the moving mirror.
■ When the mirror defoggers are operating
Do not touch the rear view mirror surfaces, as they can become very hot and
burn you.

90
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof

Power windows
The power windows can be opened and closed using the switches.

Operating the switch moves the windows as follows:
Closing

One-touch closing*

Before driving

Opening
One-touch opening*

*: Pushing

the switch in the
opposite direction will stop
window travel partway.

CTH14AS010

Window lock switch
Press the switch down to lock
the passenger window switches
and back window switch.
Use this switch to prevent children from accidentally opening or
closing a passenger window and
back window.
CTH14AS002

91
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof

■ The power windows can be operated when
Vehicles without a smart key system
The engine switch is in the “ON” position.
Vehicles with a smart key system
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
■ Operating the power windows after turning the engine off
Vehicles without a smart key system
The power windows can be operated for approximately 45 seconds even
after the engine switch is turned to the “ACC” or “LOCK” position. They cannot, however, be operated once either front door is opened.
Vehicles with a smart key system
The power windows can be operated for approximately 45 seconds even
after the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is turned to ACCESSORY mode or
turned off. They cannot, however, be operated once either front door is
opened.
■ Jam protection function
If an object becomes caught between the window and the window frame,
window travel is stopped and the window is opened slightly.
■ Customization that can be configured at Toyota dealer
Settings (e.g. linked door lock operation) can be changed.
(Customizable features →P. 638)

92
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof

CAUTION
■ Closing the windows
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

● Do not allow children to operate the power windows.
Closing a power window on someone can cause serious injury, and in
some instances, even death.
■ Jam protection function
● Never use any part of your body to intentionally activate the jam protection
function.
● The jam protection function may not work if something gets caught just
before the window fully closes.

93
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Before driving

● Check to make sure that all passengers do not have any part of their body
in a position where it could be caught when a window is being operated.

1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof

Power back window
The power back window can be opened and closed using the switch
or key.

From inside the vehicle
Closing
One-touch closing*
Opening
One-touch opening*

*: Pressing

the switch in the
opposite direction will stop
window travel partway.

CTH14AS019

From outside the vehicle (vehicles without a smart key system)
Opening
Closing
Turn the key fully and hold it.

CTH14AS012

94
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof

From outside the vehicle (vehicles with a smart key system)
Opening (push and hold)
Closing (push and hold)

Before driving

This operation can only be performed when the electronic key
is within the detection range.

CTH14AS018

■ The power back window can be operated from inside the vehicle when
Vehicles without a smart key system
The engine switch is in the “ON” position.
Vehicles with a smart key system
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
● The power back window can be opened when the rear window wiper is
working, but the wiper stops working until the window is closed again.
If the power back window is not fully closed, the rear window wiper,
washer, and defogger will not work.
● If the back door is not fully closed, the power back window cannot be
opened using the switch located in the cabin. (It is still possible to close
the window.)
● If the back door is opened while the power back window is opening or
closing, window operation will stop.
■ The power back window can be operated from outside the vehicle
when (vehicles with a smart key system)
● The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is off.
● The back door is closed.

95
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof

■ Operating the power back window from inside the vehicle after turning
the engine off
Vehicles without a smart key system
The power back window can be operated for approximately 45 seconds
even after the engine switch is turned to the “ACC” or “LOCK” position. It
cannot, however, be operated once either front door is opened.
Vehicles with a smart key system
The power back window can be operated for approximately 45 seconds
even after the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is turned to ACCESSORY
mode or turned off. It cannot, however, be operated once either front door is
opened.
■ Jam protection function
If an object becomes caught between the window and the window frame,
window tr
Fuel contains substances that are harmful if inhaled.
● Do not smoke while refueling the vehicle.
Doing so may cause the fuel to ignite and cause a fire.
● Do not return to the vehicle or touch any person or object that is statically
charged.
This may cause static electricity to build up, resulting in a possible ignition
hazard.
■ When refueling
Securely insert the fuel nozzle into the fuel filler neck. If fuel is added with
the nozzle slightly lifted away from the fuel filler neck, the automatic shut off
function may not operate, resulting in fuel overflowing from the tank.
■ When replacing the fuel cap
Do not use anything but a genuine Toyota fuel tank cap designed for your
vehicle. Doing so may cause a fire or other incident which may result in
death or serious injury.

104
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

1-5. Refueling

NOTICE
■ Refueling

105
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Before driving

Do not spill fuel during refueling.
Doing so may damage the vehicle, such as causing the emission control
system to operate abnormally or damaging fuel system components or the
vehicle's painted surface.

1-6. Theft deterrent system

Engine immobilizer system
The vehicle’s keys have built-in transponder chips that prevent the
engine from starting if a key has not been previously registered in
the vehicle’s on-board computer.
Never leave the keys inside the vehicle when you leave the vehicle.

Vehicles without a smart
key system
The indicator light flashes after
the key has been removed
from the engine switch to indicate that the system is operating.
CTH16AS004

Vehicles with a smart key
system
The indicator light flashes after
the “ENGINE START STOP”
switch has been turned off to
indicate that the system is
operating.

106
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

1-6. Theft deterrent system

■ System maintenance
The vehicle has a maintenance-free type engine immobilizer system.
■ Conditions that may cause the system to malfunction

● If the grip portion of the key is in contact with a metallic object

■ Certifications for the engine immobilizer system (vehicles without a
smart key system)
● For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.
FCC ID: MOZRI-33BTY
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation.
FCC WARNING:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible
for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
● For vehicles sold in Canada
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not
cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

107
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Before driving

● If the key is in close proximity to or touching a key to the security system
(key with a built-in transponder chip) of another vehicle

1-6. Theft deterrent system

CAUTION
■ Certifications for the immobilizer system
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible
for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

NOTICE
■ To ensure the system operates correctly
Do not modify or remove the system. If modified or removed, the proper
operation of the system cannot be guaranteed.

108
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

1-6. Theft deterrent system

Alarm∗

The system sounds the alarm and flashes the lights when forced
entry is detected.

■ Triggering of the alarm

The alarm is triggered in the following situations:

● The hood is opened with the alarm being set.
■ Setting the alarm system
Close the doors and hood,
and lock all the doors. The
system will be set automatically after 30 seconds.
The indicator light changes
from being on to flashing when
the system is set.
CTH16AS004

■ Deactivating or stopping the alarm
Do one of the following to deactivate or stop the alarms:
● Unlock the doors.
● Start the engine. (The alarm will be deactivated or stopped
after a few seconds.)

∗: If equipped
109
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Before driving

● A locked door is unlocked or opened in any way other than
using the entry function, wireless remote control or mechanical key with the alarm being set. (The doors will lock again
automatically.)

1-6. Theft deterrent system

■ Items to check before locking the vehicle
To prevent unexpected triggering of the alarm and vehicle theft, make sure
of the following:
● Nobody is in the vehicle.
● The windows and moon roof are closed before the alarm is set.
● No valuables or other personal items are left in the vehicle.
■ Triggering of the alarm
The alarm may be triggered in the following situations:
(Stopping the alarm deactivates the alarm system.)
● A person inside the vehicle opens a
door or the hood.

CTH16AS006

● The battery is recharged or replaced
when the vehicle is locked.

CTH16AS007

NOTICE
■ To ensure the system operates correctly
Do not modify or remove the system. If modified or removed, the proper
operation of the system cannot be guaranteed.

110
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

1-6. Theft deterrent system

Theft prevention labels (for U. S. A.)

111
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Before driving

These labels are attached to
the vehicle to reduce vehicle
theft by facilitating the tracing
and recovery of parts from stolen vehicles. Do not remove
under penalty of law.

1-7. Safety information

Correct driving posture
Drive with a good posture as follows:

Sit upright and well back in
the seat. (→P. 61)
Adjust the position of the
seat forward or backward to
ensure the pedals can be
reached
and
easily
depressed to the extent
required. (→P. 61)
Adjust the seatback so that
the controls are easily operable.
Adjust the tilt and telescopic
positions of the steering
wheel downward so the airbag is facing your chest.
(→P. 86)
Lock the head restraint in
place with the center of the
head restraint closest to the
top of your ears. (→P. 76)
Wear the seat belt correctly.
(→P. 79)

112
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

1-7. Safety information

CAUTION
■ While driving
● Do not adjust the position of the driver’s seat.
Doing so could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.

● Do not place anything under the front seats.
Objects placed under the front seats may become jammed in the seat
tracks and stop the seat from locking in place. This may lead to an accident, resulting in death or serious injury. The adjustment mechanism may
also be damaged.
■ Adjusting the seat position
● Take care when adjusting the seat position to ensure that other passengers are not injured by the moving seat.
● Do not put your hands under the seat or near the moving parts to avoid
injury.
Fingers or hands may become jammed in the seat mechanism.

113
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Before driving

● Do not place a cushion between the driver or passenger and the seatback.
A cushion may prevent correct posture from being achieved, and reduce
the effectiveness of the seat belt and head restraint, increasing the risk of
death or serious injury to the driver or passenger.

1-7. Safety information

SRS airbags
The SRS airbags inflate when the vehicle is subjected to certain
types of severe impacts that may cause significant injury to the
occupants. They work together with the seat belts to help reduce the
risk of death or serious injury.

CTH17AS103

SRS front airbags
SRS driver airbag/front passenger airbag
Can help protect the head and chest of the driver and front passenger from impact with interior components
SRS knee airbags
Can help provide driver and front passenger protection
SRS side and curtain shield airbags
SRS side airbags
Can help protect the torso of the front seat occupants
SRS curtain shield airbags
Can help protect primarily the head of occupants in the outer
seats

114
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

1-7. Safety information

SRS airbag system components

Before driving
CTH17AS100

Side airbags
“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG
OFF” indicator lights
Curtain shield airbags
Front passenger airbag
Knee airbags
Side and curtain shield airbag
sensors

Occupant detection system
(ECU and sensors)
Curtain shield airbag sensors
SRS warning light and
“RSCA OFF” indicator light
Roll sensing of curtain shield
airbags off switch
Floor sensor

Front airbag sensors

Driver airbag

Airbag sensor assembly

Driver’s
switch

Front passenger’s seat belt
buckle switch

seat

belt

buckle

115
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

1-7. Safety information

Your vehicle is equipped with ADVANCED AIRBAGS designed based
on the US motor vehicle safety standards (FMVSS208). The airbag
system controls airbag deployment power for the driver and front passenger. The driver airbag system consists of the driver’s seat belt
buckle switch etc. The front passenger’s airbag system consists of
the front passenger occupant classification sensor etc.
The main SRS airbag system components are shown above. The
SRS airbag system is controlled by the airbag sensor assembly. The
airbag sensor assembly consists of a safing sensor and an airbag
sensor.
In certain types of severe frontal or side impacts, the SRS airbag system triggers the airbag inflators. A chemical reaction in the inflators
quickly fills the airbags with non-toxic gas to help restrain the motion
of the occupants.
■ If the SRS airbags deploy (inflate)
● Bruising and slight abrasions may result from contact with a deploying
(inflating) SRS airbag.
● A loud noise and white powder will be emitted.
● Parts of the airbag module (steering wheel hub, airbag cover and inflator)
as well as the front seats, parts of the front and rear pillars, and roof side
rails, may be hot for several minutes. The airbag itself may also be hot.
● The windshield may crack.
● For Safety Connect subscribers, if the SRS airbags deploy or in the event
of a severe rear-end collision, the system is designed to send an emergency call to the response center, notifying them of the vehicle’s location
(without needing to push the “SOS” button) and an agent will attempt to
speak with the occupants to ascertain the level of emergency and assistance required. If the occupants are unable to communicate, the agent
automatically treats the call as an emergency and helps to dispatch the
necessary emergency services. (→P. 469)

116
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

1-7. Safety information

■ SRS airbag deployment conditions (SRS front airbags)
● The front SRS airbags will deploy in the event of an impact that exceeds
the set threshold level (the level of force corresponding to an approximately 12 - 18 mph [20 - 30 km/h] frontal collision with a fixed wall that
does not move or deform).

● It is possible that in some collisions where the forward deceleration of the
vehicle is very close to the designed threshold level, the SRS front airbags and the seat belt pretensioners may not activate together.
● The SRS front passenger airbag will not activate if there is no passenger
sitting in the front passenger seat. However, the front passenger airbag
may deploy, if luggage is put in the seat, even if the seat is unoccupied.
■ SRS airbag deployment conditions (SRS side airbags)
The SRS side airbags will deploy in the event of an impact that exceeds the
set threshold level (the level of force corresponding to the impact force produced by an approximately 3300 lb. [1500 kg] vehicle colliding with the vehicle cabin from a direction perpendicular to the vehicle orientation at an
approximately speed of 12 - 18 mph [20 - 30 km/h]).
■ SRS airbag deployment conditions (SRS curtain shield airbags)
The SRS curtain shield airbags will deploy in the event of vehicle rollover or
an impact that exceeds the set threshold level (the level of force corresponding to the impact force produced by an approximately 3300 lb. [1500 kg]
vehicle colliding with the vehicle cabin from a direction perpendicular to the
vehicle orientation at an approximately speed of 12 - 18 mph [20 - 30 km/h]).

117
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Before driving

However, this threshold velocity will be considerably higher if the vehicle
strikes an object, such as a parked vehicle and sign pole, which can move
or deform on impact, or if the vehicle is involved in an underride collision
(e.g. a collision in which the front of the vehicle “underrides”, or goes
under, the bed of a truck etc.).

1-7. Safety information

■ Conditions under which the SRS airbags may deploy (inflate), other
than a collision
The SRS front airbags may also deploy if a serious impact occurs to the
underside of your vehicle. Some examples are shown in the illustration.
● Hitting a curb, edge of pavement or
hard surface
● Falling into or jumping over a deep hole
● Landing hard or falling

The SRS curtain shield airbags may also deploy under the situations shown
in the illustration.
● The angle of vehicle tip-up is marginal.
● The vehicle skids and hits a curb stone.

■ Types of collisions that may not deploy the SRS airbags (SRS front airbags)
The SRS front airbags are generally not designed to inflate if the vehicle is
involved in a side or rear collision, if it rolls over, or if it is involved in a lowspeed frontal collision. But, whenever a collision of any type causes sufficient forward deceleration of the vehicle, deployment of the SRS front airbags may occur.
● Collision from the side
● Collision from the rear
● Vehicle rollover

118
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

1-7. Safety information

■ Types of collisions that may not deploy the SRS airbags
(SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags)
The SRS side airbag and curtain shield airbag system may not activate if the
vehicle is subjected to a collision from the side at certain angles, or a collision to the side of the vehicle body other than the passenger compartment.

● Collision from the side at an angle

The SRS side airbags are not generally designed to inflate if the vehicle is
involved in a frontal or rear collision, if it rolls over, or if it is involved in a lowspeed side collision.
● Collision from the front
● Collision from the rear
● Vehicle rollover

The SRS curtain shield airbags are not generally designed to inflate if the
vehicle is involved in a frontal or rear collision, if it pitches end over end, or if
it is involved in a low-speed side collision.
● Collision from the front
● Collision from the rear
● Pitching end over end

119
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Before driving

● Collision from the side to the vehicle
body other than the passenger compartment

1-7. Safety information

■ When to contact your Toyota dealer
In the following cases, contact your Toyota dealer as soon as possible. Do
not disconnect the battery cables before contacting your Toyota dealer.
● Any of the SRS airbags have been inflated.
● The front of the vehicle is damaged or
deformed, or was involved in an accident that was not severe enough to
cause the SRS airbags to inflate.

● A portion of a door is damaged or
deformed, or the vehicle was involved
in an accident that was not severe
enough to cause the SRS side airbags
and curtain shield airbags to inflate.

● The pad section of the steering wheel,
dashboard near the front passenger airbag or lower portion of the instrument
panel is scratched, cracked, or otherwise damaged.
CTH17AS078

● The surface of the seats with the side
airbag is scratched, cracked, or otherwise damaged.
● The portion of the front and rear pillar
garnish, or roof interior containing the
curtain shield airbags inside is
scratched, cracked or otherwise damaged.

120
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

1-7. Safety information

CAUTION
■ SRS airbag precautions
Observe the following precautions regarding the SRS airbags.
Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.

● The SRS driver airbag deploys with considerable force, and can cause
death or serious injury especially if the driver is very close to the airbag.
The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) advises:
Since the risk zone for the driver’s airbag is the first 2 - 3 in. (50 - 75 mm)
of inflation, placing yourself 10 in. (250 mm) from your driver airbag provides you with a clear margin of safety. This distance is measured from the
center of the steering wheel to your breastbone. If you sit less than 10 in.
(250 mm) away now, you can change your driving position in several
ways:
• Move your seat to the rear as far as you can while still reaching the
pedals comfortably.
• Slightly recline the back of the seat.
Although vehicle designs vary, many drivers can achieve the 10 in.
(250 mm) distance, even with the driver seat all the way forward, simply by reclining the back of the seat somewhat. If reclining the back of
your seat makes it hard to see the road, raise yourself by using a firm,
non-slippery cushion, or raise the seat if your vehicle has that feature.
• If your steering wheel is adjustable, tilt it downward. This points the airbag toward your chest instead of your head and neck.
The seat should be adjusted as recommended by NHTSA above, while
still maintaining control of the foot pedals, steering wheel, and your view of
the instrument panel controls.

121
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Before driving

● The driver and all passengers in the vehicle must wear their seat belts
properly.
The SRS airbags are supplemental devices to be used with the seat belts.

1-7. Safety information

CAUTION
■ SRS airbag precautions

CTH17AS014

● If the seat belt extender has been connected to the driver's seat belt buckle
but the seat belt extender has not also
been fastened to the latch plate of the
driver's seat belt, the SRS driver airbag
system will judge that the driver is
wearing the seat belt even though the
seat belt has not been connected. In
this case, the SRS driver airbag may
not activate correctly in a collision,
resulting in death or serious injury in the
event of a collision. Be sure to wear the
seat belt with the seat belt extender.

● The SRS front passenger airbag also deploys with considerable force, and
can cause death or serious injury especially if the front passenger is very
close to the airbag. The front passenger seat should be as far from the airbag as possible with the seatback adjusted, so the front passenger sits
upright.
● Improperly seated and/or restrained infants and children can be killed or
seriously injured by a deploying airbag. An infant or child who is too small
to use a seat belt should be properly secured using a child restraint system. Toyota strongly recommends that all infants and children be placed in
the rear seats of the vehicle and properly restrained. The rear seats are
safer for infants and children than the front passenger seat. (→P. 135)

122
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

1-7. Safety information

CAUTION
■ SRS airbag precautions
● Do not sit on the edge of the seat or
lean against the dashboard.

● Do not allow a child to stand in front of
the SRS front passenger airbag unit or
sit on the knees of a front passenger.
● Do not allow the front seat occupants to
hold items on their knees.
CTH17AS016

● Do not lean against the door, the roof
side rail or the front and rear pillars.

CTH17AS017

● Do not allow anyone to kneel on the
passenger seat toward the door or put
their head or hands outside the vehicle.

CTH17AS018

123
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Before driving

CTH17AS015

1-7. Safety information

CAUTION
■ SRS airbag precautions

CTH17AS077

● Do not attach anything to or lean anything against areas such as the dashboard, steering wheel pad and lower
portion of the instrument panel. These
items can become projectiles when the
SRS driver, front passenger and knee
airbags deploy.
● Do not attach anything to areas such as
a door, windshield glass, side door
glass, front and rear pillars, roof side
rail or assist grip.

CTH17AS020

CTH17AS021

● Vehicles without a smart key system:
Do not attach any heavy, sharp or hard
objects such as keys and accessories
to the key. The objects may restrict the
SRS knee airbag inflation or be thrust
into the driver's seat area by the force
of the deploying airbag, thus causing a
danger.

124
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

1-7. Safety information

CAUTION
■ SRS airbag precautions
● Do not hang coat hangers or other hard objects on the coat hooks. All of
these items could become projectiles and may cause death or serious
injury, should the SRS curtain shield airbags deploy.

● Do not use seat accessories which cover the parts where the SRS side
airbags inflate as they may interfere with inflation of the airbags. Such
accessories may prevent the side airbags from activating correctly, disable
the system or cause the side airbags to inflate accidentally, resulting in
death or serious injury.
● Do not strike or apply significant levels of force to the area of the SRS airbag components.
Doing so can cause the SRS airbags to malfunction.
● Do not touch any of the component parts immediately after the SRS airbags have deployed (inflated) as they may be hot.
● If breathing becomes difficult after the SRS airbags have deployed, open a
door or window to allow fresh air in, or leave the vehicle if it is safe to do
so. Wash off any residue as soon as possible to prevent skin irritation.
● If the areas where the SRS airbags are stored, such as the steering wheel
pad and front and rear pillar garnishes, are damaged or cracked, have
them replaced by your Toyota dealer.

125
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Before driving

● If a vinyl cover is put on the area where the SRS knee airbag will deploy,
be sure to remove it.

1-7. Safety information

CAUTION
■ Modification and disposal of SRS airbag system components
Do not dispose of your vehicle or perform any of the following modifications
without consulting your Toyota dealer. The SRS airbags may malfunction or
deploy (inflate) accidentally, causing death or serious injury.
● Installation, removal, disassembly and repair of the SRS airbags
● Repairs, modifications, removal or replacement of the steering wheel,
instrument panel, dashboard, seats or seat upholstery, front and rear pillars, roof side rails or roof head lining
● Repairs or modifications of the front fender, front bumper, or side of the
occupant compartment
● Installation of snow plows, winches, etc. to the front grille (bull bars, or
kangaroo bar etc.)
● Modifications to the vehicle’s suspension system
● Installation of electronic devices such as mobile two-way radios and CD
players
● Modifications to your vehicle for a person with a physical disability

126
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

1-7. Safety information

Deactivating the curtain shield airbags in a vehicle rollover
On/off (hold for a few seconds)

CTH17AS084

The roll sensing function for the
curtain shield airbags and seat
belt pretensioners will turn back
on automatically each time the
engine switch is turned to the
“ON” position.
Vehicles with a smart key system:
The “RSCA OFF” indicator comes
on. (only when the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode).
The roll sensing function for the
curtain shield airbags and seat
belt pretensioners will turn back
on automatically each time the
“ENGINE START STOP” switch is
turned to IGNITION ON mode.

■ This switch only should be used
In a situation where the inflation is not desired (such as during extreme offroad driving).
■ Operating conditions when the “RSCA OFF” indicator is illuminated
● The curtain shield airbags and seat belt pretensioner will not activate in a
vehicle rollover.
● The curtain shield airbags will activate in a severe side impact.

127
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Before driving

Vehicles without a smart key system: The “RSCA OFF” indicator
turns on. (only when the engine
switch is in the “ON” position).

1-7. Safety information

CAUTION
■ During normal driving
Make sure the “RSCA OFF” indicator light is not turned on. If it is left on, the
curtain shield airbags will not activate in the event of an accident, which may
cause death or serious injury.

128
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

1-7. Safety information

Front passenger occupant classification system
Your vehicle is equipped with a front passenger occupant classification system. This system detects the conditions of the front passenger seat and activates or deactivates the devices for the front
passenger.
Type B

Before driving

Type A

CTH17AS108

SRS warning light
Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light
“AIR BAG OFF” indicator light
“AIR BAG ON” indicator light

129
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

1-7. Safety information

Condition and operation in the front passenger occupant classification system
■ Adult*1

Indicator/
warning light

“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF”
indicator lights

“AIR BAG
ON”

SRS warning light

Off

Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light

Flashing*2

Front passenger airbag
Side airbag on the front passenger seat
Devices

Curtain shield airbag in the front
passenger side

Activated

Front passenger knee airbag
Front passenger's seat belt pretensioner

■ Child*3 or child restraint system*4

Indicator/
warning light

Devices

“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF”
indicator lights

“AIR BAG
OFF”*5

SRS warning light

Off

Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light

Flashing*2

Front passenger airbag

Deactivated

Side airbag on the front passenger seat

Activated

Curtain shield airbag in the front
passenger side

Activated

Front passenger knee airbag

Deactivated

Front passenger's seat belt pretensioner

Activated

130
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

1-7. Safety information

■ Unoccupied

Indicator/
warning light

“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF”
indicator lights
SRS warning light
Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light

Off

Front passenger airbag

Deactivated

Side airbag on the front passenger seat

Activated

Curtain shield airbag in the front
passenger side

Activated

Front passenger knee airbag
Front passenger's seat belt pretensioner

Deactivated

131
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Before driving

Devices

Not illuminated

1-7. Safety information

■ There is a malfunction in the system

Indicator/
warning light

Devices

“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF”
indicator lights

“AIR BAG
OFF”

SRS warning light

Front passenger's seat belt reminder light

Off

Front passenger airbag

Deactivated

Side airbag on the front passenger seat

Activated

Curtain shield airbag in the front
passenger side

Activated

Front passenger knee airbag

Deactivated

Front passenger's seat belt pretensioner

Activated

*1: The system judges a person of adult size as an adult. When a

*2:
*3:
*4:

*5:

smaller adult sits in the front passenger seat, the system may recognize him/her as a child depending on his/her physique and posture.
In the event the front passenger does not wear a seat belt.
When a larger child who has outgrown a child restraint system sits
in the front passenger seat, the system may recognize him/her as
an adult depending on his/her physique or posture.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat. A forward-facing child restraint system should only
be installed on the front passenger seat when it is unavoidable.
(→P. 135)
In case the indicator light is not illuminated, consult this manual on
how to install the child restraint system properly. (→P. 139)

132
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

1-7. Safety information

CAUTION
■ Front passenger occupant classification system precautions
Observe the following precautions regarding the front passenger occupant
classification system.
Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.
● Make sure the front passenger’s seat belt plate has not been left inserted
into the buckle before someone sits in the front passenger seat.
● Make sure the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is not illuminated when using
the seat belt extender for the front passenger seat. If the “AIR BAG OFF”
indicator light is illuminated, disconnect the extender tongue from the seat
belt buckle, and reconnect the seat belt. Reconnect the seat belt extender
after making sure the “AIR BAG ON” indicator light is illuminated. If you
use the seat belt extender while the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is illuminated, the front passenger airbag and front passenger knee airbag may
not activate correctly, which could cause death or serious injury in the
event of a collision.
● Do not apply a heavy load to the front passenger seat or equipment.
● Do not put weight on the front passenger seat by putting your hands or
feet on the front passenger seat seatback from the rear passenger seat.
● Do not let a rear passenger lift the front passenger seat with their feet or
press on the seatback with their legs.
● Do not put objects under the front passenger seat.
● Do not recline the front passenger seatback so far that it touches a rear
seat. This may cause the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light to be illuminated,
which indicates that the passenger’s airbags will not deploy in the event of
a severe accident. If the seatback touches the rear seat, return the seatback to a position where it does not touch the rear seat. Keep the front
passenger seatback as upright as possible when the vehicle is moving.
Reclining the seatback excessively may lessen the effectiveness of the
seat belt system.

133
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Before driving

● Wear the seat belt properly.

1-7. Safety information

CAUTION
■ Front passenger occupant classification system precautions
● If an adult sits in the front passenger seat, the “AIR BAG ON” indicator
light is illuminated. If the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator is illuminated, ask the
passenger to sit up straight, well back in the seat, feet on the floor, and
with the seat belt worn correctly. If the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator still
remains illuminated, either ask the passenger to move to the rear seat, or
if that is not possible, move the front passenger seat fully rearward.
● When it is unavoidable to install a forward-facing child restraint system on
the front passenger seat, install the child restraint system on the front passenger seat in the proper order. (→P. 139)
● Do not modify or remove the front seats.
● Do not kick the front passenger seat or subject it to severe impact. Otherwise, the SRS warning light may come on to indicate a malfunction of the
detection system. In this case, contact your Toyota dealer immediately.
● Child restraint systems installed on the second seat should not contact the
front seatbacks.
● Do not use a seat accessory, such as a cushion and seat cover, that covers the seat cushion surface.
● Do not modify or replace the upholstery of the front seat.

134
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

1-7. Safety information

Child restraint systems
A child restraint system for a small child or baby must itself be properly restrained on the seat with the lap portion of the lap/shoulder
belt.
The laws of all 50 states of the U.S.A. and Canada now require the
use of child restraint systems.

Studies have shown that installing a child restraint on a rear seat is
much safer than installing one on the front passenger seat.
● Choose a child restraint system that suits your vehicle and is
appropriate to the age and size of the child.
● For installation details, follow the instructions provided with the
child restraint system.
General installation instructions are provided in this manual.
(→P. 139)
Types of child restraints
Child restraint systems are classified into the following 3 types
according to the age and size of the child:
Rear facing — Infant seat/convertible seat

CTH17AS024

135
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Before driving

Points to remember

1-7. Safety information

Forward facing — Convertible seat

CTH17AS025

Booster seat

CTH17AS026

■ Selecting an appropriate child restraint system
● Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child until the child
becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle’s seat belt.
● If the child is too large for a child restraint system, sit the child on a rear
seat and use the vehicle’s seat belt. (→P. 79)

136
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

1-7. Safety information

CAUTION
■ Child restraint precautions

● Toyota strongly urges the use of a proper child restraint system that conforms to the size of the child, installed on the rear seat. According to accident statistics, the child is safer when properly restrained in the rear seat
than in the front seat.
● Never install a rear-facing child restraint system on the front passenger
seat even if the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is illuminated. In the event
of an accident, the force of the rapid inflation of the front passenger airbag
can cause death or serious injury to the child if the rear-facing child
restraint system is installed on the front passenger seat.
● A forward-facing child restraint system may be installed on the front passenger seat only when it is unavoidable. A child restraint system that
requires a top tether strap should not be used in the front passenger seat
since there is no top tether strap anchor for the front passenger seat.
Adjust the seatback as upright as possible and always move the seat as
far back as possible even if the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light illuminated,
because the front passenger airbag could inflate with considerable speed
and force. Otherwise, the child may be killed or seriously injured.

137
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Before driving

● For effective protection in automobile accidents and sudden stops, a child
must be properly restrained, using a seat belt or child restraint system
depending on the age and size of the child. Holding a child in your arms is
not a substitute for a child restraint system. In an accident, the child can be
crushed against the windshield, or between you and the vehicle’s interior.

1-7. Safety information

CAUTION
■ Child restraint precautions
● Do not use the seat belt extender when installing a child restraint system
on the front or rear passenger seat. If installing a child restraint system
with the seat belt extender connected to the seat belt, the seat belt will not
securely hold the child restraint system, which could cause death or serious injury to the child or other passengers in the event of a sudden stop,
sudden swerve or an accident.
● Do not allow the child to lean his/her head or any part of his/her body
against the door or the area of the seat, front and rear pillars or roof side
rail from which the SRS side airbags or SRS curtain shield airbags deploy
even if the child is seated in the child restraint system. It is dangerous if
the SRS side airbags and SRS curtain shield airbags inflate, and the
impact could cause death or serious injury to the child.
● Make sure you have complied with all installation instructions provided by
the child restraint manufacturer and that the system is properly secured. If
it is not secured properly, it may cause death or serious injury to the child
in the event of a sudden stop, sudden swerve or an accident.
■ Child restraint lock function belt precaution
Do not allow children to play with the child restraint lock function belt. If the
belt becomes twisted around a child’s neck, it will not be possible to pull the
belt out leading to choking or other serious injuries that could result in death.
If this occurs and the buckle cannot be unfastened, scissors should be used
to cut the belt.
■ When the child restraint system is not in use
● Keep the child restraint system properly secured on the seat even if it is
not in use. Do not store the child restraint system unsecured in the passenger compartment.
● If it is necessary to detach the child restraint system, remove it from the
vehicle or store it securely in the luggage compartment. This will prevent it
from injuring passengers in the event of a sudden stop, sudden swerve or
accident.

138
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

1-7. Safety information

Installing child restraints
Follow the child restraint system manufacturer’s instructions. Firmly
secure the child restraints using the LATCH anchors or a seat belt.
Attach the top tether strap when installing a child restraint.

Vehicles without third row seats
Child restraint LATCH anchors
LATCH anchors are provided
for the outside rear seats. (Buttons displaying the location of
the anchors are attached to the
seats.)

CTH17AS027

Vehicles with third row seats
Child restraint LATCH anchors
LATCH anchors are provided
for the outside second row
seats. (Buttons displaying the
location of the anchors are
attached to the seats.)

CTH17AS028

139
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Before driving

The lap/shoulder belt can be used if your child restraint system is
not compatible with the LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children) system.

1-7. Safety information

Seat belts equipped with a
child restraint locking mechanism (ALR/ELR belts except
driver’s seat belt) (→P. 79)

CTH17AS029

Vehicles without third row seats
Anchor brackets (for top tether
strap)
An anchor bracket is provided
for each rear seat.

CTH17AS030

Vehicles with third row seats
Anchor brackets (for top tether
strap)
An anchor bracket is provided
for each second row seat.

CTH17AS031

140
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

1-7. Safety information

Installation with LATCH system (rear/second row seats only)
■ Installing on the rear seats (vehicles without third row seats)

CTH17AS102

Type A
Latch the hooks of the lower
straps onto the LATCH anchors.
If the child restraint has a top
tether strap, the top tether strap
should be latched onto the top
tether strap anchor.

STEP 2

For owners in Canada:
The symbol on a child restraint
system indicates the presence of
a lower connector system.

Canada only
CTH17AS069

141
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Before driving

Fold the seatback while pulling
the seatback angle adjustment
lever. Return the seatback and
secure it at the first lock position.
(→P. 65)

STEP 1

1-7. Safety information

Type B
Latch the buckles onto the
LATCH anchors. If the child
restraint has a top tether strap,
the top tether strap should be
latched onto the top tether strap
anchor.

STEP 2

For owners in Canada:
The symbol on a child restraint
system indicates the presence of
a lower connector system.

Canada only
CTH17AS068

■ Installing on the second row seats (vehicles with third row
seats)
Fold the seatback while pulling
the seatback angle adjustment
lever. Return the seatback and
secure it at the first lock position.
(→P. 65)

STEP 1

CTH17AS066

STEP 2

Flip the cover.

142
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

1-7. Safety information

Type A

For owners in Canada:
The symbol on a child restraint
system indicates the presence of
a lower connector system.

Canada only
CTH17AS086

Type B
Latch the buckles onto the
LATCH anchors. If the child
restraint has a top tether strap,
the top tether strap should be
latched onto the top tether strap
anchor.

STEP 3

For owners in Canada:
The symbol on a child restraint
system indicates the presence of
a lower connector system.

Canada only
CTH17AS087

143
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Before driving

Latch the hooks of the lower
straps onto the LATCH anchors.
If the child restraint has a top
tether strap, the top tether strap
should be latched onto the top
tether strap anchor.

STEP 3

1-7. Safety information

Installing child restraints using a seat belt (child restraint lock
function belt)
■ Rear facing ⎯ Infant seat/convertible seat
Place the child restraint system
on the rear seat facing the rear
of the vehicle.

STEP 1

CTH17AS038

Run the seat belt through the
child restraint system and insert
the plate into the buckle. Make
sure that the belt is not twisted.

STEP 2

CTH17AS039

Fully extend the shoulder belt
and allow it to retract to put it in
lock mode. In lock mode, the belt
cannot be extended.

STEP 3

CTH17AS040

144
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

1-7. Safety information

While pushing the child restraint
system down into the rear seat,
allow the shoulder belt to retract
until the child restraint system is
securely in place.

STEP 4

■ Forward facing ⎯ Convertible seat
Place the child restraint system
on the seat facing the front of the
vehicle.

STEP 1

CTH17AS042

Run the seat belt through the
child restraint system and insert
the plate into the buckle. Make
sure that the belt is not twisted.

STEP 2

CTH17AS043

Fully extend the shoulder belt
and allow it to retract to put it in
lock mode. In lock mode, the belt
cannot be extended.

STEP 3

CTH17AS044

145
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Before driving

CTH17AS041

After the shoulder belt has
retracted to a point where there is
no slack in the belt, pull the belt to
check that it cannot be extended.

1-7. Safety information

While pushing the child restraint
system into the rear seat, allow
the shoulder belt to retract until
the child restraint system is
securely in place.

STEP 4

CTH17AS045

STEP 5

After the shoulder belt has
retracted to a point where there is
no slack in the belt, pull the belt to
check that it cannot be extended.

If the child restraint has a top tether strap, the top tether strap
should be latched onto the top tether strap anchor. (→P. 147)

■ Booster seat
Place the child restraint system
on the seat facing the front of the
vehicle.

STEP 1

CTH17AS046

Sit the child in the child restraint
system. Fit the seat belt to the
child restraint system according
to the manufacturer's instructions and insert the plate into the
buckle. Make sure that the belt is
not twisted.

STEP 2

CTH17AS047

146
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Check that the shoulder belt is
correctly positioned over the
child's shoulder and that the lap
belt is as low as possible.
(→P. 79)

1-7. Safety information

Removing a child restraint installed with a seat belt
Push the buckle release button
and fully retract the seat belt.

Before driving

CTH17AS048

Child restraint systems with a top tether strap
Secure the child restraint system
using a seat belt or the lower
anchors, and remove the head
restraint.

STEP 1

CTH17AS049

147
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

1-7. Safety information

Open the anchor bracket cover,
latch the hook onto the anchor
bracket and tighten the top tether
strap.

STEP 2

Make sure the top tether strap is
securely latched.
CTH17AS071

Replace the head restraint.

STEP 3

CTH17AS099

■ Laws and regulations pertaining to anchorages
The LATCH system conforms to FMVSS225 or CMVSS210.2.
Child restraint systems conforming to FMVSS213 or CMVSS213 specifications can be used.
This vehicle is designed to conform to SAE J1819.

148
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

1-7. Safety information

CAUTION
■ When installing a booster seat
To prevent the belt from going into ALR lock mode, do not fully extend the
shoulder belt. ALR mode causes the belt to tighten only. This could cause
injury or discomfort to the child. (→P. 81)
Follow the directions given in the child restraint system installation manual
and fix the child restraint system securely in place.
If the child restraint system is not correctly fixed in place, the child or other
passengers may be seriously injured or even killed in the event of sudden
braking, sudden swerving or an accident.
● If the driver’s seat interferes with the
child restraint system and prevents it
from being attached correctly, attach
the child restraint system to the righthand rear seat.
CTH17AS105

CTH17AS054

● Adjust the front passenger seat so that
it does not interfere with the child
restraint system.
● Only put a forward-facing child restraint
system on the front seat when unavoidable. When installing a forward-facing
child restraint system on the front passenger seat, move the seat as far back
as possible even if the “AIR BAG OFF”
indicator light is illuminated. Failure to
do so may result in death or serious
injury if the airbags deploy (inflate).

149
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Before driving

■ When installing a child restraint system

1-7. Safety information

CAUTION
■ When installing a child restraint system
● Vehicles with third row seats: When using the LATCH anchors for a child
restraint system, move the seat as far back as possible, with the seatback
close to the child restraint system.
● When a booster seat is installed, always ensure that the shoulder belt is
positioned across the center of the child's shoulder. The belt should be
kept away from the child's neck, but not so that it could fall off the child's
shoulder. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury in the event
of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.
● Ensure that the belt and plate are securely locked and the seat belt is not
twisted.
● Push and pull the child restraint system from side to side and forward to be
sure it is secure.
● After securing a child restraint system, never adjust the seat.
● Follow all installation instructions provided by the child restraint system
manufacturer.

150
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

1-7. Safety information

CAUTION
■ Do not use a seat belt extender

■ To correctly attach a child restraint system to the anchors
● When using the LATCH anchors, be sure that there are no foreign objects
around the anchors and that the seat belt is not caught behind the child
restraint. Make sure the child restraint system is securely attached, or it
may cause death or serious injury to the child or other passengers in the
event of sudden braking, sudden swerve or an accident.
● When using the left side LATCH
anchors for the child restraint system,
do not sit in the center seat. Seat belt
function may be impaired, such as
being positioned overly high or loosefitting, which may result in death or serious injury in the event of sudden braking or an accident.

151
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Before driving

If a seat belt extender is used when installing a child restraint system, the
seat belt will not securely hold the child restraint system, which could cause
death or serious injury to the child or other passengers in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.

1-7. Safety information

152
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

2-1. Driving procedures

Driving the vehicle
The following procedures should be observed to ensure safe driving:

■ Starting the engine
→P. 164, 167
■ Driving
STEP 1

With the brake pedal depressed, shift the shift lever to D.
(→P. 173)

STEP 2

Release the parking brake. (→P. 180)

STEP 3

Gradually release the brake pedal and gently depress the
accelerator pedal to accelerate the vehicle.

■ Stopping
STEP 1

With the shift lever in D, depress the brake pedal.

STEP 2

If necessary, set the parking brake.
If the vehicle is to be stopped for an extended period of time, shift
the shift lever to P or N. (→P. 173)

■ Parking the vehicle
STEP 1

With the shift lever in D, depress the brake pedal.

STEP 2

Set the parking brake. (→P. 180)

STEP 3

Shift the shift lever to P. (→P. 173)
If parking on a hill, block the wheels as needed.

STEP 4

Vehicles without a smart key system:
Turn the engine switch to the “LOCK” position to stop the
engine.
Vehicles with a smart key system:
Press the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to stop the
engine.

STEP 5

Lock the door, making sure that you have the key on your
person.

154
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

2-1. Driving procedures

Starting off on a steep uphill
STEP 1

Make sure that the parking brake is set and shift the shift lever
to D.

STEP 2

Gently depress the accelerator pedal.

STEP 3

Release the parking brake.

■ Driving in the rain
● Drive carefully when it is raining, because visibility will be reduced, the
windows may become fogged-up, and the road will be slippery.

● Refrain from high speeds when driving on an expressway in the rain,
because there may be a layer of water between the tires and the road
surface, preventing the steering and brakes from operating properly.
■ Breaking in your new Toyota
To extend the life of the vehicle, observing the following precautions is recommended:
● For the first 200 miles (300 km):
Avoid sudden stops.
● For the first 500 miles (800 km):
Do not tow a trailer.
● For the first 1000 miles (1600 km):
•
•
•
•

Do not drive at extremely high speeds.
Avoid sudden acceleration.
Do not drive continuously in the low gears.
Do not drive at a constant speed for extended periods.

■ Drum-in-disc type parking brake system
Your vehicle has a drum-in-disc type parking brake system. This type of
brake system needs bedding-down of the brake shoes periodically or whenever the parking brake shoes and/or drum are replaced. Have your Toyota
dealer perform the bedding down operation.

155
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

When driving

● Drive carefully when it starts to rain, because the road surface will be
especially slippery.

2-1. Driving procedures

■ Operating your vehicle in a foreign country
Comply with the relevant vehicle registration laws and confirm the availability
of the correct fuel. (→P. 613)

CAUTION
■ When starting the vehicle
Always keep your foot on the brake pedal while stopped with the engine running. This prevents the vehicle from creeping.
■ When driving the vehicle
● Do not drive if you are unfamiliar with the location of the brake and accelerator pedals to avoid depressing the wrong pedal.
• Accidentally depressing the accelerator pedal instead of the brake
pedal will result in sudden acceleration that may lead to an accident
that could result in death or serious injury.
• When backing up, you may twist your body around, leading to a difficulty in operating the pedals. Make sure to operate the pedals properly.
• Make sure to keep a correct driving posture even when moving the
vehicle only slightly. This allows you to depress the brake and accelerator pedals properly.
• Depress the brake pedal using your right foot. Depressing the brake
pedal using your left foot may delay response in an emergency, resulting in an accident.
● Do not drive the vehicle over or stop the vehicle near flammable materials.
The exhaust system and exhaust gases can be extremely hot. These hot
parts may cause a fire if there is any flammable material nearby.
● Do not let the vehicle roll backward while the shift lever is in a driving position, or roll forward while the shift lever is in R.
Doing so may cause the engine to stall or lead to poor brake and steering
performance, resulting in an accident or damage to the vehicle.
● If the smell of exhaust is noticed inside the vehicle, open the windows and
check that the back door is closed. Large amounts of exhaust in the vehicle can cause driver drowsiness and an accident, resulting in death or a
serious health hazard. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer
immediately.

156
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

2-1. Driving procedures

CAUTION
● Do not shift the shift lever to P while the vehicle is moving.
Doing so can damage the transmission and may result in a loss of vehicle
control.
● Do not shift the shift lever to R while the vehicle is moving forward.
Doing so can damage the transmission and may result in a loss of vehicle
control.
● Do not shift the shift lever to D while the vehicle is moving backward.
Doing so can damage the transmission and may result in a loss of vehicle
control.

● During normal driving, do not turn off the engine. Turning the engine off
while driving will not cause loss of steering or braking control, but the
power assist to these systems will be lost. This will make it more difficult to
steer and brake, so you should pull over and stop the vehicle as soon as it
is safe to do so.
However, in the event of an emergency, such as if it becomes impossible
to stop the vehicle in the normal way: →P. 565
● Use engine braking (downshift) to maintain a safe speed when driving
down a steep hill.
Using the brakes continuously may cause the brakes to overheat and lose
effectiveness. (→P. 175)
● Do not adjust the positions of the steering wheel, the seat, or the inside or
outside rear view mirrors while driving.
Doing so may result in a loss of vehicle control that can cause accidents,
resulting in death or serious injury.
● Always check that all passengers’ arms, heads or other parts of their body
are not outside the vehicle, as this may result in death or serious injury.
● Do not drive in excess of the speed limit. Even if the legal speed limit permits it, do not drive over 85 mph (140 km/h) unless your vehicle has highspeed capability tires. Driving over 85 mph (140 km/h) may result in tire
failure, loss of control and possible injury. Be sure to consult a tire dealer
to determine whether the tires on your vehicle are high-speed capability
tires or not before driving at such speeds.
157
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

When driving

● Moving the shift lever to N while the vehicle is moving will disengage the
engine from the transmission. Engine braking is not available when N is
selected.

2-1. Driving procedures

CAUTION
■ When driving on slippery road surfaces
● Sudden braking, acceleration and steering may cause tire slippage and
reduce your ability to control the vehicle, resulting in an accident.
● Sudden changes in engine speed, such as engine braking caused by upshifting or down-shifting, may cause the vehicle to skid, resulting in an
accident.
● After driving through a puddle, lightly depress the brake pedal to make
sure that the brakes are functioning properly. Wet brake pads may prevent
the brakes from functioning properly. If the brakes on only one side are wet
and not functioning properly, steering control may be affected, resulting in
an accident.
■ When shifting the shift lever
Be careful not to shift the shift lever with the accelerator pedal depressed.
Shifting the shift lever to a gear other than P or N may lead to unexpected
rapid acceleration of the vehicle that may cause an accident and result in
death or serious injury.
■ If you hear a squealing or scraping noise (brake pad wear limit indicators)
Have the brake pads checked and replaced by your Toyota dealer as soon
as possible.
Rotor damage may result if the pads are not replaced when needed.
It is dangerous to drive the vehicle when the wear limits of the brake pads
and/or those of the brake discs are exceeded.

158
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

2-1. Driving procedures

CAUTION
■ When the vehicle is stopped
● Do not race the engine.
If the vehicle is in any gear other than P or N, the vehicle may accelerate
suddenly and unexpectedly, causing an accident.
● Do not leave the vehicle with the engine running for a long time.
If such a situation cannot be avoided, park the vehicle in an open space
and check that exhaust fumes do not enter the vehicle interior.

● If the vehicle is stopped on an incline, in order to prevent accidents caused
by the vehicle rolling forward or backward, always depress the brake pedal
and securely apply the parking brake as needed.
● Avoid revving or racing the engine.
Running the engine at high speed while the vehicle is stopped may cause
the exhaust system to overheat, which could result in a fire if combustible
material is nearby.
■ When the vehicle is parked
● Do not leave glasses, cigarette lighters, spray cans, or soft drink cans in
the vehicle when it is in the sun.
Doing so may result in the following:
• Gas may leak from a cigarette lighter or spray can, and may lead to a
fire.
• The temperature inside the vehicle may cause the plastic lenses and
plastic material of glasses to deform or crack.
• Soft drink cans may fracture, causing the contents to spray over the
interior of the vehicle, and may also cause a short circuit in the vehicle's electrical components.
● Do not leave cigarette lighters in the vehicle. If a cigarette lighter is in a
place such as the glove box or on the floor, it may be lit accidentally when
luggage is loaded or the seat is adjusted, causing a fire.
● Do not attach adhesive discs to the windshield or windows. Do not place
containers such as air fresheners on the instrument panel or dashboard.
Adhesive discs or containers may act as lenses, causing a fire in the vehicle.
159
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

When driving

● In order to prevent accidents due to the vehicle rolling away, always keep
depressing the brake pedal while the engine is running, and apply the
parking brake as necessary.

2-1. Driving procedures

CAUTION
● Do not leave a door or window open if the curved glass is coated with a
metallized film such as a silver-colored one. Reflected sunlight may cause
the glass to act as a lens, causing a fire.
● Always apply the parking brake, shift the shift lever to P, stop the engine
and lock the vehicle.
Do not leave the vehicle unattended while the engine is running.
● Do not touch the exhaust pipes while the engine is running or immediately
after turning the engine off.
Doing so may cause burns.
● Do not leave the engine running in an area with snow build-up, or where it
is snowing. If snowbanks build up around the vehicle while the engine is
running, exhaust gases may collect and enter the vehicle. This may lead
to death or a serious health hazard.
■ Exhaust gases
Exhaust gases include harmful carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless
and odorless. Inhaling exhaust gases may lead to death or a serious health
hazard.
● If the vehicle is in a poorly ventilated area, stop the engine. In a closed
area, such as a garage, exhaust gases may collect and enter the vehicle.
This may lead to death or a serious health hazard.
● The exhaust system should be checked occasionally. If there is a hole or
crack caused by corrosion, damage to a joint or abnormal exhaust noise,
be sure to have the vehicle inspected and repaired by your Toyota dealer.
Failure to do so may allow exhaust gases to enter the vehicle, resulting in
death or a serious health hazard.

160
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

2-1. Driving procedures

CAUTION
■ When taking a nap in the vehicle
Always turn the engine off. Otherwise, if you accidentally move the shift lever
or depress the accelerator pedal, this could cause an accident or fire due to
engine overheating. Additionally, if the vehicle is parked in a poorly ventilated area, exhaust gases may collect and enter the vehicle, leading to
death or a serious health hazard.
■ When braking

● If the power brake assist function does not operate, do not follow other
vehicles closely and avoid hills or sharp turns that require braking.
In this case, braking is still possible, but the brake pedal should be
depressed more firmly than usual. Also, the braking distance will increase.
● Do not pump the brake pedal if the engine stalls.
Each push on the brake pedal uses up the reserve for the power-assisted
brakes.
● The brake system consists of 2 individual hydraulic systems; if one of the
systems fails, the other will still operate. In this case, the brake pedal
should be depressed more firmly than usual and the braking distance will
increase.
If this happens, do not continue to drive the vehicle. Have your brakes
fixed immediately.

161
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

When driving

● When the brakes are wet, drive more cautiously.
Braking distance increases when the brakes are wet, and this may cause
one side of the vehicle to brake differently than the other side. Also, the
parking brake may not securely hold the vehicle.

2-1. Driving procedures

NOTICE
■ When driving the vehicle
Do not use the accelerator pedal or depress the accelerator and brake pedals at the same time to hold the vehicle on a hill.
■ When parking the vehicle
Always shift the shift lever to P. Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to
move or the vehicle may accelerate suddenly if the accelerator pedal is accidentally depressed.
■ Avoiding damage to vehicle parts
● Do not turn the steering wheel fully in either direction and hold it there for
an extended period of time.
Doing so may damage the power steering pump.
● When driving over bumps in the road, drive as slowly as possible to avoid
damaging the wheels, underside of the vehicle, etc.
■ If you get a flat tire while driving
A flat or damaged tire may cause the following situations. Hold the steering
wheel firmly and gradually depress the brake pedal to slow down the vehicle.
● It may be difficult to control your vehicle.
● The vehicle will make abnormal sounds or vibrations.
● The vehicle will lean abnormally.
Information on what to do in case of a flat tire (→P. 578)

162
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

2-1. Driving procedures

NOTICE
■ When encountering flooded roads
Do not drive on a road that has flooded after heavy rain etc. Doing so may
cause the following serious damage to the vehicle:
● Engine stalling
● Short in electrical components
● Engine damage caused by water immersion

In the event that you drive on a flooded road and the vehicle is flooded, be
sure to have your Toyota dealer check the following:
● Changes in quantity and quality of oil and fluid used for the engine, transmission, transfer (4WD models), differentials, etc.
● Lubricant condition for the propeller shaft, bearings and suspension joints
(where possible), and the function of all joints, bearings, etc.

163
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

When driving

● Brake function

2-1. Driving procedures

Engine (ignition) switch (vehicles without a smart key system)
■ Starting the engine
STEP 1

Check that the parking brake is set.

STEP 2

Check that the shift lever is set in P.

STEP 3

Firmly depress the brake pedal.

STEP 4

Turn the engine switch to the “START” position to start the
engine.

■ Changing the engine switch positions
“LOCK”
The steering wheel is locked
and the key can be removed.
(The key can be removed only
when the shift lever is in P.)

“ACC”
CTH21AS002

Some electrical components
such as the audio system can
be used.

“ON”
All electrical components can
be used.

“START”
For starting the engine.

164
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

2-1. Driving procedures

■ Turning the key from “ACC” to “LOCK”
STEP 1 Shift the shift lever to P.

Push in the key and turn to the “LOCK”
position.

STEP 2

2
CTH21AS017

The engine immobilizer system may not have been deactivated. (→P. 106)
■ When the steering lock cannot be released
When starting the engine, the engine
switch may seem stuck in the “LOCK”
position. To free it, turn the key while turning the steering wheel slightly left and
right.
CTH21AS018

■ Key reminder function
A buzzer sounds if the driver’s door is opened, while the engine switch is in
the “LOCK” or “ACC” position to remind you to remove the key.

165
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

When driving

■ If the engine does not start

2-1. Driving procedures

CAUTION
■ When starting the engine
Always start the engine while sitting in the driver's seat. Do not depress the
accelerator pedal while starting the engine under any circumstances.
Doing so may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
■ Caution when driving
Do not turn the engine switch to the “LOCK” position while driving. If, in an
emergency, you must turn the engine off while the vehicle is moving, turn the
engine switch only to the “ACC” position to stop the engine. An accident may
result if the engine is stopped while driving.

NOTICE
■ To prevent battery discharge
Do not leave the engine switch in the “ACC” or “ON” position for long periods
of time without the engine running.
■ When starting the engine
● Do not crank the engine for more than 30 seconds at a time. This may
overheat the starter and wiring systems.
● Do not race a cold engine.
● If the engine becomes difficult to start or stalls frequently, have the engine
checked immediately.

166
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

2-1. Driving procedures

Engine (ignition) switch (vehicles with a smart key system)
Performing the following operations when carrying the electronic
key on your person starts the engine or changes “ENGINE START
STOP” switch modes.

■ Starting the engine
STEP 1

Check that the parking brake is set.

STEP 2

Check that the shift lever is set in P.

STEP 3

Firmly depress the brake pedal.
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch indicator will turn green. If
the indicator does not turn green, the engine cannot be started.

The engine will crank until it
starts or for up to 30 seconds,
whichever is less.
Continue depressing the brake
pedal until the engine is completely started.
The engine can be started
from any mode.

CTH21AS005

■ Stopping the engine
STEP 1

Stop the vehicle.

STEP 2

Shift the shift lever to P.

STEP 3

Set the parking brake. (→P. 180)

STEP 4

Press the “ENGINE START STOP” switch.

STEP 5

Release the brake pedal and check that the indicator on the
“ENGINE START STOP” switch is off.
167
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

When driving

Press the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch.

STEP 4

2-1. Driving procedures

■ Changing “ENGINE START STOP” switch modes
Modes can be changed by pressing the “ENGINE START STOP”
switch with brake pedal released. (The mode changes each time
the switch is pressed.)
Off*
The emergency flashers can
be used.

ACCESSORY mode
Some electrical components
such as the audio system can
be used.
The “ENGINE START STOP”
switch indicator turns amber.

IGNITION ON mode
All electrical components can
be used.
The “ENGINE START STOP”
switch indicator turns amber.
CTH21AS006

168
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

*: If the shift lever is in a position
other than P when turning off
the engine, the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch will be
turned to ACCESSORY mode,
not to off.

2-1. Driving procedures

When stopping the engine with the shift lever in a position other than P
If the engine is stopped with the shift lever in a position other than P,
the “ENGINE START STOP” switch will not be turned off but instead
be turned to ACCESSORY mode. Perform the following procedure to
turn the switch off:
STEP 1

Check that the parking brake is set.

STEP 2

Shift the shift lever to P.

STEP 3

Check that the indicator on the “ENGINE START STOP”
switch is illuminated in amber and then press the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch once.

STEP 4

Check that the indicator on the “ENGINE START STOP”
switch is off.

If the vehicle is left in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode (the engine is
not running) for more than an hour with the shift lever in P, the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch will automatically turn off. However, this function cannot entirely prevent battery discharge. Do not leave the vehicle with the
“ENGINE START STOP” switch in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode for
long periods of time when the engine is not running.
■ Operation of the “ENGINE START STOP” switch
When operating the “ENGINE START STOP” switch, one short, firm press is
enough. If the switch is pressed improperly, the engine may not start or the
“ENGINE START STOP” switch mode may not change. It is not necessary to
press and hold the switch.
■ Electronic key battery depletion
→P. 44
■ Conditions affecting operation
→P. 41
■ Note for the entry function
→P. 33

169
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

When driving

■ Auto power off function

2-1. Driving procedures

■ If the engine does not start
The engine immobilizer system may not have been deactivated. (→P. 106)
■ Steering lock
After turning the “ENGINE START STOP” switch off and opening and closing
the doors, the steering wheel will be locked due to the steering lock function.
Operating the “ENGINE START STOP” switch again automatically cancels
the steering lock.
■ When the steering lock cannot be released
The green indicator light on the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch will flash. Press the
“ENGINE START STOP” switch again
while turning the steering wheel left and
right.
CTH21AS019

■ Steering lock motor overheating prevention
To prevent the steering lock motor from overheating, the motor may be suspended if the engine is turned on and off repeatedly in a short period of time.
In this case, refrain from operating the engine. After about 10 seconds, the
steering lock motor will resume functioning.
■ When the “ENGINE START STOP” switch indicator flashes in amber
The system may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected by your
Toyota dealer immediately.
■ If the electronic key battery is depleted
→P. 528

170
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

2-1. Driving procedures

CAUTION
■ When starting the engine
Always start the engine while sitting in the driver’s seat. Do not depress the
accelerator pedal while starting the engine under any circumstances.
Doing so may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
■ Caution while driving

■ Stopping the engine in an emergency
If you want to stop the engine in an emergency while driving the vehicle,
press and hold the “ENGINE START STOP” switch for more than 3 seconds.
However, do not touch the “ENGINE START STOP” switch while driving
unless in an emergency. If the engine stops while driving, this could lead to
an unexpected accident.

171
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

When driving

If the vehicle begins to slide due to engine failure or other circumstances, do
not lock or open the doors until the vehicle reaches a safe and complete
stop. Activation of the steering lock in this circumstance may lead to an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.

2-1. Driving procedures

NOTICE
■ To prevent battery discharge
● Do not leave the “ENGINE START STOP” switch in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode for long periods of time without the engine running.
● If the indicator on the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is illuminated, the
“ENGINE START STOP” switch is not off. When exiting the vehicle,
always check that the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is off.
● Do not stop the engine when the shift lever is in a position other than P. If
the engine is stopped in another shift lever position, the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch will not be turned off but instead be turned to ACCESSORY
mode. If the vehicle is left in ACCESSORY mode, battery discharge may
occur.
■ When starting the engine
● Do not race a cold engine.
● If the engine becomes difficult to start or stalls frequently, have the engine
checked immediately.
■ Symptoms indicating a malfunction with the “ENGINE START STOP”
switch
If the “ENGINE START STOP” seems to be operating somewhat differently
than usual, such as the switch sticking slightly, there may be a malfunction.
Contact your Toyota dealer immediately.

172
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

2-1. Driving procedures

Automatic transmission
Select a shift position appropriate for the driving conditions.

■ Shifting the shift lever
Standard type

When driving

CTH21AS030

While the engine switch is in the “ON” position, move the
shift lever with the brake pedal depressed.
When shifting the shift lever between P and D, make sure that the
vehicle is completely stopped.

173
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

2-1. Driving procedures

Multi-mode type

CTH21AS014

Vehicles without a smart key system:
While the engine switch is in the “ON” position, move the
shift lever with the brake pedal depressed.
Vehicles with a smart key system:
While the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION
ON mode, move the shift lever with the brake pedal
depressed.
When shifting the shift lever between P and D, make sure that the
vehicle is completely stopped.

174
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

2-1. Driving procedures

■ Shift position purpose
Shift position

Function
Standard type

Multi-mode type

Parking the vehicle/ starting the engine

Reversing

Neutral

Normal driving*1

⎯

S mode driving*2
(→P. 176)

Position for engine
braking

⎯

Position for more
powerful engine braking

⎯

Position for maximum
engine braking

⎯

When driving

*1: To improve fuel efficiency and reduce noises, set the shift lever in the D
position for normal driving.

*2: Selecting shift ranges using S mode restricts the upper limit of the possible gear ranges, controls engine braking forces, and prevents unnecessary upshifting.

175
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

2-1. Driving procedures

Changing shift ranges in S mode (multi-mode type)
When the shift lever is in the S position, the shift lever can be operated as follows:
Non-Optitron type meter
For upshifting
For downshifting

CTH21AS025

Optitron type meter
For upshifting
For downshifting

CTH21AS015

The initial shift range in S mode is set automatically to “4” according
to vehicle speed. However, the initial shift range may be set to “3” if
AI-SHIFT has operated while the shift lever was in the D position.
(→P. 177)
■ Shift ranges and their functions
● You can choose from 5 levels of engine braking force.
● A lower shift range will provide greater engine braking force than
a higher shift range, and the engine speed will also increase.

176
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

2-1. Driving procedures

■ Downshifting restrictions (standard type)
The maximum allowable speeds are as follows.
Downshifting

Maximum speed mph (km/h)

3→2

67 (108)

2→L

32 (52)

■ S mode (multi-mode type)

■ AI-SHIFT
AI-SHIFT automatically selects the optimal gear according to driver performance and driving conditions.
Standard type
AI-SHIFT automatically operates when the shift lever is in the D position.
Multi-mode type
AI-SHIFT automatically operates when the shift lever is in the D position.
(Shifting the shift lever to the S position cancels the function.)
■ When driving with the cruise control system
Standard type
The engine brake will not operate when downshifting from D to 3. (→P. 209)
Multi-mode type
Engine braking will not occur in S mode, even when downshifting to “4”.
(→P. 209)
■ If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P

→P. 592

177
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

When driving

When the shift range is “3” or lower, holding the shift lever toward “+” sets
the shift range to “5”.

2-1. Driving procedures

■ If the “S” indicator does not come on even after shifting the shift lever
to S (multi-mode type)
This may indicate a malfunction in the automatic transmission system. Have
the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately.
(In this situation, the transmission will operate in the same manner as when
the shift lever is in D.)
■ Downshift restriction warning buzzer (S mode in multi-mode type)
To help ensure safety and driving performance, downshifting operation may
sometimes be restricted. In some circumstances, downshifting may not be
possible even when the shift lever is operated. (A buzzer will sound twice.)

CAUTION
■ When driving on slippery road surfaces
Do not accelerate or shift gears suddenly.
Sudden changes in engine braking may cause the vehicle to spin or skid,
resulting in an accident.

178
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

2-1. Driving procedures

Turn signal lever
The turn signal lever can be used to show the following intentions
of the driver:
Right turn
Left turn
Lane change to the right
(push and hold the lever
partway)

Lane change to the left
(push and hold the lever
partway)
The left hand signals will flash
until you release the lever.
CTH21AS028

■ Turn signals can be operated when
Vehicles without a smart key system: The engine switch is in the “ON” position.
Vehicles with a smart key system: The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in
IGNITION ON mode.
■ If the indicator flashes faster than usual
Check that a light bulb in the front or rear turn signal lights has not burned
out.

179
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

When driving

The right hand signals will
flash until you release the
lever.

2-1. Driving procedures

Parking brake

BRAKE
Type A

BRAKE
Type B

Type C

To set the parking brake, fully
depress the parking brake
pedal with your left foot while
depressing the brake pedal
with your right foot.
(Depressing the pedal again
releases the parking brake.)

CTH21AS026

■ Usage in winter time
See “Winter driving tips” for parking brake usage in winter time. (→P. 275)

NOTICE
■ Before driving
Fully release the parking brake.
Driving the vehicle with the parking brake set will lead to brake components
overheating, which may affect braking performance and increase brake
wear.

180
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

2-1. Driving procedures

Horn
To sound the horn, press on or
close to the
mark.

CTH21AS022

When driving

■ After adjusting the steering wheel
Make sure that the steering wheel is securely locked.
The horn may not sound if the steering wheel is not securely locked.
(→P. 86)

181
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

2-2. Instrument cluster

Gauges and meters
Non-Optitron type meters

Optitron type meters

182
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

2-2. Instrument cluster

Tachometer
Displays the engine speed in revolutions per minute

Speedometer
Displays the vehicle speed

Display change button
→P. 184
2

Engine coolant temperature gauge
Displays the engine coolant temperature

When driving

Fuel gauge
Displays the quantity of fuel remaining in the tank

Eco Driving Indicator Zone Display
→P. 185

Odometer, trip meter and average fuel consumption display
→P. 184

Shift position and shift range indicators
→P. 173

Voltmeter
Displays the charge state

183
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

2-2. Instrument cluster

Switching the display
Items displayed can be switched
by pressing the display change
button.

■ Odometer
Displays the total distance the vehicle has been driven.
■ Trip meter
Displays the distance the vehicle has been driven since the meter
was last reset. Trip meters “A” and “B” can be used to record and
display different distances independently.
Pressing and holding the display change button will reset the trip meter
that is currently displayed.

184
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

2-2. Instrument cluster

■ Eco Driving Indicator and average fuel consumption
Non-Optitron type meter
Eco Driving Indicator Light
During
environment-friendly
acceleration operation (Eco driving), Eco Driving Indicator Light
will turn on.

Eco Driving Indicator Zone
Display

Zone of Eco driving
Eco driving ratio based on
accelerator pedal operation
CTH22AS054

In case over-use of the accelerator causes the vehicle to exceed
Zone of Eco driving, the right of
Eco Driving Indicator Zone Display will blink and Eco Driving
Indicator Light will turn off.

Average fuel consumption
Displays the average fuel consumption since the function was
reset.
Pressing and holding the display
change button will reset the average fuel consumption.

185
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

When driving

Suggests Zone of Eco driving
with current Eco driving ratio
based on accelerator pedal operation.

2-2. Instrument cluster

Optitron type meter
Eco Driving Indicator Light
During
environment-friendly
acceleration operation (Eco driving), Eco Driving Indicator Light
will turn on.

Eco Driving Indicator Zone
Display
Suggests Zone of Eco driving
with current Eco driving ratio
based on accelerator pedal operation.

Zone of Eco driving
Eco driving ratio based on
accelerator pedal operation
CTH22AS055

In case over-use of the accelerator causes the vehicle to exceed
Zone of Eco driving, the right of
Eco Driving Indicator Zone Display will blink and Eco Driving
Indicator Light will turn off.

Average fuel consumption
Displays the average fuel consumption since the function was
reset.
Pressing and holding the display
change button will reset the average fuel consumption.

186
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

2-2. Instrument cluster

■ Eco Driving Indicator Light on/off
Non-Optitron type meter
Eco Driving Indicator Light can
be switched on or off by pressing
and holding the display change
button.
2

Eco Driving Indicator Light can
be switched on or off by pressing
and holding the display change
button.

Instrument panel light control
The brightness of the instrument panel lights can be adjusted.
Brighter
Darker

CTH22AS010

187
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

When driving

Optitron type meter

2-2. Instrument cluster

■ The meters and display illuminate when (Optitron type meter)
Vehicles without a smart key system:
The engine switch is in the “ON” position.
Vehicles with a smart key system:
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
■ Eco Driving Indicator operates when
The vehicle is being driven with the shift lever in D.
■ When the average fuel consumption is reset
The average fuel consumption displayed on the accessory meter and “Past
Record” screen of the navigation system (if equipped) will be reset at the
same time.
■ The brightness of the instrument panel lights (Optitron type meter)
When the headlight switch is turned to on, the brightness will be reduced
slightly unless the control dial is turned fully upward.

NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to the engine and its components
● Do not let the indicator needle of the tachometer enter the red zone, which
indicates the maximum engine speed.
● The engine may be overheating if the engine coolant temperature gauge is
in the red zone (H). In this case, immediately stop the vehicle in a safe
place, and check the engine after it has cooled completely. (→P. 603)
■ While driving (Optitron type meter)
When the voltmeter indicates more than 19 V or less than 9 V, the battery
may be malfunctioning. Have your vehicle checked at your Toyota dealer.

188
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

2-2. Instrument cluster

Indicators and warning lights
The indicator and warning lights on the instrument cluster and center panel inform the driver of the status of the vehicle’s various systems.

Instrument cluster (non-Optitron type meter)

When driving
CTH22AS052

Instrument cluster (Optitron type meter)

CTH22AS053

189
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

2-2. Instrument cluster

Center panel

CTH22AS015

190
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

2-2. Instrument cluster

■ Indicators
The indicators inform the driver of the operating state of the
vehicle’s various systems.
Turn signal indicator
(→P. 179)

“TRC OFF” indicator
(→P. 255)

(Canada)

Headlight high beam
indicator (→P. 201)

(Canada)

(if equipped)

Tail light indicator
(→P. 198)

(if equipped)

*
(if equipped)

Front fog light indicator
(→P. 204)
Cruise control indicator
(→P. 209)
Cruise control set indicator (→P. 209)

(if equipped)

Slip indicator (→P. 254)
(if equipped)

VSC off indicator
(→P. 255)

Roll sensing of curtain
shield airbags off indicator (→P. 127)

When driving

(U.S.A.)

Headlight indicator
(→P. 198)

Four-wheel drive indicator (→P. 223)
Downhill assist control
system indicator
(→P. 238)
Low speed four-wheel
drive indicator
(→P. 223, 226)
Rear differential lock
indicator (→P. 235)
Center differential lock
indicator (→P. 226)
“A-TRAC” indicator
(→P. 230)
“AUTO LSD” indicator
(→P. 232)

(if equipped)

“TRAC OFF” indicator
(→P. 255)

(if equipped)

Multi-terrain Select indicator (→P. 245)

(U.S.A.)

191
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

2-2. Instrument cluster

Crawl Control indicator
(→P. 241)

Security indicator
(→P. 106, 109)

Eco Driving Indicator
Light (→P. 185)

Intuitive parking assist
indicator (→P. 213)

(if equipped)

*
*

(if equipped)

SRS airbag on-off indicator (→P. 129)

*: These lights turn on when the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is turned
to IGNITION ON mode (vehicles with a smart key system) or the
engine switch is turned to the “ON” position (vehicles without a smart
key system) to indicate that a system check is being performed. They
will turn off after the engine is started, or after a few seconds. There
may be a malfunction in a system if a light does not come on, or if the
lights do not turn off. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

192
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

2-2. Instrument cluster

■ Warning lights
Warning lights inform the driver of malfunctions in any of the
vehicle’s systems. (→P. 565)

(if equipped) (if equipped) (if equipped)

*
(Canada)

*
(U.S.A.)

(U.S.A.)

(Canada) (if equipped)

(if equipped)

*
(if equipped)

*: These

lights turn on when the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is
turned to IGNITION ON mode (vehicles with a smart key system) or
the engine switch is turned to the “ON” position (vehicles without a
smart key system) to indicate that a system check is being performed. They will turn off after the engine is started, or after a few
seconds. There may be a malfunction in a system if a light does not
come on, or if the lights do not turn off. Have the vehicle inspected
by your Toyota dealer.

CAUTION
■ If a safety system warning light does not come on
Should a safety system light such as the ABS or SRS warning light not come
on when you start the engine, this could mean that these systems are not
available to help protect you in an accident, which could result in death or
serious injury. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately
if this occurs.

193
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

When driving

2-2. Instrument cluster

Accessory meter
The accessory meter presents the driver with a variety of drivingrelated data including the current outside air temperature.

“MODE/
“SET/

” button
” button

Trip information (→P. 195)
Displays driving range and average fuel consumption

Outside temperature display (→P. 433)
Compass (→P. 450)
Clock (→P. 431)
H (Hour) button (→P. 431)
M (Minute) button (→P. 431)
Multi-terrain Select display (→P. 245)
Automatically displayed when using Multi-terrain Select

194
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

2-2. Instrument cluster

Trip information
Items displayed can be switched by pressing the “MODE/

” button.

■ Driving range
Displays the estimated maximum distance that
can be driven with the quantity of fuel remaining
(vehicles without
Multi-terrain Select)

(vehicles with
Multi-terrain Select)

■ Average fuel consumption
Displays the average fuel consumption since the
function was reset
(vehicles without
Multi-terrain Select)

Pressing and holding the “SET/
the average fuel consumption.

” button will reset

(vehicles with
Multi-terrain Select)

195
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

When driving

• This distance is computed based on your average
fuel consumption. As a result, the actual distance
that can be driven may differ from that displayed.
• When only a small amount of fuel is added to the
tank, the display may not be updated.

2-2. Instrument cluster

Accessory meter light control
The daytime brightness of the accessory meter can be adjusted.
STEP 1

Turn the headlight switch off.

STEP 2

Press and hold the “MODE/

STEP 3

Press the “MODE/

” button.

” or “SET/

” button.

Vehicles without Multi-terrain Select

Vehicles with Multi-terrain Select

STEP 4

Press and hold the “SET/

196
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

” button.

2-2. Instrument cluster

■ When the average fuel consumption is reset
The average fuel consumption displayed on the instrument cluster and “Past
Record” screen of the navigation system (if equipped) will be reset at the
same time.
■ Adjusting the brightness of the accessory meter
● If left idle for approximately 6 seconds or more while adjusting, the display will revert to the trip information display.
● When the parking lights are on, the brightness of the accessory meter
can be adjusted only with the instrument panel light control.

● If the “MODE/ ” button is pressed and held when the accessory meter
light control is displayed, the display will switch to compass calibration.
(→P. 450)

When driving

■ Liquid crystal display
Small spots or light spots may appear on the display. This phenomenon is
characteristic of liquid crystal displays, and there is no problem with continuing to use the display.

NOTICE
■ The accessory meter at low temperatures
Allow the interior of the vehicle to warm up before using the liquid crystal display. At extremely low temperatures, the display monitor may respond
slowly, and display changes may be delayed.

197
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

2-3. Operating the lights and wipers

Headlight switch
The headlights can be operated manually or automatically.

Turning the end of the lever turns on the lights as follows:
Type A
The daytime running
light system is on.
The side marker, parking, tail, license plate
and instrument panel
lights turn on.
The headlights and all
the lights listed above
turn on.
The daytime running
light system is off.

CTH23AS033

198
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

2-3. Operating the lights and wipers

Type B
The headlights, parking lights and so on
turn on and off automatically (when the
“ENGINE
START
STOP” switch is in
IGNITION ON mode).

The headlights and all
the lights listed above
turn on.
CTH23AS034

The daytime running
light system is off.

199
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

When driving

The side marker, parking, tail, license plate
and instrument panel
lights turn on.

2-3. Operating the lights and wipers

Type C
The side marker, parking, tail, license plate
and instrument panel
lights turn on.
The headlights and all
the lights listed above
turn on.

CTH23AS030

200
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

2-3. Operating the lights and wipers

Type D
The headlights, parking lights and so on
turn on and off automatically (when the
“ENGINE
START
STOP” switch is in
IGNITION ON mode).

The headlights and all
the lights listed above
turn on.
CTH23AS031

Turning on the high beam headlights
With the headlights on, push
the lever away from you to
turn on the high beams.
Pull the lever toward you to the
center position to turn the high
beams off.
CTH23AS032

Pull the lever toward you and
release it to flash the high
beams once.
You can flash the high beams
with the headlights on or off.

201
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

When driving

The side marker, parking, tail, license plate
and instrument panel
lights turn on.

2-3. Operating the lights and wipers

■ Daytime running light system
To make your vehicle more visible to other drivers, the daytime running lights
turn on automatically whenever the engine is started and the parking brake
is released. Daytime running lights are not designed for use at night.
Type A and B: Daytime running lights can be turned off by operating the
switch.
■ Headlight control sensor (if equipped)

CTH23AS012

The sensor may not function properly if
an object is placed on the sensor, or anything that blocks the sensor is affixed to
the windshield.
Doing so interferes with the sensor
detecting the level of ambient light and
may cause the automatic headlight system to malfunction.

■ Automatic light off system
Vehicles without a smart key system
● When the headlights come on: The headlights and tail lights turn off 30
seconds after a door is opened and closed if the engine switch is turned
to the “ACC” or “LOCK” position. (The lights turn off immediately if
on the key is pressed after all the doors are locked.)
● When only the tail lights come on: The tail lights turn off automatically if
the engine switch is turned to the “ACC” or “LOCK” position and the
driver’s door is opened.
To turn the lights on again, turn the engine switch to the “ON” position, or
turn the lights off and then back to

202
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

2-3. Operating the lights and wipers

Vehicles with a smart key system
● When the headlights come on: The headlights and tail lights turn off 30
seconds after a door is opened and closed if the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch is turned to ACCESSORY mode or turned off. (The lights
turn off immediately if
on the key is pressed after all the doors are
locked.)
● When only the tail lights come on: The tail lights turn off automatically if
the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is turned off and the driver’s door is
opened.

To turn the lights on again, turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to IGNIor

.
■ Customization that can be configured at Toyota dealer
Settings (e.g. light sensor sensitivity) can be changed.
(Customizable features →P. 638)

NOTICE
■ To prevent battery discharge
Do not leave the lights on longer than necessary when the engine is not running.

203
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

When driving

TION ON mode, or turn the light switch off and then back to

2-3. Operating the lights and wipers

Fog light switch∗

The fog lights secure excellent visibility in difficult driving conditions, such as in rain and fog.

Turns the front fog lights off
Turns the front fog lights on

CTH23AS010

■ Fog lights can be used when
The headlights are on in low beam.

∗: If equipped
204
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

2-3. Operating the lights and wipers

Windshield wipers and washer
When intermittent windshield wiper operation is selected, the wiper
interval can be adjusted.

The wiper operation is selected by moving the lever as follows.
Intermittent
windshield
wiper operation
Low speed windshield wiper
operation

Temporary operation

CTH23AS027

Increases the intermittent
windshield wiper frequency
Decreases the intermittent
windshield wiper frequency

CTH23AS028

205
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

When driving

High speed windshield
wiper operation

2-3. Operating the lights and wipers

Washer/wiper dual operation
The wipers will automatically
operate a couple of times after
the washer squirts.

CTH23AS029

■ The windshield wipers and washer can be operated when
Vehicles without a smart key system: The engine switch is in the “ON” position.
Vehicles with a smart key system: The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in
IGNITION ON mode.
■ If no windshield washer fluid sprays
Check that the washer nozzles are not blocked if there is washer fluid in the
windshield washer fluid reservoir.

NOTICE
■ When the windshield is dry
Do not use the wipers, as they may damage the windshield.
■ When the washer fluid tank is empty
Do not operate the switch continually as the washer fluid pump may overheat.
■ When a nozzle becomes blocked
Do not try to clear it with a pin or other object. The nozzle will be damaged.

206
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

2-3. Operating the lights and wipers

Rear window wiper and washer
Before operating the rear window wiper and washer switch, make
sure the back window is completely closed. (→P. 94)
The wiper operation is selected by moving the lever as follows:
Intermittent window wiper
operation
Normal window wiper operation

Washer/wiper dual operation
The wiper will automatically
operate a couple of times after
the washer squirts.
(After operating several times,
the wiper operates one more
time after a short delay to prevent dripping.)
CTH23AS035

■ The rear window wiper and washer can be operated when
● Vehicles without a smart key system: The engine switch is in the “ON”
position.
Vehicles with a smart key system: The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is
in IGNITION ON mode.
● The back window is completely closed.
■ Intermittent window wiper operation
● When intermittent window wiper operation mode is selected, the wiper
will operate a couple of times and then switch to intermittent operation.
● During intermittent operation, the wiper stops temporarily at the reversing
position.

207
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

When driving

Washer/wiper dual operation

2-3. Operating the lights and wipers

■ When the rear window wiper and washer switch is turned off
The rear wiper will stop operation, and return to the retracted position after
approximately 3 seconds.
However, if the engine switch is turned to the “ACC” or “LOCK” position
(vehicles without a smart key system) or the “ENGINE START STOP” switch
is turned to ACCESSORY mode or turned off (vehicles with a smart key system) while the rear wiper is operating, the rear wiper will stop at that position
and will not return to the retracted position.
■ If no washer fluid sprays
Check that the washer nozzle is not blocked if there is washer fluid in the
washer fluid reservoir.
■ Customization that can be configured at Toyota dealer
Settings (e.g. drip prevention function) can be changed.
(Customizable features →P. 638)

NOTICE
■ When the rear window is dry
Do not use the wiper, as it may damage the rear window.
■ When the washer fluid tank is empty
Do not operate the switch continually as the washer fluid pump may overheat.
■ When a nozzle becomes blocked
Do not try to clear it with a pin or other object. The nozzle will be damaged.

208
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

2-4. Using other driving systems

Cruise control∗

Use cruise control to maintain a set speed without depressing the
accelerator pedal.

Indicators
Cruise control switch

■ Setting the vehicle speed
Press the “ON-OFF” button to
activate the cruise control.

STEP 1

Press the button again to
deactivate the cruise control.

CTH24AS002

Accelerate or decelerate to
the desired speed, and push
the lever down to set the
speed.

STEP 2

CTH24AS057

∗: If equipped
209
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

When driving

CTH24AS001

2-4. Using other driving systems

■ Adjusting the set speed
Increases the speed
Decreases the speed
Hold the lever until the desired
speed setting is obtained.

CTH24AS004

Fine adjustment of the set
speed can be made by lightly
pushing the lever up or down
and releasing it.

■ Canceling and resuming the constant speed control
Pulling the lever toward you
cancels the constant speed
control.
The speed setting is also canceled when the brakes are
applied.
CTH24AS005

210
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Pushing the lever up
resumes
the
constant
speed control.

2-4. Using other driving systems

■ Cruise control can be set when
● The shift lever is in D or “3” (standard type), or in D, or “4” or “5” range of
S has been selected (multi-mode type).
● Vehicle speed is above 25 mph (40 km/h).
■ Accelerating
The vehicle can be accelerated normally. After acceleration, the set speed
resumes.
■ Automatic cruise control cancelation

● Actual vehicle speed falls more than 10 mph (16 km/h) below the preset
vehicle speed.
At this time, the memorized set speed is not retained.
● Actual vehicle speed is below 25 mph (40 km/h).
● VSC is activated.
■ If the cruise control indicator light flashes
Press the “ON-OFF” button once to deactivate the system, and then press
the button again to reactivate the system.
If the cruise control speed cannot be set or if the cruise control cancels
immediately after being activated, there may be a malfunction in the cruise
control system. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

211
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

When driving

Cruise control will stop maintaining the vehicle speed in any of the following
situations:

2-4. Using other driving systems

CAUTION
■ To avoid operating the cruise control by mistake
Switch the cruise control off using the “ON-OFF” button when not in use.
■ Situations unsuitable for cruise control
Do not use cruise control in any of the following situations.
Doing so may result in loss of control and could cause an accident resulting
in death or serious injury.
● In heavy traffic
● On roads with sharp bends
● On winding roads
● On slippery roads, such as those covered with rain, ice or snow
● On steep hills
Vehicle speed may exceed the set speed when driving down a steep hill.
● When your vehicle is towing anything

212
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

2-4. Using other driving systems

Intuitive parking assist∗

The distance from your vehicle to nearby obstacles when parallel
parking or maneuvering into a garage is measured by the sensors
and communicated via an indicator and a buzzer. Always check the
surrounding area when using this system.

■ Types of sensors
Rear corner sensors
Rear center sensors

When driving

■ Intuitive parking assist switch
Turns the intuitive parking
assist on/off
When on, the indicator light
comes on and the buzzer
sounds to inform the driver
that the system is operational.
CTH24AS008

∗: If equipped
213
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

2-4. Using other driving systems

The indicator and buzzer
When a sensor detects an obstacle, the direction of the obstacle is
indicated and the buzzer sounds.
■ Sensor operation and distance to an obstacle
The system operates when the vehicle approaches an obstacle, as
shown by the following table.

Rear corner sensors
Distance to an obstacle ft. (cm)

Indicator and buzzer

Approximately 1.6 - 1.2 (50 - 37.5)

Intermittent

Approximately 1.2 - 0.8 (37.5 - 25)

Fast intermittent

Approximately 0.8 or less (25 or less)

Continuously

Rear center sensors
Distance to an obstacle ft. (cm)

Indicator and buzzer

Approximately 4.9 - 2.0 (150 - 60)

Intermittent

Approximately 2.0 - 1.5 (60 - 45)

Fast intermittent

Approximately 1.5 - 1.2 (45 - 35)

Very fast intermittent

Approximately 1.2 or less (35 or less)

214
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Continuously

2-4. Using other driving systems

Detection range of the sensors
Approximately 1.6 ft. (50 cm)
Approximately 4.9 ft. (150 cm)
The diagram shows the detection
range of the sensors. Note that
the sensors cannot detect obstacles that are extremely close to
the vehicle.

■ Intuitive parking assist can be operated when
Vehicles without a smart key system: The engine switch is in the “ON” position and the shift lever is in R.
Vehicles with a smart key system: The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in
IGNITION ON mode and the shift lever is in R.

215
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

When driving

The range of the sensors may
change depending on the shape
of the object etc.

2-4. Using other driving systems

■ Sensor detection information
● Certain vehicle conditions and the surrounding environment may affect
the ability of a sensor to correctly detect an obstacle. Particular instances
where this may occur are listed below.
•
•
•
•
•
•

There is dirt, snow or ice on a sensor.
A sensor is frozen.
A sensor is covered in any way.
The vehicle is leaning considerably to one side.
On an extremely bumpy road, on an incline, on gravel, or on grass
The vicinity of the vehicle is noisy due to vehicle horns, motorcycle
engines, air brakes of large vehicles, or other loud noises producing
ultrasonic waves.
• There is another vehicle equipped with parking assist sensors in the
vicinity.
• A sensor is coated with a sheet of spray or heavy rain.
• A bumper or sensor receives a strong impact.
• The vehicle is approaching a tall or right-angled curb.
• In harsh sunlight or intense cold weather
• A non-genuine Toyota suspension (lowered suspension etc.) is
installed.
In addition to the examples above, there are instances in which, because of
their shape, signs and other objects may be judged by a sensor to be closer
than they are.
● The shape of the obstacle may prevent a sensor from detecting it. Pay
particular attention to the following obstacles:
•
•
•
•
•

Wires, fences, ropes, etc.
Cotton, snow and other materials that absorb sound waves
Sharply-angled objects
Low obstacles
Tall obstacles with upper sections projecting outwards in the direction
of your vehicle

216
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

2-4. Using other driving systems

■ When the system malfunctions
If a malfunction occurs and no obstacles have been detected, the indicator
flashes and the buzzer sounds for approximately 7 seconds.
If the indicator comes on and stays on after that, have the vehicle inspected
by your Toyota dealer.
■ Customization that can be configured at Toyota dealer
Settings (e.g. buzzer volume) can be changed.
(Customizable features →P. 638)
2

■ Certification
For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.

For vehicles sold in Canada
This ISM device complies with Canadian ICES-001.
Cet appareil ISM est conforme a la norme NMB-001 du Canada.

CAUTION
■ Caution when using the intuitive parking assist-sensor
Do not attach any accessories within the sensor range.
Doing so may result in the vehicle being unable to be driven safely and possibly cause an accident.

NOTICE
■ Notes when washing the vehicle
Do not apply intensive bursts of water or steam to the sensor area.
Doing so may result in the sensor malfunctioning.

217
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

When driving

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions; (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation.

2-4. Using other driving systems

Rear view monitor system (rear view mirror-attached type)∗
The rear view monitor assists the driver by displaying an image of
the area behind the vehicle while reversing. The image is displayed
in reverse on the screen. This reversed image is a similar image to
the one on the inside rear view mirror.

The rear view image is displayed when the shift lever is
in R.
• If the shift lever is shifted out of
R, the screen is turned off.
• The screen remains on for
approximately 5 minutes.

Multi-mode type

Standard type

CTH24AS063

∗: If equipped
218
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

2-4. Using other driving systems

■ The rear view monitor system can be operated when
Vehicles without a smart key system: The engine switch is in the “ON” position and the shift lever is in R.
Vehicles with a smart key system: The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in
IGNITION ON mode and the shift lever is in R.
■ Switching the screen on/off
When the screen is displayed, press the
“AUTO” button on the inside rear view
mirror to switch the screen on/off.
Screen off: Orange indicator comes on.
CTH24AS014

In the following situation, the display
will be re-enabled if it has been turned
off:
Vehicles without a smart key system
The engine switch is turned to the “ON”
position.
Vehicles with a smart key system
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is
turned to IGNITION ON mode.

219
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

When driving

Screen on: Green indicator comes on.

2-4. Using other driving systems

■ Displayed area
The area covered by the camera is limited. Objects that are close to either corner of the bumper or under the bumper
cannot be seen on the screen.
The area displayed on the screen may
vary depending on vehicle orientation or
road conditions.

Corners of bumper
CTH24AS059

■ Rear view monitor system camera
The rear view monitor system camera is
located on the back door as shown in the
illustration. The camera uses a special
lens. The distance of the image that
appears on the screen differs from the
actual distance.
CTH24AS012

In the following cases, it may become difficult to see images on the screen even
when the system is functioning correctly:
● The vehicle is in a dark area, such as at
night.
● The temperature near the lens is
extremely high or low.

220
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

2-4. Using other driving systems

● Water droplets are on the camera lens
or humidity is high, such as when it
rains.
● Foreign matter, such as snow or mud,
adheres to the camera lens.
● When the camera has scratches or dirt
on it.
● The sun or headlights are shining
directly into the camera lens.

■ Smear effect
If a bright light, such as sunlight reflected
off the vehicle body, is picked up by the
camera, a smear effect* characteristic to
the camera may occur.

CTH24AS045

*: Smear effect ⎯ A phenomenon that
occurs when a bright light is picked up
by the camera; when transmitted by the
camera, the light source appears to
have a vertical streak above and below
it.

■ Flicker effect
When the camera is used under fluorescent light, sodium lights, or mercury
lights etc., the lights and the illuminated areas may appear to flicker.

221
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

When driving

● A bright object such as a white wall is
reflected in the mirror surface over the
monitor.

2-4. Using other driving systems

CAUTION
■ When using the rear view monitor system
Observe the following precautions to avoid an accident that could result in
death or serious injuries:
● Never depend solely on the monitor system when reversing.
● Always check visually and with the mirrors to confirm your intended path is
clear.
● Use your own eyes to confirm the vehicle’s surroundings, as the displayed
image may become faint or dark, and moving images will be distorted, or
not entirely visible when the outside temperature is low. When backing up,
be sure to check behind and all around the vehicle visually and with the
mirrors before proceeding.
● Depicted distances between objects and flat surfaces differ from actual
distances.
● Do not use the system if the back door is open.
■ Conditions which may affect the rear view monitor system
● If the back of the vehicle has been hit, the camera’s position and mounting
angle may have changed. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota
dealer.
● Rapid temperature changes, such as when hot water is poured on the
vehicle in cold weather, may cause the system to function abnormally.
● If the camera lens is dirty, it cannot transmit a clear image. Rinse with
water and wipe with a soft cloth. If the camera lens is extremely dirty, wash
with a mild cleanser and rinse.
● The displayed image may be darker and moving images may be slightly
distorted when the system is cold.

NOTICE
● Do not allow organic solvent, car wax, window cleaner or glass coat to
adhere to the camera. If this happens, wipe it off as soon as possible.
● When replacing tires, please consult your Toyota dealer. If you replace the
tires, the area displayed on the screen may change.

222
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

2-4. Using other driving systems

Four-wheel drive system (part-time 4WD models)
Use the front-wheel drive control lever to select the following transfer modes:

When driving
CTH24AS015

The four-wheel drive indicator comes on when H4, N or L4 mode is
selected.

H2 (high speed position, two-wheel drive)
Normal driving.

H4 (high speed position, four-wheel drive)
Greater traction than two wheel drive.
For when you experience a loss of power, such as wheel slipping.

N (neutral position)
No power is delivered to the wheels.

L4 (low speed position, four-wheel drive)
For driving requiring maximum power and traction such as climbing or
descending steep hills, off-road driving and hard pulling in sand or mud,
etc.

Four-wheel drive indicator
Low speed four-wheel drive indicator

223
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

2-4. Using other driving systems

Shifting between H2 and H4
■ Shifting from H2 to H4
STEP 1
STEP 2

Reduce vehicle speed to less than 50 mph (80 km/h).
Shift the front-wheel drive control lever to H4.
The four-wheel drive indicator will turn on.

■ Shifting from H4 to H2
Shift the front-wheel drive control lever to H2.
This can be done at any speed.
The four-wheel drive indicator will go off.

Shifting between H4 and L4
STEP 1

Stop the vehicle completely.

STEP 2

Shift the shift lever to N.

STEP 3

Shift the front-wheel drive control lever to L4 or H4.
The low speed four-wheel drive indicator will turn on (L4) or go off
(H4).

■ When the front-wheel drive control lever is shifted to L4
VSC and TRAC (TRC) are automatically turned off.
■ If the four-wheel drive indicator flashes
The transfer mode may not successfully change. Drive straight ahead while
accelerating or decelerating, or drive in reverse.
■ If the four-wheel drive or low speed four-wheel drive indicator flashes
rapidly
There may be a malfunction in the four-wheel drive system. Have the vehicle
inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately.
■ Four-wheel drive usage frequency
You should drive in four-wheel drive for at least 10 miles (16 km) each
month.
This will assure that the front drive components are lubricated.

224
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

2-4. Using other driving systems

CAUTION
■ Shifting the front-wheel drive control lever from H2 to H4 while driving
Never operate the front-wheel drive control lever if the wheels are slipping.
Stop the slipping or spinning before shifting.

When driving
225
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

2-4. Using other driving systems

Four-wheel drive system (full-time 4WD models)
Use the four-wheel drive control switch to select the following transfer modes:

CTH24AS016

H4F (high speed position)
Normal driving on all types of roads.

H4L (high speed position, center differential locked)
For when your vehicle’s wheel gets stuck in a ditch or when you are
driving on a slippery or bumpy surface.

L4L (low speed position, center differential locked)
For driving requiring maximum power and traction such as climbing or
descending steep hills, off-road driving and hard pulling in sand or mud,
etc.

Center differential lock indicator
Low speed four-wheel drive indicator

226
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

2-4. Using other driving systems

Shifting between H4F and H4L
Push the “UNLOCK” button and
turn the four-wheel drive control
switch to H4L or H4F.
This can be done at any speed.
The center differential lock indicator will turn on (H4L) or go off
(H4F).

CTH24AS017

When driving

Shifting between H4L and L4L
■ Shifting from H4L to L4L
STEP 1

Stop the vehicle completely.

STEP 2

Shift the shift lever to N.
Push the “UNLOCK” button and
then push and turn the fourwheel drive control switch to
L4L.

STEP 3

Maintain this condition until the
low speed four-wheel drive indicator turns on.
CTH24AS062

227
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

2-4. Using other driving systems

■ Shifting from L4L to H4L
STEP 1

Stop the vehicle completely.

STEP 2

Shift the shift lever to N.
Push the “UNLOCK” button and
turn the four-wheel drive control
switch to H4L.

STEP 3

Maintain this condition until the
low speed four-wheel drive indicator goes off.
CTH24AS051

■ The four-wheel drive control switch can be operated when
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
■ When the four-wheel drive control switch is turned to L4L
VSC and TRAC (TRC) are automatically turned off.
■ If the center differential lock indicator flashes
Locking or unlocking of the center differential is not complete. Drive straight
ahead while accelerating or decelerating, or drive in reverse.
■ If the center differential lock indicator flashes and a buzzer sounds
Locking of the center differential is not complete. Stop the wheels from slipping or spinning and, if the indicator still flashes, operate the four-wheel drive
control switch again.
■ If the low speed four-wheel drive indicator continues to flash
The transfer mode may not successfully change. Operate the four-wheel
drive control switch again.

228
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

2-4. Using other driving systems

■ If the low speed four-wheel drive indicator continues to flash and a
buzzer sounds
The shift lever is not in N and/or the vehicle is moving. Stop the vehicle completely, shift the shift lever to N and make sure that the indicator stops flashing.
■ If the low speed four-wheel drive indicator or the center differential
lock indicator flashes rapidly
There may be a malfunction in the four-wheel drive system. Have the vehicle
inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately.

■ Operating the four-wheel drive control switch
Never operate the four-wheel drive control switch if the wheels have lost
traction. Doing so may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
Stop the wheels from slipping or spinning before operating the switch.

NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to the center differential
● For normal driving on dry and hard surface roads, unlock the center differential.
● Unlock the center differential after the wheels are out of the ditch or off the
slippery or bumpy surface.
● Do not lock or unlock the center differential when the vehicle is turning or
when its wheels are spinning freely off the ground.

229
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

When driving

CAUTION

2-4. Using other driving systems

Active traction control system∗
The active traction control system automatically helps prevent the
spinning of 4 wheels when the vehicle is started or accelerated on
slippery road surfaces.

■ System operation
STEP 1

Part-time 4WD models:
Stop the vehicle, shift the shift lever to N and shift the frontwheel drive control lever into L4.
Full-time 4WD models:
Stop the vehicle, shift the shift lever to N and then push and
turn the four-wheel drive control switch to L4L.
Press the “A-TRAC” switch to
activate the system.

STEP 2

At this time, the “A-TRAC” indicator will come on.
To cancel the system, push the
switch again.

∗: If equipped
230
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

2-4. Using other driving systems

When the active traction control system is operating
If all wheels spin, the slip indicator flashes to indicate that the
active traction control system
has been engaged.
2
CTH24AS047

The active traction control system is activated only when vehicle speed is
less than 4 mph (6 km/h).
■ Sounds and vibrations caused by the active traction control system
● A sound may be heard from the engine compartment when the engine is
started or just after the vehicle begins to move. This sound does not indicate that a malfunction has occurred in the system.
● Vibrations may be felt through the vehicle body and steering. This may
occur when the system is operating.
■ If the brake system overheats
The system will cease operation and a buzzer will sound to alert the driver.
At this time, the “A-TRAC” indicator will go off and the “TRAC OFF (TRC
OFF)” indicator will come on. Stop the vehicle in a safe place. (There is no
problem with continuing normal driving.)
The system will be automatically restored after a short time.

CAUTION
■ The active traction control system may not operate effectively when
Directional control and power may not be achievable while driving on slippery road surfaces, even if the active traction control system is operating.
Do not drive the vehicle in conditions where stability and power may be lost.
231
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

When driving

■ When the rear differential is locked (vehicles with a rear differential
lock system)

2-4. Using other driving systems

AUTO LSD system (2WD models)
The AUTO LSD system aids traction by using the traction control
system to control engine performance and braking when one of the
rear wheels begins to spin.
The system should be used only when wheel spinning occurs in a
ditch or rough surface.

■ System operation
Press the VSC off switch to
turn on the system.
At this time, the “AUTO LSD”
and VSC off indicators will
come on.
To turn off the system, press
the switch again.

232
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

2-4. Using other driving systems

When the AUTO LSD system is operating
If the rear wheels spin, the slip
indicator flashes to indicate that
the AUTO LSD system has controlled the spinning of the rear
wheels.
2
CTH24AS047

When driving

■ If the engine is turned off and restarted
The AUTO LSD system and the indicators are automatically turned off.
■ If the brake system overheats
The system will cease operation and a buzzer will sound to alert the driver.
At this time, the “AUTO LSD” indicator will flash and the “TRAC OFF” indicator will come on. Stop the vehicle in a safe place. (There is no problem with
continuing normal driving.)
The system will be automatically restored after a short time.

CAUTION
■ To avoid an accident
● Do not use the AUTO LSD system in conditions other when wheel spinning occurs in a ditch or rough surfaces.
A much greater steering effort and more careful cornering control will be
required.
● Do not drive with the AUTO LSD system continuously turned on.

233
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

2-4. Using other driving systems

NOTICE
■ Activating while driving
Never activate the AUTO LSD system if the wheel is slipping.
Stop the slipping or spinning before activating.

234
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

2-4. Using other driving systems

Rear differential lock system∗
The rear differential lock system is provided for use only when wheel
spinning occurs in a ditch or on a slippery or rugged surface.

The rear differential lock system is effective in case one of the rear
wheels is spinning.
Press the switch to lock the
rear differential.

To unlock the rear differential,
press the switch again.

CTH24AS056

∗: If equipped
235
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

When driving

At this time, the rear differential
lock indicator will flash. Wait a
few seconds for the system to
complete operation. After the
rear differential is locked, the
indicator will stop flashing and
remain on.

2-4. Using other driving systems

Using the rear differential lock system
STEP 1

Before using the rear differential lock system:
Stop the vehicle, shift the shift lever to N and shift the frontwheel drive control lever into L4 to see if this is sufficient. If
this has no effect, additionally use the rear differential lock
system.

STEP 2

Be sure the wheels have stopped spinning.

STEP 3

Press the rear differential lock switch.

STEP 4

Gently depress the accelerator pedal.
After the rear differential is locked, the indicator will come on.

Unlock the rear differential as soon as the vehicle moves.
To unlock the rear differential, press the switch again.
■ Locking the rear differential
The following systems do not operate when the rear differential is locked. It
is normal operation for the ABS warning light and VSC off indicator to be on
at this time.
•
•
•
•
•

ABS
Multi Terrain ABS
Brake assist system
VSC
Hill-start assist control

■ The rear differential lock is disengaged when
The front-wheel drive control lever is shifted to H2 or H4.
Never forget to turn off the switch after using this feature.
■ After unlocking the rear differential
Check that the indicator goes off.

236
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

2-4. Using other driving systems

CAUTION
■ To avoid an accident
● Do not use the rear differential lock system except when wheel spinning
occurs in a ditch or on a slippery or rugged surface. Large steering effort
and careful cornering control will be required.
● Do not lock the rear differential until the wheels have stopped spinning.
Otherwise, the vehicle may move in an unexpected direction when the differential lock is engaged, resulting in an accident. This may also lead to
possible damage to rear differential lock component parts.

When driving

● Do not drive over 5 mph (8 km/h) when the rear differential is locked.
● Do not keep driving with the rear differential lock switch on.

237
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

2-4. Using other driving systems

Downhill assist control system∗
With the downhill assist control system, the vehicle is able to
descend a steep hill while maintaining a constant low speed of about
3 mph (5 km/h) without brake pedal operation.

■ Activating the system
The system will activate when
● The vehicle is traveling under 15 mph (25 km/h) with the
accelerator and brake pedals released.
● Part-time 4WD models: The front-wheel drive control lever is
in L4.
Full-time 4WD models: The four-wheel drive control switch is
in L4L.
● The rear differential is unlocked (if equipped).
Press the “DAC” switch.
The downhill assist control system indicator will come on to
indicate that the downhill assist
control system is activated.
Pressing the switch again turns
the system off.

∗: If equipped
238
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

2-4. Using other driving systems

While the downhill assist control system is operating
The slip indicator will flash to
indicate that the downhill assist
control system is operating, and
the stop lights and high mounted
stoplight will turn on.
2
CTH24AS047

The system will operate when the shift lever is in any position other than P.
However, to make effective use of the system it is recommended that the
shift lever be shifted to the “2” or “1” range of S.
■ If the downhill assist control system indicator flashes
● In the following situations, the indicator flashes and the system will not
operate:
• The transfer mode is not in L4 (part-time 4WD models) or L4L (full-time
4WD models).
• The rear differential is locked.
• The brake system overheats.
The system will situations operation and a buzzer will sound to alert the
driver. At this time, the “TRAC OFF (TRC OFF)” indicator will come on.
Stop the vehicle in a safe place. Refrain from using the system until the
indicator stops flashing and stays on. (There is no problem with continuing normal driving.)
● In the following situations, the indicator flashes to alert the driver, but the
system will still operate:
• The shift lever is in N. (Engine braking will not occur.)
• The “DAC” switch is turned off while the system is operating.
The system will gradually ceases operation. The indicator will flash during operation, and then go off when the system is fully off.

239
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

When driving

■ Operating tips

2-4. Using other driving systems

■ System malfunction
In case of a system malfunction, the following may occur:
● The downhill assist control system indicator flashes in a situation other
than those listed above.
● The downhill assist control system indicator does not come on when the
engine switch is turned to the “ON” position (vehicles without a smart key
system) or the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is turned to IGNITION ON
mode (vehicles with a smart key system).
Have your vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

CAUTION
■ Conditions which may affect the downhill assist control system operation
● Do not rely too heavily on the downhill assist control system. On extremely
steep inclines, icy surfaces or muddy roads, the vehicle may slip and the
system may not be able to maintain the constant low vehicle speed of
about 3 mph (5 km/h), leading to an accident causing death or serious
injury.
● Do not shift the shift lever to R while driving forward, or to D while driving
backward. Doing so may cause the wheels to lock up, leading to an accident causing death or serious injury. In addition, excessive stress will be
applied to the automatic transmission, possibly resulting in damage.

240
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

2-4. Using other driving systems

Crawl Control∗

Allows travel on extremely rough off-road surfaces at a fixed low
speed without pressing the accelerator or brake pedal. Minimizes
loss of traction or vehicle slip when driving on slippery road surfaces, allowing for stable driving.

■ Crawl Control switch

When driving

“ON/OFF” switch
The Crawl Control indicator comes on and the slip indicator flashes
when operating.

Speed selector dial
Turn the dial clockwise to increase the speed and counterclockwise to
decrease the speed.

Crawl Control indicator
Slip indicator

∗: If equipped
241
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

2-4. Using other driving systems

■ Speed modes
The following table shows
some typical terrains and the
recommended speed modes.

Mode

Road condition

L (Low)
Between L and M

Rock, mogul (downhill) and gravel
(downhill)
Mogul (uphill)

M (Medium)
Between M and H
H (High)

Snow, mud, gravel (uphill), sand,
dirt, mogul (uphill) and grass

■ Crawl Control can be operated when
● The engine is running.
● The shift lever is in any position other than P or N.
● The front-wheel drive control lever is in L4.
● The driver’s door is closed.

242
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

2-4. Using other driving systems

■ Crawl Control is temporarily canceled when
Vehicle speed exceeds 15 mph (25 km/h). The Crawl Control indicator
flashes until the vehicle speed is reduced.
■ Automatic system cancelation
In the following situations, the system will cease operation and a buzzer will
sound to alert the driver. The Crawl Control indicator will flash until the system is turned off completely.
● When the shift lever is shifted to P or N

● When the front-wheel drive control lever is shifted to H4
● When the system is malfunctioning
● When the brake system overheats
Stop the vehicle in a safe place. (There is no problem with continuing
normal driving.)
● When the automatic transmission system overheats
Stop the vehicle in a safe place until the automatic transmission fluid temperature warning light goes off.
■ Sounds and vibrations caused by the Crawl Control system
● A sound may be heard from the engine compartment when the engine is
started or just after the vehicle begins to move. This sound does not indicate that a malfunction has occurred in Crawl Control system.
● Either of the following conditions may occur when the Crawl Control system is operating. None of these indicates that a malfunction has
occurred.
• Vibrations may be felt through the vehicle body and steering.
• A motor sound may be heard after the vehicle comes to a stop.

243
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

When driving

● When the driver’s door is opened

2-4. Using other driving systems

CAUTION
■ When using Crawl Control
● Do not overly rely on Crawl Control. This function does not extend the
vehicle’s performance limitations. Always check the terrain thoroughly and
drive safely.
● The recommended speed modes for the listed terrains (→P. 242) are only
a reference. The selected mode may not be suitable to actual off-road conditions due to factors such as the type or unevenness of the terrain or the
degree of incline. Check the actual terrain thoroughly and drive safely.
● After activating Crawl Control, make sure that the Crawl Control indicator
comes on. If the indicator flashes, the vehicle is not under system control.
■ Conditions under which the system may not operate correctly
When driving on the following surfaces, the system may not be able to maintain a fixed low speed, which may result in an accident:
● Extremely steep inclines
● Extremely uneven surfaces
● Snow-covered roads, or other slippery surfaces

244
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

2-4. Using other driving systems

Multi-terrain Select∗

The Multi-terrain Select system has 4 terrain modes. When a terrain
mode is selected in accordance with terrain conditions, engine
power and active traction control system is controlled to enhance
off-road drivability.
Additionally, guidance messages such as transfer mode selection
advice are displayed on the accessory meter to assist the driver in
operating the vehicle.
2

When driving
CTH24AS025U

“ON/OFF” switch
Mode selector dial
Mode indicators
Multi-terrain Select indicator
Accessory meter

∗: If equipped
245
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

2-4. Using other driving systems

■ Multi-terrain Select modes
Symbol

Mode
MUD & SAND
LOOSE ROCK
MOGUL
ROCK

246
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

2-4. Using other driving systems

The following table shows some typical terrains and the recommended Multi-terrain Select modes.
Mode
Road
condition

ROCK

MOGUL

LOOSE
ROCK

MUD &
SAND

Rock
2

Mogul

When driving

Bump,
groove
Slope/
V-ditch
Uphill/
downhill
Riverbed
Gravel
Bush
Deep snow
Sand
Mud
Dirt

■ Multi-terrain Select can be activated when
● Vehicle speed is approximately 7 mph (12 km/h) or less.
● MUD & SAND: The front-wheel drive control lever is in L4 or
H4.
LOOSE ROCK, MOGUL and ROCK: The front-wheel drive
control lever is in L4.
● Crawl Control is not operating.

247
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

2-4. Using other driving systems

Selecting modes
Press the “ON/OFF” switch.

STEP 1

All the mode indicators will come
on and then go off except the indicator for the present mode. The
applicable road conditions will be
displayed on the accessory
meter.

Turn the dial to select the
desired mode.

STEP 2

The indicator of the selected
mode will come on and the applicable road conditions will be displayed on the accessory meter.
If the mode indicator flashes,
Multi-terrain Select cannot be
operated. Follow the instructions
displayed on the accessory meter
and check that the mode indicator
stops flashing. (→P. 249)

248
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

2-4. Using other driving systems

Messages displayed on the accessory meter
Depending on switch operation, one of the following messages may
appear on the accessory meter to provide guidance on transfer mode
selection etc:
Message

Details

Procedure

SHIFT TO 4WD
(When selecting MUD
& SAND mode)

Indicates that the
transfer mode needs
to be changed to H4
or L4.

Shift the front-wheel
drive control lever to
H4 or L4.

SHIFT TO L4
(When selecting
LOOSE ROCK,
MOGUL or ROCK
mode)

Indicates that the
transfer mode needs
to be changed to L4.

Shift the front-wheel
drive control lever to
L4.

STOP THE VEHICLE
& SHIFT THE AUTO.
TRANSMISSION TO N
(When selecting any
mode)

Indicates that the
transfer mode cannot
be changed to H4 or
L4.

Stop the vehicle completely and/or shift the
shift lever to N.

ACCELERATE OR
DECELERATE
(When shifting the
front-wheel control
lever to H4 or H2)

Indicates that the
transfer mode may
not successfully
change.

Drive straight ahead
while accelerating or
decelerating, or drive in
reverse.

DRIVE THE VEHICLE
A SHORT DISTANCE
(When pressing the
rear differential lock
switch)

Indicates that the rear
differential is not
locked.

Drive the vehicle forward or backward a
short distance.

OP. NOT POSSIBLE
WHEN Multi-terrain
Select ACTIVATED
(When pressing the
VSC off switch or “ATRAC” switch)

Indicates that VSC
and active traction
control cannot be disabled while Multi-terrain Select is
operating.

When driving

249
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

2-4. Using other driving systems

Message

Details

Procedure

CANNOT BE
SELECTED
(When pressing the
“ON/OFF” switch)

Indicates that Multiterrain Select cannot
be operated because
vehicle speed
exceeds approximately 7 mph
(12 km/h).

Reduce vehicle speed.

OP. NOT POSSIBLE
WHEN CRAWL CONTROL ACTIVATED
(When pressing the
“ON/OFF” switch)

Indicates that Multiterrain Select cannot
be operated because
Crawl Control is operating.

Turn Crawl Control off.

Multi-terrain Select
HAS BEEN CANCELED
(When pressing the
“ON/OFF” switch)

Indicates that Multiterrain Select is
turned off.

Multi-terrain Select
NOT AVAILABLE
(When pressing the
“ON/OFF” switch)

Indicates that Multiterrain Select cannot
be operated because
the VSC and/or 4WD
system may be malfunctioning.

250
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Contact your Toyota
dealer.

2-4. Using other driving systems

■ Multi-terrain Select is temporarily canceled when
The front-wheel drive control lever is shifted to H4 when Multi-terrain Select
is in ROCK, MOGUL or LOOSE ROCK mode. The mode indicator will flash
until the lever is shifted back to L4.
■ If the Multi-terrain Select indicator continues to flash
This may indicate a malfunction in the Multi-terrain Select system.
In this case, Multi-terrain Select is automatically canceled. Have your vehicle
inspected by your Toyota dealer.

● One of the vehicle systems related to Multi-terrain Select may be malfunctioning.
Have your vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.
● The brake actuator may be at risk of overheating.
A buzzer will sound, the “A-TRAC” indicator will go off and the “TRAC
OFF (TRC OFF)” indicator will come on. Stop the vehicle in a safe place.
Refrain from using Multi-terrain Select until the “A-TRAC” indicator
comes back on and the “TRAC OFF (TRC OFF)” indicator goes off. (The
vehicle can still be driven, even if Multi-terrain Select is inoperative.)
In the above cases, Multi-terrain Select is automatically canceled.

251
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

When driving

■ If the Multi-terrain Select indicator goes off while Multi-terrain Select is
operating

2-4. Using other driving systems

CAUTION
■ Before driving
To avoid an accident, observe the precautions relating to off-road driving.
(→P. 262)
■ When using Multi-terrain Select
● Do not use the Multi-terrain Select system for normal (on-road) driving.
The Multi-terrain Select system is designed for off-road use only.
● Do not overly rely on Multi-terrain Select. This function does not extend
the vehicle’s performance limitations. Always check the terrain thoroughly
and drive safely.
● The recommended modes for the listed terrains (→P. 246) are only a reference. The selected mode may not be suitable to actual off-road conditions
due to factors such as the type or unevenness of the terrain or the degree
of incline. Check the actual terrain thoroughly and drive safely.
● After selecting a mode, make sure that the Multi-terrain Select indicator
and the selected mode indicator come on. If any related indicator flashes,
the vehicle is not under Multi-terrain Select control.

252
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

2-4. Using other driving systems

Driving assist systems
To help enhance driving safety and performance, the following systems operate automatically in response to various driving situations.
Be aware, however, that these systems are supplementary and
should not be relied upon too heavily when operating the vehicle.

■ ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)
Helps to prevent wheel lock when the brakes are applied suddenly, or if
the brakes are applied while driving on a slippery road surface
2

■ Multi Terrain ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) (if equipped)

The Multi Terrain ABS operates in synchronization with the Multi-terrain
Select.

■ Brake assist
Generates an increased level of braking force after the brake pedal is
depressed when the system detects a panic stop situation

■ VSC (Vehicle Stability Control)
Helps the driver to control skidding when swerving suddenly or turning
on slippery road surfaces

■ TRAC/TRC (Traction Control)
Helps to maintain drive power and prevent the drive wheels from spinning when starting the vehicle or accelerating on slippery roads

■ Hill-start assist control (if equipped)
Helps to prevent the vehicle from rolling backward when starting on an
incline or slippery slope

■ LSD (Limited Slip Differential) (if equipped)
Transfers drive power to the rear tires when front tires spin, and vice
versa, in order to improve traction

253
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

When driving

Helps to prevent wheel lock when the brakes are applied suddenly, or if
the brakes are applied while driving on a slippery road surface, or in offroad conditions (such as rough roads, sand and mud)

2-4. Using other driving systems

■ KDSS (Kinetic Dynamic Suspension System) (if equipped)
Enhances ride comfort and handling response by using a hydraulic
control system to control the suspension stabilizer bars in response to
road surface and driving conditions during cornering or off-road driving

When the VSC/TRAC systems are operating (2WD models)
If the vehicle is in danger of slipping or if any of the drive wheels
spins, the slip indicator flashes to
indicate that the VSC/TRAC systems are operating.
A buzzer (intermittent) sounds to
indicate that VSC is operating.
CTH24AS047

When the VSC/TRAC (TRC)/hill-start assist control systems are
operating (4WD models)

CTH24AS047

If the vehicle is in danger of slipping or rolling backward when
starting on an incline, or if any of
the drive wheels spins, the slip
indicator flashes to indicate that
the VSC/TRAC (TRC)/hill-start
assist control systems are operating.
A buzzer (intermittent) sounds to
indicate that VSC is operating.
The stop lights and high mounted
stoplight turn on when the hillstart assist control system is
operating.

254
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

2-4. Using other driving systems

Disabling the TRAC/VSC systems (2WD models)
If the vehicle gets stuck in fresh snow or mud, the TRAC/VSC systems may reduce power from the engine to the wheels. You may
need to turn the system off to enable you to rock the vehicle in order
to free it.
■ Turning off the TRAC system only (turning on the AUTO LSD
system [→P. 232])

The VSC off and “AUTO LSD”
indicators will come on.
Press the button again to turn the
system back on.

255
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

When driving

To turn the TRAC system off,
quickly press and release the
button.

2-4. Using other driving systems

■ Turning off both TRAC and VSC systems
To turn the TRAC and VSC systems off, press and hold the button for more than 3 seconds
while the vehicle is stopped.
The “TRAC OFF” and VSC off
indicators will come on.
Press the button again to turn the
systems back on.

256
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

2-4. Using other driving systems

Disabling the TRAC (TRC)/VSC systems (4WD models)
If the vehicle gets stuck in fresh snow or mud, the TRAC (TRC)/VSC
systems may reduce power from the engine to the wheels. You may
need to turn the system off to enable you to rock the vehicle in order
to free it.
■ Turning off the TRAC (TRC) system only

The “TRAC OFF (TRC OFF)”
indicator will come on.
Press the button again to turn the
system back on.

U.S.A. Canada

257
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

When driving

To turn the TRAC (TRC) system
off, quickly press and release the
button.

2-4. Using other driving systems

■ Turning off both TRAC (TRC) and VSC systems
To turn the TRAC (TRC) and
VSC systems off, press and hold
the button for more than 3 seconds while the vehicle is
stopped.
The “TRAC OFF (TRC OFF)” and
VSC off indicators will come on.
Press the button again to turn the
systems back on.

U.S.A.

Canada
CTH24AS055

258
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

2-4. Using other driving systems

■ Hill-start assist control operation conditions
● The shift lever is in D or S.
● The brake pedal is not depressed.
● The rear differential is unlocked (if equipped).
■ If the brake system overheats
The hill-start assist control will cease operation and a buzzer will sound to
alert the driver. At this time, the “TRAC OFF (TRC OFF)” indicator will come
on. Stop the vehicle in a safe place. (There is no problem with continuing
with normal driving.)
■ Sounds and vibrations caused by the ABS, Multi Terrain ABS (if
equipped), brake assist, VSC, TRAC (TRC) and hill-start assist control
(if equipped) systems
● A sound may be heard from the engine compartment when the engine is
started or just after the vehicle begins to move. This sound does not indicate that a malfunction has occurred in any of these systems.
● Any of the following conditions may occur when the above systems are
operating. None of these indicates that a malfunction has occurred.
• Vibrations may be felt through the vehicle body and steering.
• A motor sound may be heard after the vehicle comes to a stop.
• The brake pedal may pulsate slightly after the ABS or Multi Terrain
ABS is activated.
• The brake pedal may move down slightly after the ABS or Multi Terrain
ABS is activated.
■ Reactivation of the TRAC (TRC)/VSC systems after turning off the
engine
Turning off the engine after turning off the TRAC (TRC)/VSC systems will
automatically reactivate them.
■ Reactivation of the VSC system linked to vehicle speed (2WD models)
When the TRAC system is turned off and the AUTO LSD system is turned
on, the VSC system will turn on when vehicle speed increases. However,
when the TRAC and VSC systems are turned off, the systems will not turn
on even when vehicle speed increases.

259
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

When driving

The system will be automatically restored after a short time.

2-4. Using other driving systems

■ Reactivation of the TRAC (TRC)/VSC systems (4WD models)
If the TRAC (TRC)/VSC systems are turned off, the systems will not turn on
even when vehicle speed increases.

CAUTION
■ The ABS and Multi Terrain ABS do not operate effectively when
● Tires with inadequate gripping ability are used (such as excessively worn
tires on a snow covered road).
● The vehicle hydroplanes while driving at high speed on wet or slick roads.
■ Stopping distance when the ABS or Multi Terrain ABS is operating will
exceed that of normal conditions
The ABS and Multi Terrain ABS are not designed to shorten the vehicle’s
stopping distance. Always maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front
of you in the following situations:
● When driving on dirt, gravel or snow-covered roads
● When driving with tire chains
● When driving over bumps in the road
● When driving over roads with potholes or roads with uneven surfaces
■ TRAC (TRC) may not operate effectively when
Directional control and power may not be achievable while driving on slippery road surfaces, even if the TRAC (TRC) system is operating.
Do not drive the vehicle in conditions where stability and power may be lost.
■ Hill-start assist control does not operate effectively when
Do not overly rely on the hill-start assist control. The hill-start assist control
may not operate effectively on steep inclines and roads covered with ice.

260
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

2-4. Using other driving systems

CAUTION
■ When the VSC is activated
The slip indicator light flashes and a warning buzzer sounds. Always drive
carefully.
Reckless driving may cause an accident. Exercise particular care when the
indicator light flashes and a buzzer sounds.
■ When TRAC (TRC)/VSC systems are turned off

■ Replacing tires
Make sure that all tires are of the specified size, brand, tread pattern and
total load capacity. In addition, make sure that the tires are inflated to the
recommended tire inflation pressure level.
The ABS, Multi Terrain ABS and VSC will not function correctly if different
tires are fitted on the vehicle.
Contact your Toyota dealer for further information when replacing tires or
wheels.
■ Handling of tires and the suspension
Using tires with any kind of problem or modifying the suspension will affect
the driving assist systems, and may cause a system to malfunction.

261
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

When driving

Be especially careful and drive at a speed appropriate to the road conditions. As these are systems to ensure vehicle stability and driving force, do
not turn the TRAC (TRC)/VSC systems off unless necessary.

2-5. Driving information

Off-road precautions
This vehicle belongs to the utility vehicle class, which has higher
ground clearance and narrower tread in relation to the height of its
center of gravity to make it capable of performing in a wide variety
of off-road applications.

Off-road vehicle feature
● Specific design characteristics give it a higher center of gravity
than ordinary passenger cars. This vehicle design feature causes
this type of vehicle to be more likely to rollover. And, utility vehicles
have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles.
● An advantage of the higher ground clearance is a better view of the
road allowing you to anticipate problems.
● It is not designed for cornering at the same speeds as ordinary
passenger cars any more than low-slung sports cars designed to
perform satisfactorily under off-road conditions. Therefore, sharp
turns at excessive speeds may cause rollover.

262
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

2-5. Driving information

CAUTION
■ Off-road vehicle precautions
Always observe the following precautions to minimize the risk of death, serious injury or damage to your vehicle:
● In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die
than a person wearing a seat belt. Therefore, the driver and all passengers
should fasten their seat belts whenever the vehicle is moving.

● Loading cargo on the roof luggage carrier will make the center of the vehicle gravity higher. Avoid high speeds, sudden starts, sharp turns, sudden
braking or abrupt maneuvers, otherwise it may result in loss of control or
vehicle rollover due to failure to operate this vehicle correctly.
● Always slow down in gusty crosswinds. Because of its profile and higher
center of gravity, your vehicle is more sensitive to side winds than an ordinary passenger car. Slowing down will allow you to have better control.
● When driving off-road or in rugged terrain, do not drive at excessive
speeds, jump, make sharp turns, strike objects, etc. This may cause loss
of control or vehicle rollover causing death or serious injury. You are also
risking expensive damage to your vehicle’s suspension and chassis.
● Do not drive horizontally across steep slopes. Driving straight up or
straight down is preferred. Your vehicle (or any similar off-road vehicle)
can tip over sideways much more easily than forward or backward.

263
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

When driving

● Avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers, if at all possible.
Failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or
vehicle rollover causing death or serious injury.

2-5. Driving information

Off-road driving
When driving your vehicle off-road, please observe the following precautions to ensure your driving enjoyment and to help prevent the
closure of areas to off-road vehicles:
● Drive your vehicle only in areas where off-road vehicles are permitted to travel.
● Respect private property. Get owner’s permission before entering
private property.
● Do not enter areas that are closed. Honor gates, barriers and signs
that restrict travel.
● Stay on established roads. When conditions are wet, driving techniques should be changed or travel delayed to prevent damage to
roads.

■ Additional information for off-road driving
For owners in U.S. mainland, Hawaii and Puerto Rico:
To obtain additional information pertaining to driving your vehicle off-road,
consult the following organizations.
● State and Local Parks and Recreation Departments
● State Motor Vehicle Bureau
● Recreational Vehicle Clubs
● U.S. Forest Service and Bureau of Land Management

264
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

2-5. Driving information

CAUTION
■ Off-road driving precautions
Always observe the following precautions to minimize the risk of death, serious injury or damage to your vehicle:
● Drive carefully when off the road. Do not take unnecessary risks by driving
in dangerous places.
● Do not grip the steering wheel spokes when driving off-road. A bad bump
could jerk the wheel and injure your hands. Keep both hands and especially your thumbs on the outside of the rim.

● After driving through tall grass, mud, rock, sand, rivers, etc., check that
there is no grass, bush, paper, rags, stone, sand, etc. adhering or trapped
on the underbody. Clear off any such matter from the underbody. If the
vehicle is used with these materials trapped or adhering to the underbody,
a breakdown or fire could occur.
● In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die
than a person wearing a seat belt. Therefore, the driver and all passengers
should fasten their seat belts whenever the vehicle is moving.
● When driving off-road or in rugged terrain, do not drive at excessive
speeds, jump, make sharp turns, strike objects, etc. This may cause loss
of control or vehicle rollover causing death or serious injury. You are also
risking expensive damage to your vehicle’s suspension and chassis.

265
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

When driving

● Always check your brakes for effectiveness immediately after driving in
sand, mud, water or snow.

2-5. Driving information

NOTICE
■ To prevent water damage
Take all necessary safety measures to ensure that water damage to the
engine or other components does not occur.
● Water entering the engine air intake will cause severe engine damage.
● Water entering the automatic transmission will cause deterioration in shift
quality, locking up of your transmission accompanied by vibration, and ultimately damage.
● Water can wash the grease from wheel bearings, causing rusting and premature failure, and may also enter the differentials, transmission and
transfer case, reducing the gear oil’s lubricating qualities.
■ When you drive through water
If driving through water, such as when crossing shallow streams, first check
the depth of the water and the bottom of the riverbed for firmness. Drive
slowly and avoid deep water.
■ Inspection after off-road driving
● Sand and mud that has accumulated in brake drums and around brake
discs may affect braking efficiency and may damage brake system components.
● Always perform a maintenance inspection after each day of off-road driving that has taken you through rough terrain, sand, mud, or water. For
scheduled maintenance information, refer to the “Scheduled Maintenance
Guide” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.

266
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

2-5. Driving information

Cargo and luggage
Take notice of the following information about storage precautions, cargo capacity and load:

● Stow cargo and luggage in the luggage compartment whenever
possible.
● Be sure all items are secured in place.
● To maintain vehicle balance while driving, position luggage
evenly within the luggage compartment.

● For better fuel economy, do not carry unnecessary weight.
When driving
267
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

2-5. Driving information

Capacity and distribution
Cargo capacity depends on the total weight of the occupants.
(Cargo capacity) = (Total load capacity) — (Total weight of occupants)
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit—
(1) Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and
cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers
that will be riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from
XXX kg or XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and
luggage load capacity.
For example, if the “XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will
be five 150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400 - 750 (5
× 150) = 650 lbs.)
(5) Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being
loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the
available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will
be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine
how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity
of your vehicle. (→P. 610)

268
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

2-5. Driving information

Example on your vehicle
Cargo capacity
Total load capacity

Without third seats
Total load capacity: 825 lb. (370 kg)
825 lb. - 366 lb. = 459 lb. (370 kg - 166 kg = 204 kg)
With third seats
Total load capacity: 1155 lb. (520 kg)
1155 lb. - 366 lb. = 789 lb. (520 kg - 166 kg = 354 kg)
In this condition, if 3 more passengers with the combined weight of
388 lb. (176 kg) get on, the available cargo and luggage load will be
reduced as follows:

Without third seats
459 lb. - 388 lb. = 71 lb. (204 kg - 176 kg = 28 kg)
With third seats
789 lb. - 388 lb. = 401 lb. (354 kg - 176 kg = 178 kg)
As shown in the example above, if the number of occupants
increases, the cargo and luggage load will be reduced by an amount
that equals the increased weight due to the additional occupants. In
other words, if an increase in the number of occupants causes an
excess of the total load capacity (combined weight of occupants plus
cargo and luggage load), you must reduce the cargo and luggage on
your vehicle.
269
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

When driving

When 2 people with the combined weight of 366 lb. (166 kg) are
riding in your vehicle, the available amount of cargo and luggage load
capacity will be as follows:

2-5. Driving information

CAUTION
■ Things that must not be carried in the luggage compartment

The following things may cause a fire if loaded in the luggage compartment:
● Receptacles containing gasoline
● Aerosol cans
■ Storage precautions

Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
● Stow cargo and luggage in the luggage compartment whenever possi-

ble.

● Do not stack cargo and luggage in the luggage compartment higher

than the seatbacks.
Such items may be thrown about and possibly injure people in the
vehicle in the event of sudden braking or in an accident.

● Do not place cargo or luggage in or on the following locations as the

item may get under the brake or accelerator pedal and prevent the
pedals from being depressed properly, block the driver’s vision, or hit
the driver or passengers, causing an accident:

• At the feet of the driver
• On the front passenger or rear seats (when stacking items)
• On the instrument panel
• On the dashboard
● Secure all items in the occupant compartment, as they may shift and
injure someone in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an
accident.
● When you fold down the rear seats, long items should not be placed

directly behind the front seats.

● Never allow anyone to ride in the luggage compartment. It is not

designed for passengers. They should ride in their seats with their seat
belts properly fastened. Otherwise, they are much more likely to suffer
death or serious bodily injury, in the event of sudden braking, sudden
swerving or an accident.

270
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

2-5. Driving information

CAUTION
■ Capacity and distribution
● Do not exceed the maximum axle weight rating or the total vehicle

weight rating.

● Even if the total load of occupant’s weight and the cargo load is less

than the total load capacity, do not apply the load unevenly. Improper
loading may cause deterioration of steering or braking control which
may cause death or serious injury.

■ Roof luggage carrier precautions

When you load cargo on the roof luggage carrier, observe the following:
● Place the cargo so that its weight is

Cross rails

distributed evenly between the front
and rear axles.

● If loading long or wide cargo, never

Roof rails

exceed the vehicle overall length or
width.(→P. 610)

CTH25AS005

● Before driving, make sure the cargo is securely fastened on the roof

luggage carrier.

● Loading cargo on the roof luggage carrier will make the center of grav-

ity of the vehicle higher. Avoid high speeds, sudden starts, sharp turns,
sudden braking or abrupt maneuvers, otherwise it may result in loss of
control or vehicle rollover due to failure to operate this vehicle correctly
and result in death or serious injury.

● If driving for a long distance, on rough roads, or at high speeds, stop

the vehicle now and then during the trip to make sure the cross rails
are fixed securely and that the cargo remains in its place.

● Do not exceed 120 lb. (54 kg) cargo weight on the roof luggage carrier.

271
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

When driving

To use the roof rails as a roof luggage carrier, you must fit the roof rails
with two or more genuine Toyota cross rails or their equivalent.

2-5. Driving information

NOTICE
■ When loading cargo

Be careful not to scratch the surface of the moon roof.

272
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

2-5. Driving information

Vehicle load limits
Vehicle load limits include total load capacity, seating capacity,
towing capacity and cargo capacity.

■ Total load capacity
Vehicles without third seats: 825 lb. (370 kg)
Vehicles with third seats: 1155 lb. (520 kg)
Total load capacity means the combined weight of occupants,
cargo and luggage.

Seating capacity means the maximum number of occupants
whose estimated average weight is 150 lb. (68 kg) per person.
Even if the number of occupants are within the seating capacity,
do not exceed the total load capacity.
■ Towing capacity
2.7 L 4-cylinder (2TR-FE) engine: 2000 lb. (907 kg)
4.0 L V6 (1GR-FE) engine: 5000 lb. (2270 kg)
Towing capacity means the maximum gross trailer weight (trailer
weight plus its cargo weight) that you vehicle is able to tow.
■ Cargo capacity
Cargo capacity may increase or decrease depending on the
weight and the number of occupants.

■ Total load capacity and seating capacity

These details are also described on the tire and loading information
label. (→P. 520)

273
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

When driving

■ Seating capacity
Vehicle without third seats: 5 occupants (Front 2, Rear 3)
Vehicle with third seats: 7 occupants (Front 2, Rear 5)

2-5. Driving information

CAUTION
■ Overloading the vehicle

Do not overload the vehicle.
It may not only cause damage to the tires, but also degrade steering and
braking ability, resulting in an accident.

274
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

2-5. Driving information

Winter driving tips
Carry out the necessary preparations and inspections before driving
the vehicle in winter. Always drive the vehicle in a manner appropriate to the prevailing weather conditions.

■ Pre-winter preparations
● Use fluids that are appropriate to the prevailing outside temperatures.
• Engine oil
• Engine coolant
• Washer fluid

● Have the vehicle fitted with four snow tires or purchase a set
of tire chains for the rear tires.
Ensure that all tires are the same size and brand, and that chains
match the size of the tires.

275
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

When driving

● Have a service technician inspect the level and specific gravity of battery electrolyte.

2-5. Driving information

■ Before driving the vehicle
Perform the following according to the driving conditions.
● Do not try to forcibly open a window or move a wiper that is
frozen. Pour warm water over the frozen area to melt the ice.
Wipe away the water immediately to prevent it from freezing.
● To ensure proper operation of the climate control system fan,
remove any snow that has accumulated on the air inlet vents
in front of the windshield.
● Remove any ice that has accumulated on the vehicle chassis.
● Periodically check for and remove any excess ice or snow
that may have accumulated in the wheel well or on the
brakes.
■ When driving the vehicle
Accelerate the vehicle slowly and drive at a reduced speed suitable to the road conditions.
■ When parking the vehicle
Park the vehicle and move the shift lever to P without setting the
parking brake. The parking brake may freeze up, preventing it
from being released. If necessary, block the wheels to prevent
inadvertent sliding or creeping.

276
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

2-5. Driving information

Selection tire chains
Use the correct tire chain size when mounting the tire chains.
Chain size is regulated for each tire size.
Side chain
(0.20 in. [5 mm] in diameter)
Cross chain
(0.20 in. [5 mm] in diameter)

When driving

CTH25AS009

Regulations on the use of tire chains
Regulations regarding the use of tire chains vary depending on location and type of road. Always check local regulations before installing
chains.

■ Tire chain installation
Observe the following precautions when installing and removing chains:
● Install and remove tire chains in a safe location.
● Install tire chains on the rear tires only. Do not install tire chains on the
front tires.
● Install tire chains on rear tires as tightly as possible. Retighten chains
after driving 1/4 ⎯ 1/2 mile (0.5 ⎯ 1.0 km).
● Install tire chains following the instructions provided with the tire chains.

277
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

2-5. Driving information

CAUTION
■ Driving with snow tires
Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of accidents.
Failure to do so may result in a loss of vehicle control and cause death or
serious injury.
● Use tires of the size specified.
● Maintain the recommended level of air pressure.
● Do not drive in excess of 75 mph (120 km/h), regardless of the type of
snow tires being used.
● Use snow tires on all, not just some wheels.
■ Driving with tire chains
Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of accidents.
Failing to do so may result in the vehicle being unable to be driven safely,
and may cause death or serious injury.
● Do not drive in excess of the speed limit specified for the tire chains being
used, or 30 mph (50 km/h), whichever is lower.
● Avoid driving on bumpy road surfaces or over potholes.
● Avoid sudden turns and braking, as use of chains may adversely affect
vehicle handling.
● Slow down sufficiently before entering a curve to ensure that vehicle control is maintained.

278
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

2-5. Driving information

NOTICE
■ Repairing or replacing snow tires
Request repairs or replacement of snow tires from Toyota dealers or legitimate tire retailers.
This is because the removal and attachment of snow tires affects the operation of the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters.
■ Fitting tire chains
The tire pressure warning valves and transmitters may not function correctly
when tire chains are fitted.

When driving
279
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

2-5. Driving information

Trailer towing
Your vehicle is designed primarily as a passenger-and-load carrying vehicle. Towing a trailer will have an adverse effect on handling, performance, braking, durability, and fuel consumption.
For your safety and the safety of others, do not overload the vehicle or trailer.
To tow a trailer safely, use extreme care and drive the vehicle in
accordance with the trailer’s characteristics and operating conditions.
The vehicle stability and braking performance are affected by
trailer stability, brake setting and performance, and the hitch.
Toyota warranties do not apply to damage or malfunction caused
by towing a trailer for commercial purposes.

Contact your Toyota dealer for further information about additional
requirements such as a towing kit, etc.

280
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

2-5. Driving information

Weight limits
Confirm that the gross trailer weight, gross combination weight, gross
vehicle weight, gross axle weight and trailer tongue load are all within
the limits.
Engine

Driving
system

Towing
capacity

GCWR

2.7 L 4-cylinder
(2TR-FE) engine

2WD

2000 lb.
(907 kg)

7900 lb. (3583 kg)

2WD
4WD

5000 lb.
(2270 kg)

11100 lb. (5035 kg)
11300 lb. (5125 kg)

● The gross trailer weight must never exceed towing capacity
described in the table above.
● The gross combination weight must never exceed the GCWR
described in the table above.
● The gross vehicle weight must
never exceed the GVWR indicated the Certification Label.

CTH61AS002

● The gross axle weight on each
axle must never exceed the
GAWR indicated the Certification Label.

281
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

When driving

4.0 L V6 (1GR-FE)
engine

2-5. Driving information

Towing related terms
Towing related term

Meaning

GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating)

The maximum allowable gross vehicle
weight. The gross vehicle weight is the
total weight of the vehicle. When towing
a trailer, it is the sum of the vehicle
weight (including the occupants, cargo
and any optional equipment installed on
the vehicle) and the tongue load.

GAWR (Gross Axle Weight
Rating)

The maximum allowable gross axle
weight. The gross axle weight is the
load placed on each axle (front and
rear).

GCWR (Gross Combination
Weight Rating)

The maximum allowable gross combination weight. The gross combination
weight is the sum of the total vehicle
weight (including the occupants, cargo
and any optional equipment installed on
the vehicle) and the weight of the trailer
being towed (including the cargo in the
trailer).

Gross trailer weight

The sum of the trailer weight and the
weight of the cargo in the trailer.

Towing capacity

The maximum allowable gross trailer
weight. Towing capacity is calculated
considering the base vehicle with necessary vehicle equipment and occupants. Additional optional equipment,
passengers and cargo in the vehicle will
reduce the towing capacity, gross trailer
weight include the trailer, cargo and
necessary equipment for towing.

Tongue load

The load placed on the trailer hitch ball

282
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

2-5. Driving information

Trailer tongue load
● A recommended tongue load varies in accordance with the types
of trailers or towing as described below.
● In order to ensure the recommended values shown below, the
trailer must be loaded by referring to the following instructions.
The trailer cargo load should be distributed so that the tongue load
is 9 to 11% of the gross trailer weight, not exceeding 500 lb. (227
kg).
(Tongue load / Gross trailer weight × 100 = 9 to 11%)

The gross trailer weight and tongue load can be measured with platform scales found at a highway weighing station, building supply
company, trucking company, junk yard, etc.
Gross trailer weight
Tongue load

283
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

When driving

If the gross trailer weight is over 2000 lbs. (907 kg), it is necessary
to use a sway control device with sufficient capacity.

2-5. Driving information

Hitch and tow hitch receiver
■ Hitch
Trailer hitch assemblies have different weight capacities established by the hitch manufacturer. Even though the vehicle may be
rated for towing a higher weight, the operator must never exceed
the maximum weight rating specified for the trailer hitch.
■ Tow hitch receiver (if equipped)
A tow hitch receiver installed
under the rear bumper is rated
for weight that does not exceed
the vehicle's total towing weight.

CTH25AS010

284
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

2-5. Driving information

Selecting a trailer ball
Use the correct trailer ball for your application.
Trailer ball load rating
Matches or exceeds the gross
trailer weight rating of the trailer.

Ball diameter

Shank length
Protrudes beyond the bottom of
the lock washer and nut at least 2
threads.

Shank diameter
Matches the ball mount hole
diameter size.

Connecting trailer lights
Use the wire harness stored in
the rear end under body.

CTH25AS007

285
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

When driving

Matches the size of the trailer
coupler. Most couplers are
stamped with the required trailer
ball size.

2-5. Driving information

Trailer towing tips
Your vehicle will handle differently when towing a trailer. The 3 main
causes of vehicle-trailer accidents are driver error, excessive speed
and improper trailer loading. Keep the following in mind when towing.
● Before starting out, check the trailer lights and the vehicle-trailer
connections. Recheck after driving a short distance.
● Practice turning, stopping and reversing with the trailer attached in
an area away from traffic until you become accustomed to the feel
of the vehicle.
● Reversing with a trailer attached is difficult and requires practice.
Grip the bottom of the steering wheel and move your hand to the
left to move the trailer to the left. Move your hand to the right to
move the trailer to right. (This is generally opposite to reversing
without a trailer attached.) Avoid sharp or prolonged turning. Have
someone guide you when reversing to reduce the risk of an accident.
● As stopping distance is increased when towing a trailer, vehicle-to
vehicle distance should be increased. For each 10 mph (16 km/h)
of speed, allow at least one vehicle and trailer length.
● Avoid sudden braking as you may skid, resulting in jackknifing and
loss of control. This is especially true on wet or slippery surfaces.
● Avoid jerky starts or sudden acceleration.
● Avoid jerky steering and sharp turns, and slow down before making turns.

286
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

2-5. Driving information

● Note that when making a turn, the trailer wheels will be closer than
the vehicle wheels to the inside of the turn. Compensate by making
a larger than normal turning radius.

● Take care when passing other vehicles. Passing requires considerable distance. After passing a vehicle, do not forget the length of
your trailer, and be sure you have plenty of room before changing
lanes.
● In order to maintain engine braking efficiency when driving on a
long steep downgrade, do not use overdrive. Transmission shift
range position must be in 3 (standard type), or “4”, in the S mode
(multi-mode type).
● Due to the added load of the trailer, your vehicle’s engine may
overheat on hot days (at temperatures over 85°F [30°C] when driving up a long or steep grade. If the engine coolant temperature
gauge indicates overheating, immediately turn off the air conditioning (if in use), pull your vehicle off the road and stop in a safe spot.
(→P. 603)

287
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

When driving

● Crosswinds and rough roads will adversely affect handling of your
vehicle and trailer, causing sway. Periodically check the rear to
prepare for being passed by large trucks or buses, which may
cause your vehicle and trailer to sway. If swaying occurs, firmly grip
the steering wheel, reduce speed immediately but gradually, and
steer straight ahead. Never increase speed. If you make no
extreme correction with the steering or brakes, your vehicle and
trailer will stabilize.

2-5. Driving information

● Always place wheel blocks under both the vehicle and the trailer
wheels when parking. Apply the parking brake firmly, and put the
transmission in P. Avoid parking on a slope, but if unavoidable, do
so only after performing the following:
STEP 1

Apply the brakes and keep them applied.

STEP 2

Have someone place wheel blocks under both the vehicle and
trailer wheels.

STEP 3

When the wheel blocks are in place, release the brakes slowly
until the blocks absorb the load.

STEP 4

Apply the parking brake firmly.

STEP 5

Shift into P and turn off the engine.

● When restarting after parking on a slope:
STEP 1

With the transmission in P, start the engine. Be sure to keep
the brake pedal pressed.

STEP 2

Shift into D or R (if reversing).

STEP 3

Release the parking brake and brake pedal, and slowly pull or
back away from the wheel blocks. Stop and apply the brakes.

STEP 4

Have someone retrieve the blocks.

288
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

2-5. Driving information

■ Service connector for towing brake controller
Your vehicle is equipped with a service
connector for the trailer brake controller
as shown.

CTH25AS008

■ Before towing
● The vehicle’s tires are properly inflated.
● Trailer tires are inflated according to the trailer manufacturer’s recommendation.
● All trailer lights work.
● All lights work each time you connect them.
● The trailer ball is set up at the proper height for the coupler on the trailer.
● The vehicle remains level when a loaded or unloaded trailer is hitched.
Do not drive if the vehicle is not level, and check for improper tongue
load, overloading, worn suspension, or other possible causes.
● The trailer cargo is securely loaded.
● The rear view mirrors conform to all applicable federal, state/provincial or
local regulations. If they do not, install rear view mirrors appropriate for
towing purposes.
■ Break-in schedule
If your vehicle is new or equipped with any new power train components
(such as an engine, transmission, differential and wheel bearing), Toyota
recommends that you do not tow a trailer until it has been driven for over 500
miles (800 km).
However, avoid full throttle acceleration.

289
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

When driving

Check that the following conditions are met:

2-5. Driving information

■ Maintenance
● If you tow a trailer, your vehicle will require more frequent maintenance
due to the additional load. (See “Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or
“Owner’s Manual Supplement”.)
● Retighten the fixing bolts of the towing ball and bracket after approximately 600 miles (1000 km) of trailer towing.

CAUTION
■ Trailer towing precautions
● Follow all the instructions described in this section. Failure to do so could
cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
● Exceeding the towing capacity, GVWR, GCWR and GAWR can cause an
accident resulting in death or serious personal injuries.
■ To avoid accident or injury
● Do not exceed 45 mph (72 km/h) or the posted towing speed limit, whichever is lower. As instability (swaying) of the towing vehicle-trailer combination increases as speed increases, exceeding 45 mph (72 km/h) may
cause loss of control.
● Slow down and downshift before descending steep or long downhill
grades. Do not make sudden downshifts.
● Do not exceed the trailer hitch assembly weight, gross vehicle weight,
gross axle weight and trailer tongue load capacities.
● Never load more weight in the back than in the front of the trailer. About
60% of the load should be in the front half of the trailer, and the remaining
40% in the rear.
● Do not use cruise control when you are towing.
● Avoid holding the brake pedal down too long or applying the brakes too
frequently. This could cause the brakes to overheat and result in reduced
braking efficiency.

290
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

2-5. Driving information

CAUTION
■ Hitches
● If you wish to install a trailer hitch, contact your Toyota dealer.
● Use only a hitch that conforms to the gross trailer weight requirement.
● Follow the directions supplied by the hitch manufacturer.
● Lubricate the hitch ball with a light coat of grease.
● Remove the trailer hitch whenever you are not towing a trailer. After
removing the hitch, seal any mounting hole in the vehicle body to prevent
entry of any substances into the vehicle.
● If the gross trailer weight exceeds 1000 lb. (453 kg), trailer brakes are
required. Toyota recommends trailers with brakes that conform to all applicable federal and state/provincial regulations.
● Never tap into your vehicle’s hydraulic system, as this will lower the vehicle’s braking effectiveness.
● Never tow a trailer without using a safety chain securely attached to both
the trailer and the vehicle. If damage occurs to the coupling unit or hitch
ball, there is a risk of the trailer wandering into another lane.

291
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

When driving

■ When towing a trailer

2-5. Driving information

NOTICE
■ When installing a trailer hitch
● Use only the position recommended by your Toyota dealer. Do not install
the trailer hitch on the bumper; this may cause body damage.
● Do not use axle-mounted hitches, as they can cause damage to the axle
housing, wheel bearings, wheels or tires.
■ Safety chain
A safety chain must always be used between the towing vehicle and the
trailer. Leave sufficient slack in the chain for turns. The chain should cross
under the trailer tongue to prevent the tongue from dropping to the ground in
the case that it becomes damaged or separated. For the correct safety chain
installation procedure, ask your Toyota dealer.
■ Do not directly splice trailer lights
Directly splicing trailer lights may damage your vehicle’s electrical system
and cause a malfunction.

292
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

2-5. Driving information

Dinghy towing
Your vehicle is not designed to be dinghy towed (with 4 wheels
on the ground) behind a motor home.

When driving

NOTICE
■ To avoid serious damage to your vehicle
Do not tow your vehicle with four wheels on the ground.

293
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Manual air conditioning system∗

Outside/recirculated air mode button
Air outlet selector knob

Cooling and dehumidification
function on/off button
Fan speed control knob

Temperature control knob

Adjusting the settings
■ Basic setting
STEP 1

To turn on the air conditioning system and adjust the fan
speed, turn the fan speed control knob clockwise (increase) or
counterclockwise (decrease).
Turning the knob to “OFF” turns off the fan.

∗: If equipped
296
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

STEP 2

To adjust the temperature setting, turn the temperature control
knob clockwise (warm) or counterclockwise (cool).
If

is not pressed, the system will blow ambient temperature

air or heated air.
For quick cooling, turn the temperature control knob to “MAX A/C”.
The air conditioning will automatically turn on and, if an air outlet
position other than
or
is selected, the system will be
set to recirculated air mode. While “MAX A/C” is selected, it is not
possible to turn off the air conditioning.
STEP 3

To select the air outlets, set the air outlet selector knob to the
desired position.

Air flows to the upper body.

CTH31AS004

Air flows to the upper body and
feet.

CTH31AS005

297
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Interior features

The positions between the air outlet selections shown below can
also be selected for more delicate adjustment.

3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Air flows to the feet.

CTH31AS006

Air flows to the feet and the
windshield defogger operates.
The air intake is automatically
switched to outside air mode.
Pressing
CTH31AS007

to turn the cool-

ing and dehumidification function
on clears the windshield and side
windows faster.

Air flows to the windshield and
side windows.
The air intake is automatically
switched to outside air mode. It is
not possible to return to recirculated air mode when the switch is
on.
CTH31AS008

Pressing

to turn the cool-

ing and dehumidification function
on clears the windshield and side
windows faster.

298
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

■ Switching between outside air and recirculated air modes
Press

The mode switches between outside air mode (introduces air from outside the vehicle) (indicator off) and recirculated air mode (recycles air
inside the vehicle) (indicator on) each time the button is pressed.

Adjusting the position of and opening and closing the air outlets
Front center outlets
Direct air flow to the left or
right, up or down.

CTH31AS022

Front side outlets
Direct air flow to the left or
right, up or down.
Turn the knob to open or close
the vent.

CTH31AS015

299
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Interior features

Turn the knob to open or close
the vent.

3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Rear outlets
Direct air flow to the left or
right, up or down.
Turn the knob to open or close
the vent.

CTH31AS016

■ Using the system in recirculated air mode
The windows will fog up more easily if recirculated air mode is used for an
extended period of time.
■ Switching between outside air and recirculated air modes
Recirculated air mode or outside air mode may be automatically switched to
in accordance with the outside temperature, etc.
■ When

is selected for the air outlets used

For your driving comfort, air flowing to the feet may be warmer than air flowing to the upper body depending on the temperature setting.
■ When the indicator light on
Press

flashes

to turn off the cooling and dehumidification function and turn it

on again. There may be a problem in the air conditioning system if the indicator light continues to flash. Turn the air conditioning system off and have it
inspected by your Toyota dealer.
■ When outside air temperature is below 32°F (0°C)
The cooling and dehumidification function may not operate even when
is pressed.

300
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

■ Air conditioning odors
● During use, various odors from inside and outside the vehicle may enter
into and accumulate in the air conditioning system. This may then cause
odor to be emitted from the vents.
● To reduce potential odors from occurring:
It is recommended that the air conditioning system be set to outside air
mode prior to turning the vehicle off.

CAUTION
■ To prevent the windshield from fogging up

NOTICE
■ To prevent battery discharge
Do not leave the air conditioning system on longer than necessary when the
engine is stopped.

301
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Interior features

Do not use
during cool air operation in extremely humid weather. The
difference between the temperature of the outside air and that of the windshield can cause the outer surface of the windshield to fog up, blocking your
vision.

3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Automatic air conditioning system∗

Air outlets and fan speed are automatically adjusted according to the
temperature setting.
Driver's side temperature control dial
Cooling and dehumidification function on/off button
Fan speed display
Air outlet display

Passenger’s side
temperature control dial

Driver’s side temperature display

“Off” button
Automatic mode button

Passenger’s side
temperature display

Dual mode button

Windshield defogger
button

Air outlet selector buttons

Outside/recirculated air mode button

Fan speed control button

∗: If equipped
302
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Using the automatic air conditioning system
STEP 1

Press

The air conditioning system begins to operate. Air outlets and fan
speed are automatically adjusted according to the temperature setting.
STEP 2

Turn

clockwise to increases the temperature and turn
counterclockwise to decreases the temperature on the
3

driver’s side.
is pressed (the indicator on

is on) or the pas-

senger’s side temperature control dial is turned, the temperature for
the driver and passenger seats can be adjusted separately.

303
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Interior features

When

3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Adjusting the settings manually
■ Basic setting
STEP 1

To turn on the air conditioning system and adjust the fan
speed, press “>” on
to increase the fan speed and
“<” to decrease the fan speed.
Press

STEP 2

to turn the fan off.

To adjust the temperature setting, turn
increases the temperature and

clockwise to
counterclockwise to

decreases the temperature.
When

is pressed (the indicator on

is on) or the pas-

senger’s side temperature control dial is turned, the temperature for
the driver and passenger seats can be adjusted separately.
STEP 3

To change the air outlets, press

.
The air flow shown on the display indicates the following:

Air flows to the upper body.

CTH31AS009

: May occur in automatic mode

304
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Air flows to the upper body and
feet.

CTH31AS010

Air flows to the feet.

Air flows to the feet and the
windshield defogger operates.
The air intake is automatically
switched to outside air mode.

CTH31AS012

305
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Interior features

CTH31AS011

3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

■ Switching between outside air and recirculated air modes
Press

The mode switches between outside air mode (the indicator is off)
and recirculated air mode (the indicator is on) each time the button is
pressed.

Defogging the windshield
Defogging
The air conditioning system operates automatically.
The air intake is automatically
switched to outside air mode. It is
not possible to return to recirculated air mode when the switch is
on.

CTH31AS013

306
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Adjusting the position of and opening and closing the air outlets
Front center outlets
Direct air flow to the left or
right, up or down.
Turn the knob to open or close
the vent.

CTH31AS014

Front side outlets

Turn the knob to open or close
the vent.

CTH31AS015

Rear outlets
Direct air flow to the left or
right, up or down.
Turn the knob to open or close
the vent.

CTH31AS016

307
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Interior features

Direct air flow to the left or
right, up or down.

3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

■ Using automatic mode
Fan speed is adjusted automatically according to the temperature setting
and ambient conditions. As a result, the following may occur:
● The system may switch automatically to recirculated air mode when the
coolest temperature setting is selected when the ambient temperature is
high.
● Immediately after the switch is pressed, the fan may stop for a while until
warm or cool air is ready to flow.
● Cool air may flow to the area around the upper body when the heater is
on.
■ Switching between outside air and recirculated air modes
Recirculated air mode or outside air mode may be automatically switched to
in accordance with the temperature setting, the outside temperature, etc.
■ Using the system in recirculated air mode
The windows will fog up more easily if recirculated air mode is used.
■ Window defogger feature
Recirculated air mode may automatically switch to outside air mode in situations where the windows need to be defogged.
■ When

is selected for the air outlets used

For your driving comfort, air flowing to the feet may be warmer than air flowing to the upper body depending on the temperature setting.
■ When driving on dusty roads
Close all windows. If dust thrown up by the vehicle is still drawn into the vehicle after closing the windows, it is recommended that the air intake mode be
set to outside air mode and the fan speed to any setting except off.

308
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

■ When outside air temperature is below 32°F (0°C)
The cooling and dehumidification function may not operate even when
is pressed.
■ When the indicator light on

flashes

to turn off the cooling and dehumidification function and turn it
Press
on again. There may be a problem in the air conditioning system if the indicator light continues to flash. Turn the air conditioning system off and have it
inspected by your Toyota dealer.
■ Air conditioning odors
● During use, various odors from inside and outside the vehicle may enter
into and accumulate in the air conditioning system. This may then cause
odor to be emitted from the vents.
• It is recommended that the air conditioning system be set to outside air
mode prior to turning the vehicle off.
• The start timing of the blower may be delayed for a short period of time
immediately after the air conditioning system is started in automatic
mode.

CAUTION
■ To prevent the windshield from fogging up
Do not use
during cool air operation in extremely humid weather. The
difference between the temperature of the outside air and that of the windshield can cause the outer surface of the windshield to fog up, blocking your
vision.

NOTICE
■ To prevent battery discharge
Do not leave the air conditioning system on longer than necessary when the
engine is stopped.

309
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Interior features

● To reduce potential odors from occurring:

3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Rear window and outside rear view mirror defoggers
Defoggers are used to defog the rear window, and to remove raindrops, dew and frost from the outside rear view mirrors.

Before operating the defoggers, make sure the back window is
completely closed. (→P. 94)
Vehicles with a manual air conditioning system
Turns the defoggers on/off
The defoggers will automatically turn off after their operation time. The operation time
varies depending on the ambient temperature and vehicle
speed.

Vehicles with an automatic air conditioning system
Turns the defoggers on/off
The defoggers will automatically turn off after their operation time. The operation time
varies depending on the ambient temperature and vehicle
speed.

310
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

■ The defoggers can be operated when
● Vehicles without a smart key system:
The engine switch is in the “ON” position.
Vehicles with a smart key system:
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
● The back window is completely closed.
■ The outside rear view mirror defoggers
Turning the rear window defogger on will turn the outside rear view mirror
defoggers on.

CAUTION

■ When the outside rear view mirror defoggers are on

311
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Interior features

Do not touch outside surface of the rear view mirrors, as they can become
very hot and burn you.

3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Windshield wiper de-icer∗

This feature is used to prevent ice from building up on the windshield and wiper blades.

Turns the windshield wiper deicer on/off
The windshield wiper de-icer
will automatically turn off after
approximately 15 minutes.

CTH31AS020

■ The windshield wiper de-icer can be operated when
Vehicles without a smart key system
The engine switch is in the “ON” position.
Vehicles with a smart key system
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.

CAUTION
■ When the windshield wiper de-icer is on
Do not touch the lower part of the windshield or the side of the front pillars,
as the surfaces can become very hot and burn you.

∗: If equipped
312
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

3-2. Using the audio system

Audio system types
With a navigation system
Owners of models equipped with a navigation system should refer
to the “Navigation System Owner's Manual”.
Without a navigation system
Type A: CD player with changer controller and AM/FM radio

Interior features

Type B: CD player with changer controller and AM/FM radio

313
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

3-2. Using the audio system

Type C: CD player with changer and AM/FM radio

Title

Page

Using the radio

P. 317

Using the CD player

P. 324

Playing MP3 and WMA discs

P. 333

Operating an iPod

P. 341

Operating a USB memory

P. 348

Optimal use of the audio system

P. 355

Using the AUX adapter

P. 360

Using the steering wheel audio switches

P. 361

314
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

3-2. Using the audio system

Language settings (type B and C)
The language used for all voice guidance, voice recognition and messages may be changed.
STEP 1

Press

STEP 2

Press

(MORE).

STEP 3

Press

(LANG).

STEP 4

Press
guage.

as corresponds to the desired lan-

For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.

“ENG” (English) or “ESP” (Spanish)

Interior features

For vehicles sold in Canada
“ENG” (English) or “FRAN” (French)
■ Using cellular phones
Interference may be heard through the audio system's speakers if a cellular
phone is being used inside or close to the vehicle while the audio system is
operating.
■ Certification for the audio system
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules and RSS-Gen of the IC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

315
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

3-2. Using the audio system

CAUTION
■ For vehicles sold in the U.S.A. and Canada
● Part 15 of the FCC Rules and RSS-Gen of the IC Rules
FCC Warning:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible
for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
● Laser products
• Do not take this unit apart or attempt to make any changes yourself.
This is an intricate unit that uses a laser pickup to retrieve information
from the surface of compact discs. The laser is carefully shielded so
that its rays remain inside the cabinet. Therefore, never try to disassemble the player or alter any of its parts since you may be exposed to
laser rays and dangerous voltages.
• This product utilizes a laser.
Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other
than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
• The use of optical instruments with this product will increase eye hazard.

NOTICE
■ To prevent battery discharge
Do not leave the audio system on longer than necessary with the engine off.
■ To avoid damaging the audio system
Take care not to spill drinks or other fluids over the audio system.

316
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

3-2. Using the audio system

Using the radio
Type A
Power

Volume
Seeking a frequency

Adjusting the
frequency
(AM, FM mode)
or channel
Station selector (SAT mode)

AM⋅SAT/FM
mode buttons

Displaying radio
text messages

Interior features

Scanning for
receivable stations

Changing the
channel
category

Type B and C
Power

Adjusting the frequency
(AM, FM mode) or
channel (SAT mode)

Volume
Seeking a frequency

Station selector

Scanning for
receivable stations

AM/FM/SAT
mode button

Setting preset buttons

Changing the
Displaying radio channel
category
text messages
Mute

317
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

3-2. Using the audio system

Setting station presets (excluding XM® Satellite Radio)

STEP 1

Search for desired stations by turning
pressing “∧” or “∨” on

STEP 2

Press and hold a button (from
a beep.

) until you hear

Type B and C: Each time
is pressed, station pages are
changed. There are a total of 6 pages.

Scanning radio stations (excluding XM® Satellite Radio)
■ Scanning the preset radio stations
STEP 1

Press and hold

until you hear a beep.

Preset stations will be played for 5 seconds each.
STEP 2

When the desired station is reached, press

again.

■ Scanning all radio stations within range
STEP 1

Press

All the stations with reception will be played for 5 seconds each.
STEP 2

When the desired station is reached, press

again.

■ Displaying radio text messages (for type B and C, FM mode
only)
When a new radio text message is received, “MSG” is shown on
the display. To display the message, press
If the text continues past the end of the display, “
and hold

until you hear a beep.

Text messages are not displayed while driving.

318
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

.
” is displayed. Press

3-2. Using the audio system

XM® Satellite Radio (if equipped)
■ Receiving XM® Satellite Radio
STEP 1

Press

The display changes as follows each time
pressed.

Type A: AM → SAT1 → SAT2 → SAT3
Type B and C: AM → FM → SAT
STEP 2

Turn

to select the desired channel in all the

categories or press “∧” or “∨” on

to select the desired

■ Setting XM® Satellite Radio channel presets
Select the desired channel. Press and hold a button (from

) until you hear a beep.
Type B and C: Each time
There are a total of 6 pages.

is pressed, station pages are changed.

■ Changing the channel category
Press “∧” or “∨” on

319
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Interior features

channel in the current category.

3-2. Using the audio system

■ Scanning XM® Satellite Radio channels
● Scanning channels in the current category
STEP 1

Press

STEP 2

When the desired channel is reached, press
again.

● Scanning the preset channels
STEP 1

Press and hold

until you hear a beep.

STEP 2

When the desired channel is reached, press
again.

■ Displaying text information
Press

Each time
is pressed, the display changes in the following
order:
Type A: Channel name → Title (song/program title) → Name (artist name/
feature) → Channel number.
Type B and C: Title (song/program title) → Name (artist name/feature)/
Title (song/program title).

320
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

3-2. Using the audio system

■ When the battery is disconnected
All preset stations are erased. (type A only)
■ Reception sensitivity
● Type B and C ⎯ Cargo loaded on the roof luggage carrier, especially
metal objects, may adversely affect the reception of XM® Satellite Radio.
● Maintaining perfect radio reception at all times is difficult due to the continually changing position of the antenna, differences in signal strength
and surrounding objects, such as trains, transmitters, etc.
● The radio antenna is mounted on the right-side front fender. The antenna
can be removed from the base by turning it.
■ XM® Satellite Radio

● XM® subscriptions
For detailed information about XM® Satellite Radio or to subscribe:
U.S.A. ⎯
Visit on the web at www.xmradio.com or call 1-800-967-2346.
Canada ⎯
Visit on the web at www.xmradio.ca or call 1-877-438-9677.
● Radio ID
You will need the radio ID when activating XM® service or reporting a
problem. Select “CH000” using

, and the receiver's 8-

character ID number will appear.
● Satellite tuner
The tuner supports only Audio Services (Music and Talk) and the accompanying Text Information of XM® Satellite Radio.

321
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Interior features

An XM® Satellite Radio is a tuner designed exclusively to receive broadcasts
provided under a separate subscription. Availability is limited to the 48 contiguous states and 10 Canadian provinces.

3-2. Using the audio system

■ If XM® Satellite Radio does not operate normally
If a problem occurs with the XM® tuner, a message will appear on the display. Refer to the table below to identify the problem, and take the suggested
corrective action.

ANTENNA
or
CHECK
ANTENNA

UPDATING
or
CHANNEL NOT
AUTHORIZED

The XM® antenna is not connected. Check
whether the XM® antenna cable is attached
securely.
There is a short-circuit in the antenna or the surrounding antenna cable. See a Toyota certified
dealer.
You have not subscribed to XM® Satellite Radio.
The radio is being updated with the latest encryption code. Contact XM® Satellite Radio for subscription information. When a contract is canceled,
you can choose the “CH000” and all free-to-air
channels.
The premium channel you selected is not authorized. Wait for about 2 seconds until the radio
returns to the previous channel or “CH001”. If it
does not change automatically, select another
channel. If you want to listen to the premium channel, contact XM® Satellite Radio.

NO SIGNAL

The XM® signal is too weak at the current location.
Wait until your vehicle reaches a location with a
stronger signal.

The unit is acquiring audio or program information.
Wait until the unit has received the information.

OFF AIR
or
CHANNEL OFF
AIR

The channel you selected is not broadcasting any
programming. Select another channel.

-----

There is no song/program title or artist name/feature associated with the channel at this time. No
action needed.

322
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

3-2. Using the audio system

--or
CHANNEL NOT
AVAILABLE

The channel you selected is no longer available.
Wait for about 2 seconds until the radio returns to
the previous channel or “CH001”. If it does not
change automatically, select another channel.

Contact the XM® Listener Care Center at 1-800-967-2346 (U.S.A.) or 1-877438-9677 (Canada)
■ Certifications for the radio tuner
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a
class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are
designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a
residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate
radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the
instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular
installation.

● Reorienting or relocating the receiving antenna.
● Increasing the separation between the equipment and receiver.
● Connecting the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to
which the receiver is connected.
● Consulting the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.

NOTICE
■ To prevent damage, remove the antenna in the following cases.
● The antenna will touch the ceiling of a garage.
● A cover will be put on the vehicle.

323
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Interior features

If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television
reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the
user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by trying one or more of
the following:

3-2. Using the audio system

Using the CD player
Type A
Power

Volume

Displaying text messages
CD eject

Selecting a track
Rewinding

Selecting a track

Repeat play
Random playback

Fast-forwarding
Playback

Searching playback

Type B and C
Power

Volume

Displaying text messages
CD eject

Selector buttons

Selecting a track/
fast-forwarding
Searching
and rewinding
playback

Playback

324
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Selecting a track
CD load
(type C only)

Playback/pause

3-2. Using the audio system

Loading CDs
■ Loading a CD (type A and B)
Insert a CD.
■ Loading a CD (type C)
STEP 1

Press

STEP 2

When the indicator on the slot turns from amber to green,
insert a CD.

■ Loading multiple CDs (type C only)
STEP 1

Press and hold

STEP 2

until you hear a beep.

When the indicator on the slot turns from amber to green,
insert a CD.

The indicator on the slot turns to amber when the CD is inserted.

When the indicator on the slot turns from amber to green
again, insert the next CD.
Repeat the procedure for the remaining CDs.
To cancel, press
. If you do not insert a disc within 15 seconds, loading will be canceled automatically.

325
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Interior features

STEP 3

3-2. Using the audio system

Ejecting CDs
■ Ejecting a CD (type A and B)
Press

and remove the CD.

■ Ejecting a CD (type C)
STEP 1

To select the CD to be ejected, press
(

(

) or

The selected CD number is shown on the display.
STEP 2

Press

and remove the CD.

■ Ejecting all the CDs (type C only)
Press and hold
the CDs.

until you hear a beep, and then remove

Selecting a track
Press “∧” to move up or “∨” to move down using
desired track number is displayed.
Fast-forwarding and rewinding tracks
Type A: Press

(

) or

(

Type B and C: Press and hold “∧” or “∨” on

326
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

until the

3-2. Using the audio system

Scanning tracks
STEP 1

Press

The first ten seconds of each track will be played.
To cancel, press
STEP 2

Press

again.

again when the desired track is reached.

Selecting a CD (type C only)
■ Selecting a CD to play
Press

(

) or

(

■ Scanning loaded CDs
Press and hold

until you hear a beep.

Interior features

STEP 1

The first ten seconds of the first track on each CD will be played.
To cancel, press
STEP 2

Press

again.

again when the desired CD is reached.

Playing and pausing tracks (type B and C)
Press

327
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

3-2. Using the audio system

Random playback
■ Current CD
Press

(RAND) or

(RDM).

Songs are played in random order.
To cancel, press the button once more (type A and B), or twice more
(type C).

■ All CDs (type C only)
Press

(RDM) twice.

Tracks on all loaded CDs are played in random order.
To cancel, press the button again.

Repeat play
■ Repeating a track
Press

(RPT) or

(RPT).

To cancel, press the button once more (type A and B), or twice more
(type C).

■ Repeating all of the tracks on a CD (type C only)
Press

(RPT) twice.

To cancel, press the button again.

328
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

3-2. Using the audio system

Switching the display
Press

Each time
order:

is pressed, the display changes in the following

Type A: Track no./Elapsed time → CD title → Track name.
Type B and C: Track title → Track name/Artist name → Track name/
Elapsed time.
■ Display (type A only)
Up to 12 characters can be displayed at a time.
for 1 sec-

If
is pressed for 1 second or more again or has not been pressed
for 6 seconds or more, the display will return to the first 12 characters.
Depending on the contents recorded, the characters may not be displayed
properly or may not be displayed at all.

329
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Interior features

If there are 13 characters or more, pressing and holding
ond or more will display the remaining characters.
A maximum of 24 characters can be displayed.

3-2. Using the audio system

■ Error messages
“CD CHECK”: This indicates a problem either with the CD or inside the
player. The CD may be dirty, damaged or inserted up-side
down.
“WAIT” or “PLEASE WAIT”: Operation has stopped due to a high temperature inside the player. Wait for a while and then
press
or
. Contact your Toyota
dealer if the CD still cannot be played back.
■ Discs that can be used
Discs with the marks shown below can be used.
Playback may not be possible depending on the recording format or disc
features, or due to scratches, dirt or deterioration.

CDs with copy-protection features may not be used.
■ CD player protection feature
To protect the internal components, playback is automatically stopped when
a problem is detected while the CD player is being used.
■ If CDs are left inside the CD player or in the ejected position for
extended periods
CDs may be damaged and may not play properly.
■ Lens cleaners
Do not use lens cleaners. Doing so may damage the CD player.

330
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

3-2. Using the audio system

NOTICE
■ CDs and adapters that cannot be used
Do not use the following types of CDs, 3 in. (8 cm) CD adapters or Dual
Discs.
Doing so may damage the CD player and/or the CD insert/eject function.
● CD player with changer and AM/FM
radio: CDs that have a diameter that is
not 4.7 in. (12 cm)

● Low-quality and deformed CDs
Interior features

● CDs with a transparent or translucent
recording area

● CDs that have had tape, stickers or CDR labels attached to them, or that have
had the label peeled off

331
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

3-2. Using the audio system

NOTICE
■ CD player precautions
Failure to follow the precautions below may result in serious damage to the
CDs or the player itself.
● Do not insert anything other than CDs into the CD slot.
● Do not apply oil to the CD player.
● Store CDs away from direct sunlight.
● Never try to disassemble any part of the CD player.
● Do not insert more than one CD at a
time.

332
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

3-2. Using the audio system

Playing MP3 and WMA discs
Type A
Power

Volume

Selecting a file
Selecting a
folder and files

CD eject
Selecting a file

Fast-forwarding

Repeat play
Random playback

Rewinding

Displaying text
messages

Interior features

Searching
playback

Playback

Type B and C
Power

Volume

CD eject

Selecting a file

CD load
Selector buttons
(type C only)
Selecting a
folder and file

Selecting a file/
fast-forwarding
Playback
and rewinding
Playback/pause
Searching playback

Displaying text
messages

333
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

3-2. Using the audio system

Loading and ejecting MP3 and WMA discs
→P. 325
Selecting MP3 and WMA discs (type C only)
→P. 326
Selecting and scanning a folder
■ Selecting folders one at a time
Press “∧” or “∨” on

to select the desired folder.

■ Scanning the first file of all the folders
STEP 1

Press and hold

until you hear a beep.

The first ten seconds of the first file in each folder will be played.
STEP 2

When the desired folder is reached, press

again.

■ Returning to the first folder
Press and hold “∨” on

until you hear a beep.

Selecting and scanning files
■ Selecting one file at a time
Turn

or press “∧” or “∨” on

desired file.

334
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

to select the

3-2. Using the audio system

■ Selecting the desired file by cueing the files in the folder
Press

When the desired file is reached, press

once again.

Fast-forwarding and rewinding files
Type A: Press

(

) or

(

Type B and C: Press and hold “∧” or “∨” on

Playing and pausing files (type B and C)
3

Press

.
Interior features

Random playback
■ Playing files from a particular folder in random order
Press

(RAND) or

(RDM).

To cancel, press the button once more (type A and B), or twice more
(type C).

■ Playing all of the files on a disc in random order (type C only)
Press

(RDM) twice.

To cancel, press the button again.

335
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

3-2. Using the audio system

Repeat play
■ Repeating a file
Press

(RPT) or

(RPT).

To cancel, press the button once more (type A and B), or twice more
(type C).

■ Repeating all of the files in a folder
Type A: Press and hold
Type B and C: Press

(RPT) until you hear a beep.
(RPT) twice.

To cancel, press the button once more (type A and B), or twice more
(type C).

■ Repeating all of the files in a disc (type C only)
Press

(RPT) three times.

To cancel, press the same button again.

Switching the display
Press
Each time
order:

.
is pressed, the display changes in the following

Type A: Folder no./File no./Elapsed time → Folder name → File name →
Album title (MP3 only) → Track title → Artist name.
Type B and C: Track title → Track title/Artist name → Track title/Album
name (MP3 only) → Track title/Elapsed time.

336
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

3-2. Using the audio system

■ Display (type A only)
→P. 329
■ Error messages
“CD CHECK”: This indicates a problem either with the CD or inside the
player. The CD may be dirty, damaged or inserted up-side
down.
“WAIT” or “PLEASE WAIT”: Operation has stopped due to a high temperature inside the player. Wait for a while and then
press
or
. Contact your Toyota
dealer if the CD still cannot be played.
■ Discs that can be used

→P. 330
→P. 330
■ If CDs are left inside the CD player or in the ejected position for
extended periods
→P. 330
■ Lens cleaners
→P. 330

337
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Interior features

■ CD player protection feature

3-2. Using the audio system

■ MP3 and WMA files
MP3 (MPEG Audio LAYER3) is a standard audio compression format.
Files can be compressed to approximately 1/10 of their original size by using
MP3 compression.
WMA (Windows Media TM Audio) is a Microsoft audio compression format.
This format compresses audio data to a size smaller than that of the MP3
format.
There is a limit to the MP3 and WMA file standards that can be used and to
the media/formats on which the files are recorded.
● MP3 file compatibility
• Compatible standards
MP3 (MPEG1 LAYER3, MPEG2 LSF LAYER3)
• Compatible sampling frequencies
MPEG1 LAYER3: 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)
MPEG2 LSF LAYER3: 16, 22.05, 24 (kHz)
• Compatible bit rates (Compatible with VBR)
MPEG1 LAYER3: 64, 80, 96, 112, 128, 160, 192, 224, 256, 320 (kbps)
MPEG2 LSF LAYER3: 64, 80, 96, 112, 128, 144, 160 (kbps)
• Compatible channel modes: stereo, joint stereo, dual channel and
monaural
● WMA file compatibility
• Compatible standards
WMA Ver. 7, 8, 9
• Compatible sampling frequencies
32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)
• Compatible bit rates (Only compatible with 2-channel playback)
Ver. 7, 8: CBR 48, 64, 80, 96, 128, 160, 192 (kbps)
Ver. 9: CBR 48, 64, 80, 96, 128, 160, 192, 256, 320 (kbps)

338
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

3-2. Using the audio system

● Compatible media
Media that can be used for MP3 and WMA playback are CD-Rs and CDRWs.
Playback in some instances may not be possible if the CD-R or CD-RW is
not finalized. Playback may not be possible or the audio may jump if the
disc is scratched or marked with fingerprints.
● Compatible disc formats
The following disc formats can be used.
• Disc formats: CD-ROM Mode 1 and Mode 2
CD-ROM XA Mode 2, Form 1 and Form 2
• File formats: ISO9660 Level 1, Level 2, (Romeo, Joliet)
MP3 and WMA files written in any format other than those listed above
may not play correctly, and their file names and folder names may not
be displayed correctly.
Items related to standards and limitations are as follows.

Interior features

• Maximum directory hierarchy: 8 levels
• Maximum length of folder names/file names: 32 characters
• Maximum number of folders: 192 (including the root)
• Maximum number of files per disc: 255
● File names
The only files that can be recognized as MP3/WMA and played are those
with the extension .mp3 or .wma.
● Multi-sessions
As the audio system is compatible with multi-sessions, it is possible to play
discs that contain MP3 and WMA files. However, only the first session can
be played.
● ID3 and WMA tags
ID3 tags can be added to MP3 files, making it possible to record the track
title, artist name, etc.
The system is compatible with ID3 Ver. 1.0, 1.1, and Ver. 2.2, 2.3 ID3 tags.
(The number of characters is based on ID3 Ver. 1.0 and 1.1.)
WMA tags can be added to WMA files, making it possible to record the
track title and artist name in the same way as with ID3 tags.

339
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

3-2. Using the audio system

● MP3 and WMA playback
When a disc containing MP3 or WMA files is inserted, all files on the disc
are first checked. Once the file check is finished, the first MP3 or WMA file
is played. To make the file check finish more quickly, we recommend you
do not write in any files other than MP3 or WMA files or create any unnecessary folders.
If the discs contain a mixture of music data and MP3 or WMA format data,
only music data can be played.
● Extensions
If the file extensions .mp3 and .wma are used for files other than MP3 and
WMA files, they will be mistakenly recognized and played as MP3 and
WMA files. This may result in large amounts of interference and damage
to the speakers.
● Playback
• To play MP3 files with steady sound quality, we recommend a fixed bit
rate of at least 128 kbps and a sampling frequency of 44.1 kHz.
• CD-R or CD-RW playback may not be possible in some instances,
depending on the characteristics of the disc.
• There is a wide variety of freeware and other encoding software for
MP3 and WMA files on the market, and depending on the status of the
encoding and the file format, poor sound quality or noise at the start of
playback may result. In some cases, playback may not be possible at
all.
• When files other than MP3 or WMA files are recorded on a disc, it may
take more time to recognize the disc. In some cases, playback may not
be possible at all.
• Microsoft, Windows, and Windows Media are the registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S. and other countries.

NOTICE
■ CDs and adapters that cannot be used (→P. 331)
■ CD player precautions (→P. 332)

340
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

3-2. Using the audio system

Operating an iPod®∗

Connecting an iPod® enables you to enjoy music from the vehicle
speakers.

■ Connecting an iPod®
Open the glove box and connect an iPod® using an iPod®
cable.

STEP 1

Interior features

CTH32AS024

STEP 2

Press

∗: If equipped
341
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

3-2. Using the audio system

■ Control panel
Power

Volume

Selecting a track/
fast-forwarding
and rewinding

Selector knob
Selector buttons

Playback/pause
Playback

342
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Displaying text
messages

3-2. Using the audio system

Selecting a play mode
(BROWSE) to select iPod® menu mode.

STEP 1

Press

STEP 2

Press
,
,
desired play mode.
Pressing

as corresponds to the

(MORE) to change to the second selection list.

■ Play mode list
Play mode

First
selection

Second
selection
Songs
select

ARTIST

Artist select

Albums
select

ALBUM

Albums
select

Songs
select

GENRE

Genre select

Artists select

SONGS

Songs
select

PODCST

Fourth
selection

Songs
select

Albums
select

Songs
select

Albums
select

Songs
select

COMPSR

Composers
select

Albums
select

Songs
select

BOOK

Songs
select

Interior features

Playlist
select

PLIST

Third
selection

Depending on the model, the name of your iPod® may be displayed at
the top of the list.

343
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

3-2. Using the audio system

■ Selecting a list
STEP 1

Turn

to display the first selection list.

STEP 2

Press

STEP 3

Repeat the same procedure to select the desired song name.

to select the desired item.

To return to the previous selection list, press

(

Selecting songs from a song list
STEP 1

Press

(LIST).

The current playlist is displayed.
STEP 2

Turning

Press

to select the desired song.

returns the screen from list display to the previous

screen.

344
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

3-2. Using the audio system

Selecting songs

Turn

or press “∧” or “∨” on

to select the desired song.

Playing and pausing songs
Press

Fast-forwarding and rewinding songs
Press and hold “∧” or “∨” on

Interior features

Shuffle playback
■ Playing songs from one playlist or album in random order
Press

(RDM).

To cancel, press the button twice.

■ Playing songs from all the playlists or albums in random order
Press

(RDM) twice.

To cancel, press the button again.

Repeat play
Press

(RPT).

To cancel, press the button again.
Even when the repeat play option has not been selected, playback will
automatically continue from the first song in the current play list once the
last song has ended.

345
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

3-2. Using the audio system

Switching the display
Press

Each time
is pressed, the display changes in the following
order:
Track title → Track title/Artist name → Track title/Album name → Track
title/Elapsed time
■ About iPod®
iPod® is a registered trademark of Apple computer, Inc.
■ iPod® functions
● When an iPod® is connected and the audio source is changed to iPod®
mode, the iPod® will resume play from the same point in which it was last
used.
● Depending on the iPod® that is connected to the system, certain functions may not be available. Disconnecting the device and reconnecting it
once again may resolve some malfunctions.
■ iPod® problems
To resolve most problems encountered when using your iPod®, disconnect
your iPod® from the vehicle iPod® connection and reset it.
For instructions on how to reset your iPod®, refer to your iPod® Owner's
Manual.
■ Error messages
“iPod ERROR”:

This indicates a problem in the iPod®, inside the
USB box or the connection between them.

“NO SONGS”:

This indicates that there is no music data in the
iPod®.

“UPDATE YOUR iPod”: This indicates that the version of the iPod® is not
compatible.

346
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

3-2. Using the audio system

■ Compatible models
● iPod® 5th generation Version 1.2 or later
● iPod® nano 3rd generation Version 1.0 or later
● iPod® nano 2nd generation Version 1.1.2 or later
● iPod® nano Version 1.3 or later
● iPod® touch Version 1.1 or later
● iPod® classic Version 1.0 or later
iPhone®, iPod® mini, iPod® shuffle, iPod® photo and 4th generation and earlier models of iPod® are not compatible with this system.
Items related to standards and limitations are as follows:
● Maximum number of lists in a device: 9999

● Maximum number of songs in a device: 65025
● Maximum number of songs per list: 65025

Interior features

CAUTION
■ Caution while driving
Do not connect iPod® or operate the controls.

NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to iPod®
● Do not leave iPod® in the vehicle. The temperature inside may become
high, resulting in damage to the player.
● Do not push down on or apply unnecessary pressure to the iPod® while it
is connected as this may damage the iPod® or its terminal.
● Do not insert foreign objects into the port as this may damage the iPod® or
its terminal.

347
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

3-2. Using the audio system

Operating a USB memory∗
Connecting a USB memory enables you to enjoy music from the
vehicle speakers.

■ Connecting a USB memory
Open the glove box and connect a USB memory.

STEP 1

CTH32AS024

STEP 2

Press

∗: If equipped
348
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

3-2. Using the audio system

■ Control panel
Power

Volume

Selector knob

Selecting a track/
fast-forwarding
and rewinding

Selecting a
folder and file

Selector buttons

Playback/pause

Displaying text
messages

Interior features

Searching
playback

Playback

Selecting and scanning a folder
■ Selecting a folder
Press “∧” or “∨” on

to select the desired folder.

■ Returning to the first file of the first folder
Press and hold “∨” on

until you hear a beep.

■ Scanning the first file of all the folders
STEP 1

Press and hold

until you hear a beep.

The first ten seconds of the first file in each folder will be played.
STEP 2

When the desired folder is reached, press

again.

349
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

3-2. Using the audio system

Selecting and scanning files
■ Selecting a file
Turn

or press “∧” or “∨” on

to select the desired file.

■ Scanning the files in a folder
Press

The first ten seconds of each file will be played.
To cancel, press

again.

When the desired file is reached, press

again.

Playing and pausing files
Press

Fast-forwarding and rewinding files
Press and hold “∧” or “∨” on

Random playback
■ Playing files from a folder in random order
Press

(RDM).

To cancel, press the button twice.

■ Playing all the files from a USB memory in random order
Press

(RDM) twice.

To cancel, press the button again.

350
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

3-2. Using the audio system

Repeat play
■ Repeating a file
Press

(RPT).

To cancel, press the button twice.

■ Repeating all the files in a folder
Press

(RPT) twice.

To cancel, press the button again.

Switching the display
Press

■ USB memory functions
Depending on the USB memory that is connected to the system, certain
functions may not be available. Disconnecting the device and reconnecting it
once again may resolve some malfunctions.
■ Error messages
“USB ERROR”: This indicates a problem either in the USB memory or
inside the USB box or connection between them.
“NO SUPPORT”: This indicates that no MP3/WMA files are included in the
USB memory.

351
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Interior features

Each time
is pressed, the display changes in the following
order:
Track title → Track title/Artist name → Track title/Album name → Track
title/Elapsed time

3-2. Using the audio system

■ USB memory
● Compatible device
USB memory that can be used for MP3 and WMA playback.
Depending on the type of USB device, playback may not be possible.
● Compatible device formats
The following device formats can be used:
• USB communication formats: USB2.0 FS (12 mbps)
• File formats: FAT16/32 (Windows)
• Correspondence class: Mass storage class
MP3 and WMA files written in any format other than those listed above
may not play correctly, and their file names and folder names may not
be displayed correctly.
Items related to standards and limitations are as follows:
• Maximum directory hierarchy: 8 levels
• Maximum number of folder in device: 999 (including the root)
• Maximum number of files in device: 65025
• Maximum number of files per folder: 255
● MP3 and WMA files
MP3 (MPEG Audio LAYER 3) is a standard audio compression format.
Files can be compressed to approximately 1/10 of their original size using
MP3 compression.
WMA (Windows MediaTM Audio) is a Microsoft audio compression format.
This format compresses audio data to a size smaller than that of the MP3
format.
There is a limit to the MP3 and WMA file standards that can be used and to
the media/formats on which the files are recorded.

352
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

3-2. Using the audio system

● MP3 file compatibility
• Compatible standards
MP3 (MPEG1 AUDIO LAYERII, III, MPEG2 AUDIO LAYERII, III,
MPEG2.5)
• Compatible sampling frequencies
MPEG1 AUDIO LAYERII, III: 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)
MPEG2 AUDIO LAYERII, III: 16, 22.05, 24 (kHz)
MPEG2.5: 8, 11.025, 12 (kHz)
• Compatible bit rates (compatible with VBR)
MPEG1 AUDIO LAYERII, III: 32-320 (kbps)
MPEG2 AUDIO LAYERII, III: 32-160 (kbps)
MPEG2.5: 32-160 (kbps)
• Compatible channel modes: stereo, joint stereo, dual channel and
monaural
● WMA file compatibility

Interior features

• Compatible standards
WMA Ver. 9
• Compatible sampling frequencies
HIGH PROFILE 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)
• Compatible bit rates
HIGH PROFILE 32-320 (kbps, VBR)
● File names
The only files that can be recognized as MP3/WMA and played are those
with the extension .mp3 or .wma.
● ID3 and WMA tags
ID3 tags can be added to MP3 files, making it possible to record the track
title, artist name, etc.
The system is compatible with ID3 Ver. 1.0, 1.1, and Ver. 2.2, 2.3, 2.4 ID3
tags. (The number of characters is based on ID3 Ver. 1.0 and 1.1.)
WMA tags can be added to WMA files, making it possible to record the
track title and artist name in the same way as with ID3 tags.
● MP3 and WMA playback
When a device containing MP3 or WMA files is plugged, all files in the
USB memory device are first checked. Once the file check is finished, the
first MP3 or WMA file is played. To make the file check finish more quickly,
we recommend you do not write in any files other than MP3 or WMA files
or create any unnecessary folders.
353
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

3-2. Using the audio system

● Extensions
If the file extensions .mp3 and .wma are used for files other than MP3 and
WMA files, they will be mistakenly recognized and played as MP3 and
WMA files. This may result in large amounts of interference and damage
to the speakers.
● Playback
• To play MP3 file with steady sound quality, we recommend a fixed bit
rate of at least 128 kbps and a sampling frequency of 44.1 kHz.
• There is a wide variety of freeware and other encoding software for
MP3 and WMA files on the market, and depending on the status of the
encoding and the file format, poor sound quality or noise at the start of
playback may result. In some cases, playback may not be possible at
all.
• Microsoft, Windows, and Windows Media are the registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A. and other countries.

CAUTION
■ Caution while driving
Do not use a USB memory, or connect a USB memory.

NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to a USB memory
● Do not leave a USB memory in the vehicle. The temperature inside may
become high, resulting in damage to the player.
● Do not push down on or apply unnecessary pressure to the USB memory
while it is connected as this may damage the USB memory or its terminal.
● Do not insert foreign objects into the port as this may damage the USB
memory or its terminal.

354
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

3-2. Using the audio system

Optimal use of the audio system
Type A
Adjusting the sound quality and ASL

Selector buttons

Interior features

Type B and C
Adjusting the sound quality and ASL

Menu button

355
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

3-2. Using the audio system

Using the audio control function
■ Changing sound quality modes
Type A
Pressing

selects the mode to be changed in the following

order:
“BAS”→“TRE”→“FAD”→“BAL”→“ASL”
Type B and C
STEP 1

Press

STEP 2

Press
,
,
,
or
(type C only) as
corresponds to the desired mode.
“BASS”, “MID” (type C only), “TREB”, “FADE”, or “BAL”

■ Adjusting sound quality
Turning

adjusts the level.

Type A
Mode
displayed

Sound quality mode

Level

Turn to the
left

Turn to the
right

BAS

Bass*

-5 to 5

TRE

Treble*

-5 to 5

Low

High

FAD

Front/rear
volume
balance

F7 to R7

Shifts to rear

Shifts to
front

BAL

Left/right
volume
balance

L7 to R7

Shifts to left

Shifts to right

*: The sound quality level is adjusted individually in each radio
mode or CD mode.
356
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

3-2. Using the audio system

Type B and C
Mode
displayed

Sound quality mode

Level

Turn to the
left

Turn to the
right

BASS

Bass*

-5 to 5

MID

Mid-range*
(type C only)

-5 to 5

Low

High

TREB

Treble*

-5 to 5

FADE

Front/rear
volume
balance

F7 to R7

Shifts to rear

Shifts to
front

BAL

Left/right
volume
balance

L7 to R7

Shifts to left

Shifts to right

■ Adjusting the Automatic Sound Levelizer (ASL)
Type A
When “ASL” is selected, turning

to the right changes the

“ASL” level in the order of “LOW”, “MID” and “HIGH”.
Turning

to the left turns “ASL” off.

ASL automatically adjusts the volume and tone quality according to vehicle speed.

357
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Interior features

*: The sound quality level is adjusted individually in each audio
mode.

3-2. Using the audio system

Type B and C
STEP 1

Press

STEP 2

Press

(MORE).

STEP 3

Press

(ASL).

STEP 4

Press
,
,
(type B only) or
only) as corresponds to the desired mode.

(type B

Type B: “LOW”, “MID”, “HIGH”, or “OFF”
Type C: “ON” or “OFF”
ASL automatically adjusts the volume and tone quality according
to vehicle speed.

■ Setting the number of preset pages (type B and C)
The number of preset pages desired can be set from 1 to 6. The initial
setting is 6 pages.
STEP 1

Press

STEP 2

Press

(MORE).

STEP 3

Press

(PRESET).

STEP 4

Press
,
,
,
,
or
sponds to the desired number of preset pages.

■ Language settings (type B and C)
→P. 315

358
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

as corre-

3-2. Using the audio system

Party mode switch
You can switch the sounds quality types by pressing the switch.
Base mode
Party mode

CTH32AS048

In party mode, the sound volume
from the speakers on the back
door is bigger than in base mode.
(The output from the speakers on
the rear doors will be transferred
to the back door speakers.)
3

■ Trademark owned by SRS Labs, Inc. (type B and C)

FOCUS, TruBass, SRS and

symbols are trademarks of SRS Labs,

Inc.
FOCUS and TruBass technologies are incorporated under license from
SRS Labs, Inc.

359
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Interior features

The audio systems utilize SRS FOCUSTM and SRS TruBass® audio
enhancement technologies, under license from SRS Labs, Inc., in all modes
except AM radio mode.

3-2. Using the audio system

Using the AUX adapter
This adapter can be used to connect a portable audio device and listen to it through the vehicle’s speakers.

Open the cover and connect
the portable audio device.

STEP 1

CTH32AS023

STEP 2

Press

■ Operating portable audio devices connected to the audio system
The volume can be adjusted using the vehicle's audio controls. All the other
adjustments must be made on the portable audio device itself.
■ When using a portable audio device connected to the power outlet
Noise may occur during playback. Use the power source of the portable
audio device.

360
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

3-2. Using the audio system

Using the steering wheel audio switches∗
Some audio features can be controlled using the switches on the
steering wheel.

Increases/decreases
ume

vol-

Radio mode: Selects radio
stations
CD mode: Selects tracks,
files (MP3 and WMA) and
discs (type C only)
CTH32AS046

iPod® mode:
Selects a song
and

Bluetooth® audio mode:
Selects a track and
album
Turns the power on, selects
an audio source

∗: If equipped
361
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Interior features

USB memory mode:
Selects a file
folder

3-2. Using the audio system

Turning the power on
Press

when the audio system is turned off.

The audio system can be turned off by holding the switch down until you
hear a beep.

Changing the audio source
Press
when the audio system is turned on. The audio source
changes as follows each time the switch is pressed.
If no discs are inserted in the player, that mode will be skipped.
FM→SAT→CD (type B only)→CD changer (type C only)→Bluetooth®
Audio→AUX→USB/iPod®→AM

Adjusting the volume
Press “+” on
volume.

to increase the volume and “-” to decrease the

Press and hold the switch to continue increasing or decreasing the volume.

Selecting a radio station
STEP 1

Press

to select radio mode.

STEP 2

Press “∨” or “∧” on

to select a radio station.

To scan for receivable stations, press and hold “∨” or “∧” on
until you hear a beep.

362
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

3-2. Using the audio system

Selecting a track/file or song
STEP 1

Press

to select CD, iPod®, USB memory or Bluetooth®

audio mode.
STEP 2

Press “∨” or “∧” on
song.

to select the desired track/file or

Selecting a folder or album
STEP 1

Press
to select the CD, USB memory or Bluetooth®
audio mode.

STEP 2

Press and hold “∨” or “∧” on

until you hear a beep.

STEP 1

Press

STEP 2

Press and hold “∨” or “∧” on

Interior features

Selecting a disc in the CD player (type C only)
to select CD mode.
until you hear a beep.

CAUTION
■ To reduce the risk of an accident
Exercise care when operating the audio switches on the steering wheel.

363
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system

Bluetooth® audio system∗

The Bluetooth® audio system enables you to enjoy music played on
a portable digital audio player (portable player) from the vehicle
speakers via wireless communication.
This audio system supports Bluetooth®, a wireless data system
capable of playing portable audio music without cables. If your portable player does not support Bluetooth®, the Bluetooth® audio system will not function.
Owners of models equipped with a navigation system should refer to
the “Navigation System Owner's Manual”.
Title

Page

Using the Bluetooth audio system

P. 367

Operating a Bluetooth® enabled portable player

P. 372

Setting up a

Bluetooth®

enabled portable player

Bluetooth audio system setup

P. 374
P. 379

■ Conditions under which the system will not operate
● If using a portable player that does not support Bluetooth®
● If the portable player is switched off
● If the portable player is not connected
● If the portable player’s battery is low
● If the portable player is behind the seat or in the glove box or console box
● If metal is covering or touching the portable player

∗: If equipped
364
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system

■ When transferring ownership of the vehicle
Be sure to initialize the system to prevent personal data from being improperly accessed. (→P. 403)
■ About Bluetooth®
Bluetooth is a registered trademark of
Bluetooth SIG. Inc.

■ Compatible models

● Bluetooth® specifications:
Ver. 1.2
• A2DP (Advanced Audio Distribution Profile) Ver. 1.0
• AVRCP (Audio/Video Remote Control Profile) Ver. 1.0 or higher (Ver.
1.3 or higher recommended)
Portable players must correspond to the above specifications in order to be
connected to the Bluetooth® audio system. However, please note that some
functions may be limited depending on the type of portable player.
■ Certification for the Bluetooth® audio system
FCC ID: AJDK025
IC ID: 775E-K025
MADE IN JAPAN
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and RSS-Gen of IC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device
may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

365
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Interior features

● Following Profiles:

3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system

CAUTION
■ FCC WARNING
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible
for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
Radio Frequency Radiation Exposure. This equipment complies with FCC/
IC radiation exposure limits set forth for uncontrolled equipment and meets
the FCC radio frequency (RF) Exposure Guidelines in Supplement C to
OET65 and RSS-102 of the IC radio frequency (RF) Exposure rules. This
equipment has very low levels of RF energy that it deemed to comply without maximum permissive exposure evaluation (MPE). But it is desirable that
it should be installed and operated with at least 7.9 in. (20 cm) and more
between the radiator and person’s body (excluding extremities: hands,
wrists, feet and ankles).
This transmitter must not be co-located or operated in conjunction with any
other antenna or transmitter.
■ Caution while driving
Do not connect portable players or operate the controls.

NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to portable players
Do not leave portable players in the vehicle. The temperature inside the
vehicle may become high, resulting in damage to the player.

366
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system

Using the Bluetooth® audio system
■ Audio unit
Display
Track title, Artist name,
Album name, Elapsed time,
“Streaming Audio”, etc. is
displayed.
Selects items such as menu
and number
Turn: Selects an item
Press: Inputs the selected
item
Bluetooth-Audio
tion condition

connec-

■ Microphone

CTH33AS001

367
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Interior
Bluetooth SIG. Inc.

■ Certification for the hands-free phone system
FCC ID: AJDK025
IC ID: 775E-K025
MADE IN JAPAN
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and RSS-Gen of IC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device
may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

382
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

■ Caution while driving
Do not use a cellular phone, or connect the Bluetooth® phone.

NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to a cellular phone
Do not leave a cellular phone in the vehicle. The temperature inside may
become high resulting in damage to the phone.

383
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Interior features

This transmitter must not be co-located or operated in conjunction with any
other antenna or transmitter.

3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
■ Audio unit
Display
A message, name, phone
number, etc. is displayed.
Lower-case characters and
special characters, such as
an umlaut, cannot be displayed.

Selects speed dials
Selects items such as menu
or number
Turn: Selects an item
Press: Inputs the selected
item
Bluetooth® connection condition and reception level
If “BT” is not displayed, the
hands-free phone system
cannot be used.

384
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

■ Steering wheel switches
Volume
The voice guidance volume
cannot be adjusted using this
button.

CTH32AS047

On-hook switch
Turns the hands-free system off/ends a call/refuses a
call
Off-hook switch
Turns the hands-free system on/starts a call

■ Microphone

CTH33AS001

385
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Interior features

Talk switch
Turns the voice command
system on (press)/turns the
voice command system off
(press and hold)

3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

Operating the system using a voice command
By following voice guidance instructions output from the speaker,
voice commands enable the operation of the hands-free phone system without the need to check the display or operate

■ Operation procedure when using a voice command
Press the talk switch and follow voice guidance instructions.
■ Auxiliary commands when using a voice command
The following auxiliary commands can be used when operating the
system using a voice command:
“Cancel”: Exits the hands-free phone system
“Repeat”: Repeats the previous voice guidance instruction
“Go back”: Returns to the previous procedure
“Help”: Reads aloud the function summary if a help comment is
registered for the selected function
Using the hands-free phone system for the first time
Before using the hands-free phone system, it is necessary to register
a cellular phone in the system. The phone registration mode will be
entered automatically when starting the system with no cellular
phone registered. Follow the procedure below to register a cellular
phone:
STEP 1

Press the off-hook switch or the talk switch.

The introductory guidance and phone name registration instructions
are heard.

386
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

STEP 2

Select “Pair Phone” using a voice command or

STEP 3

, and say a name to be

registered.
b. Press the talk switch and say a name to be registered.
A voice guidance instruction to confirm the input is heard.

STEP 4

Select “Confirm” using a voice command or

STEP 5

Select “Phone Only” using a voice command or

Registration to the hands-free phone system and Bluetooth®
audio system at the same time
STEP 5

Select “Int. Audio (Internal audio)” using a voice command or
.

STEP 6

Select “Confirm” using a voice command or

A passkey is displayed and heard, and a voice guidance instruction
for inputting the passkey into the cellular phone is heard.
STEP 7

Input the passkey into the cellular phone.
Refer to the manual that comes with the cellular phone for the operation of the phone.

Guidance for registration completion is heard.
387
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Interior features

Registration to the hands-free phone system only

3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

Menu list of the hands-free phone system
■ Normal operation
Second
menu

Third menu

CallBack
(Call
back)

Dialing a number stored in
the incoming call history
memory

Redial

Dialing a number stored in
the outgoing call history
memory

Dial by
Number

Dialing by inputting a number

Dial by
Name
(Dial by
name)

Dialing by inputting a name
registered in the phone book

Add Entry

Adding a new number

Change
Name

Changing a name in the
phone book

Delete
Entry

Deleting the phone book
data

Delete
Speed
Dial

Deleting a registered speed
dial

List
Names

Listing the phone book data

Speed
Dial
(Set
speed
dial)

Registering a speed dial

First menu

Phonebook

388
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Operation detail

3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

First menu

Second
menu

Setup
(Setup)

Phone
Setup

System
Setup

Operation detail

Set PIN

Setting a PIN code

Phonebook Lock
(Phone book
lock)

Locking the phone book

Phonebook
Unlock (Phone
book unlock)

Unlocking the phone book

Pair Phone

Registering the cellular
phone to be used

Change Phone
Name (Change
name)

Changing a registered name
of a cellular phone

Delete Phone

Deleting a registered cellular
phone

List Phones

Listing the registered cellular
phones

Select Phone

Selecting a cellular phone to
be used

Interior features

Security

Third menu

Set Passkey

Changing the passkey

Handsfree
Power

Setting a Hands-free power
on/off

Guidance Volume

Setting voice guidance volume

Device Name

Displaying a device information

Reset Setting

Initialization

389
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

■ Using a short cut key
First menu

Second menu

Operation detail

Dial “XXX (name)”

Dialing a number registered
in the phone book

Dial “XXX (number)”

Dialing the input numbers

Phone book add
entry

Adding a new number

Phone book change
name

Changing the name of a
phone number in the phone
book

Phone book delete
entry

Deleting phone book data

Phone book set
speed dial

Registering a speed dial

Phone book delete
speed dial

Deleting a speed dial

Phone book List
names

Listing the phone book data

390
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

■ Automatic volume adjustment
When vehicle speed reaches 50 mph (80 km/h) or more, the volume automatically increases. The volume returns to the previous volume setting when
vehicle speed drops to 43 mph (70 km/h) or less.
■ When using a voice command
For numbers, say a combination of single digits from zero to nine, # (pound),
∗ (star), and + (plus).
Say a command correctly and clearly.
■ Situations that the system may not recognize your voice
● When driving on a rough road
● When driving at high speeds

● When air is blowing out of the vents onto the microphone

Interior features

● When the air conditioning fan emits a loud noise
■ Operations that cannot be performed while driving
● Operating the system with
● Registering a cellular phone to the system
■ Changing the passkey
→P. 399

391
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

Making a phone call
■ Making a phone call
● Dialing by inputting a number
“Dial by Number”
● Dialing by inputting a name
“Dial by Name (Dial by name)”
● Speed dialing
● Dialing a number stored in the outgoing history memory
“Redial”
● Dialing a number stored in the incoming history memory
“CallBack (Callback)”
■ Receiving a phone call
● Answering a phone call
● Refusing a phone call
■ Transferring a phone call
■ Using the call history memory
● Dialing
● Storing data in the phone book
● Deleting

Dialing by inputting a number
STEP 1

Press the talk switch and say “Dial by number”.

STEP 2

Press the talk switch and say the phone number.

STEP 3

Dial by one of the following methods:
a. Press the off-hook switch.
b. Press the talk switch and say “Dial”.
c. Select “Dial” using

392
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

Dialing by inputting a name
STEP 1

Press the talk switch and say “Dial by name”.

STEP 2

Select a registered name to be input by either of the following
methods:
a. Press the talk switch and say a registered name.
b. Press the talk switch and say “List names”. Press the talk
switch while the desired name is being read aloud.

STEP 3

Dial by one of the following methods:
a. Press the off-hook switch.
b. Press the talk switch and say “Dial”.
3

c. Select “Dial” using

STEP 1

Press the off-hook switch.

STEP 2

Press the preset button to which the desired number is registered.

STEP 3

Press the off-hook switch.

When receiving a phone call
■ Answering a phone call
Press the off-hook switch.
■ Refusing a phone call
Press the on-hook switch.

393
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Interior features

Speed dialing

3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

Transferring a phone call
A call can be transferred between the cellular phone and system
while dialing, receiving a call, or during a call. Use one of the following methods:
a. Operate the cellular phone.
Refer to the manual that comes with the cellular phone for the operation of the phone.

b. Press the off-hook switch*1.
c. Press the talk switch and say “Call transfer”*2.
*1:

This operation can be performed only when transferring a call
from the cellular phone to the system during a call.

*2:

While the vehicle is in motion, a call cannot be transferred from
the system to the cellular phone. Also, this operation is invalid
while dialing or receiving a call.

Using the call history memory
Follow the procedure below to use a number stored in the call history
memory:
STEP 1

Press the talk switch and say “Redial” (when using a number
stored in the outgoing call history memory) or “Callback”
(when using a number stored in the incoming call history
memory).

STEP 2

Select the number by either of the following methods:
a. Say “Previous” or “Go back” until the desired number is displayed.
b. Select the desired number using

394
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

The following operations can be performed:
Dialing: Press the off-hook switch or select “Dial” using a voice
command or

Storing the number in the phone book: Select “Store” using a voice
command or

Deleting: Select “Delete” using a voice command or

Up to 5 numbers can be stored in each of the outgoing and incoming call history memories.
■ When talking on the phone
● Do not talk at the same time as the other party.
● Keep the volume of the incoming voice down. Otherwise, voice echo will
increase.

395
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Interior features

■ Call history

3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

Setting a cellular phone
Registering a cellular phone in the hands-free phone system allows
the system to function. The following functions can be used for registered cellular phones:

■ Functions and operation procedures
To enter the menu for each function, follow the steps below using a
voice command or

● Registering a cellular phone
1. “Setup (Setup)” → 2. “Phone Setup” → 3. “Pair Phone”
● Selecting the cellular phone to be used
1. “Setup (Setup)” → 2. “Phone Setup” → 3. “Select Phone”
● Changing a registered name
1. “Setup (Setup)” → 2. “Phone Setup” → 3. “Change Phone
Name (Change name)”
● Listing the registered cellular phones
1. “Setup (Setup)” → 2. “Phone Setup” → 3. “List Phones”
● Deleting a cellular phone
1. “Setup (Setup)” → 2. “Phone Setup” → 3. “Delete Phone”
● Changing the passkey
1. “Setup (Setup)” → 2. “Phone Setup” → 3. “Set Passkey”
● Turning the hands-free phone automatic connection on/off
1. “Setup (Setup)” → 2. “Phone Setup” → 3. “Handsfree
Power”

Registering a cellular phone

Select “Pair Phone” using a voice command or

, and perform

the procedure for registering a cellular phone. (→P. 386)
396
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

Selecting the cellular phone to be used

STEP 1

Select “Select Phone” using a voice command or

Pattern A
STEP 2

Select the cellular phone to be used by either of the following
methods, and select “Confirm” using a voice command or
:
a. Press the talk switch and say the desired phone name.

Pattern B
STEP 2

Select the cellular phone to be used using

Changing a registered name
STEP 1

Select “Change Phone Name (Change name)” using a voice
command or

STEP 2

Select the name of the cellular phone to be changed by either
of the following methods:
a. Press the talk switch and say the desired phone name, and
select “Confirm” using a voice command or

b. Press the talk switch and say “List phones”. While the
desired phone name is being read aloud, press the talk
switch.

397
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Interior features

b. Press the talk switch and say “List phones”. While the name
of the desired cellular phone is being read aloud, press the
talk switch.

3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

c. Select the desired phone name using

STEP 3

Press the talk switch or select “Record Name” using

and say a new name.
STEP 4

Select “Confirm” using a voice command or

Listing the registered cellular phones

Selecting “List Phones” using a voice command or

causes the

list of registered cellular phones to be read aloud.
When listing is complete, the system returns to “Phone Setup”.
Pressing the talk switch while the name of a cellular phone is being
read selects the cellular phone, and the following functions will be
available:
• Selecting a cellular phone: “Select Phone”
• Changing a registered name: “Change Name”
• Deleting a cellular phone: “Delete Phone”

398
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

Deleting a cellular phone

STEP 1

Select “Delete Phone” using a voice command or

STEP 2

Select the cellular phone to be deleted by either of the following methods and select “Confirm” using a voice command or
:
a. Press the talk switch and say the name of the desired cellular phone.

Changing the passkey

STEP 1

Select “Set Passkey” using a voice command or

STEP 2

Press the talk switch, say a 4 to 8-digit number, and select
“Confirm” using a voice command or

The number should be input 1 digit at a time.
STEP 3

When the entire number to be registered as a passkey has
been input, press

again.

399
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Interior features

b. Press the talk switch and say “List phones”. While the name
of the desired cellular phone is being read aloud, press the
talk switch.

3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

Turning the hands-free phone automatic connection on/off
■ Turning off the automatic connection
STEP 1

Select “Handsfree Power” using a voice command or

STEP 2

Select “Turn off” using a voice command or

■ Turning on the automatic connection
STEP 1

Select “Handsfree Power” using a voice command or

STEP 2

Select “Turn on” using a voice command or

■ The number of cellular phones that can be registered
Up to 6 cellular phones can be registered in the system.

400
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

Security and system setup
To enter the menu of each setting, follow the steps below:
■ Security setting items and operation procedure
● Setting or changing the PIN (Personal Identification Number)
1. “Setup (Setup)” → 2. “Security” → 3. “Set PIN”
● Locking the phone book
1. “Setup (Setup)” → 2. “Security” → 3. “Phonebook Lock
(Phone book lock)”
● Unlocking the phone book
1. “Setup (Setup)” → 2. “Security” → 3. “Phonebook Unlock
(Phone book unlock)”
3

■ System setup items and operation procedure

● Initialization
1. “Setup (Setup)” → 2. “System Setup” → 3. “Reset Settings”
can only be used for system setup operation.

Setting or changing the PIN
■ Setting a PIN
STEP 1

Select “Set PIN” using a voice command or

401
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Interior features

● Setting voice guidance volume
1. “Setup (Setup)” → 2. “System Setup” → 3. “Guidance Volume”

3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

STEP 2

Enter a PIN using a voice command or

When using

, input the code 1 digit at a time.

■ Changing the PIN
STEP 1

Select “Set PIN” using a voice command or

STEP 2

Enter the registered PIN using a voice command or

STEP 3

Enter a new PIN using a voice command or

When using

, input the code 1 digit at a time.

Locking or unlocking the phone book
STEP 1

Select “Phonebook Lock (Phone book lock)” or “Phonebook
Unlock (Phone book unlock)” using a voice command or
.

STEP 2

Input the PIN by either of the following methods and select
“Confirm” using a voice command or

a. Press the talk switch and say the registered PIN.
b. Input a new PIN using
402
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

Setting voice guidance volume

STEP 1

Select “Guidance Volume” using

STEP 2

Change the voice guidance volume.
To decrease the volume: Turn

counterclockwise.

To increase the volume: Turn

clockwise.
3

Initialization

Select “Reset Settings” and then “Confirm” using

STEP 2

Select “Confirm” using

Interior features

STEP 1

403
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

■ Initialization
● The following data in the system can be initialized:
• Phone book
• Outgoing and incoming call history
• Speed dials
• Registered cellular phone data
• Security code
● Once the initialization has been completed, the data cannot be restored
to its original state.
■ When the phone book is locked
The following functions cannot be used:
● Dialing by inputting a name
● Speed dialing
● Dialing a number stored in the call history memory
● Using the phone book

404
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

Using the phone book
To enter the menu of each setting, follow the steps below:
● Adding a new phone number
1. “Phonebook” → 2. “Add Entry”
● Setting speed dial
1. “Phonebook” → 2. “Speed Dial (Set speed dial)”
● Changing a registered name
1. “Phonebook” → 2. “Change Name”
● Deleting registered data
1. “Phonebook” → 2. “Delete Entry”
● Deleting speed dial
1. “Phonebook” → 2. “Delete Speed Dial”

Interior features

● Listing the registered data
1. “Phonebook” → 2. “List Names”

Adding a new phone number
The following methods can be used to add a new phone number:
● Inputting a phone number using a voice command
● Transferring data from the cellular phone
● Inputting a phone number using
● Selecting a phone number from outgoing or incoming call history

405
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

■ Adding procedure
STEP 1

Select “Add Entry” using a voice command or

STEP 2

Use one of the following methods to input a telephone number:

Inputting a telephone number using a voice command
STEP2-1 Select “By Voice (By voice)” using a voice command
or

STEP2-2 Press the talk switch, say the desired number, and
select “Confirm” using a voice command.
Transferring data from the cellular phone
STEP2-1 Select “By Phone” and then “Confirm” using a voice
command or

STEP2-2 Transfer the data from the cellular phone.
Refer to the manual that comes with the cellular phone for
the details of transferring data.

STEP2-3 Select the data to be registered by either of the following methods:
a. Say “Previous” or “Next” until the desired data is
displayed, and select “Confirm” using a voice
command.
b. Select the desired data using

406
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

Inputting a phone number using

STEP2-1 Select “Manual Input” using

STEP2-2 Input a phone number using

, and press

once again.
3

Input the phone number 1 digit at a time.

STEP2-1 Select “Call History” using a voice command or
.
STEP2-2 Select “Outgoing Call History (Outgoing)” or “Incoming Call History (Incoming)” using a voice command
or

STEP2-3 Select the data to be registered by either of the following methods:
a. Say “Previous” or “Go back” until the desired data
is displayed, and select “Confirm” using a voice
command.
b. Select the desired data using

407
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Interior features

Selecting a phone number from outgoing or incoming call history

3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

STEP 3

Select the name to be registered by either of the following
methods, and select “Confirm” using a voice command or
:
a. Press the talk switch and say the desired name.
b. Select “Record Name” using

, and say the desired

name.
STEP 4

Select “Confirm” using a voice command or

In STEP 3 , selecting “Speed Dial (Set speed dial)” instead of “Confirm” registers the newly added phone number as a speed dial.

408
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

Setting speed dials
STEP 1

Select “Speed Dial (Set speed dial)” using a voice command
or

STEP 2

Select the data to be registered as a speed dial by either of
the following methods:
a. Press the talk switch, say desired number, and select “Con.

firm” using a voice command or

b. Press the talk switch, and say “List names”. While the
desired name is being read aloud, press the talk switch,

c. Select the desired data using
STEP 3

Interior features

and select “Confirm” using a voice command or

Select the desired preset button, and register the data into
speed dial by either of the following methods:
a. Press the desired preset button, and select “Confirm” using
a voice command or

b. Press and hold the desired preset button.

409
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

Changing a registered name

STEP 1

Select “Change Name” using a voice command or

STEP 2

Select the name to be changed by either of the following
methods.
a. Press the talk switch, say desired name, and select “Con.

firm” using a voice command or

b. Press the talk switch, and say “List names”. While the
desired name is being read aloud, press the talk switch,
and select “Confirm” using a voice command or

c. Select the desired name using

STEP 3

Select “Record Name” with

STEP 4

Say a new name, and select “Confirm” using a voice command or

410
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

or the talk switch.

3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

Deleting registered data

STEP 1

Select “Delete Entry” using a voice command or

STEP 2

Select the data to be deleted by either of the following methods, and select “Confirm” using a voice command or

a. Press the talk switch, and say the name of the desired
phone number to be deleted.
b. Press the talk switch, say “List phones”. While the name of
the desired phone number is being read aloud, press the
talk switch.

STEP 1

Select “Delete Speed Dial” using a voice command or

STEP 2

Press the preset button in which the desired speed dial is registered, and select “Confirm” using a voice command or

411
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Interior features

Deleting speed dials

3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

Listing the registered data
Selecting “List names” using a voice command causes a list of the
registered data to be read aloud.
When listing is complete, the system returns to “Phonebook”.
Pressing the talk switch while the desired data is being read aloud
selects the data, and the following function will be available.
•
•
•
•

Dialing: “Dial”
Changing a registered name: “Change Name”
Deleting an entry: “Delete Entry”
Setting a speed dial: “Speed Dial (Set speed dial)”

■ Limitation of number of digits
A phone number that exceeds 24 digits cannot be registered.

412
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

3-5. Using the interior lights

Interior lights list

Rear interior light (→P. 414)
Front personal lights/front interior light (→P. 414)
Shift lever light (when the engine switch is in the “ACC” or “ON”
position [without a smart key system] or “ENGINE START
STOP” switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode [with a
smart key system])
Inside door handle lights (if equipped)
Outer foot lights (if equipped)
Engine switch light (vehicles without a smart key system)
Footwell lights (if equipped)
Door courtesy lights (if equipped)
Turning the instrument panel light control dial fully downward
disables the inside door handle lights, footwell lights and shift
lever light. (→P. 187)

413
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Interior features

CTH35AS003

3-5. Using the interior lights
Interior lights and personal lights

Interior lights
Front
Turns the lights off
Turns the door position on

CTH36AS022

Rear
Turns the door position on
Turns the light off
Turns the light on

CTH36AS024

Personal lights
Turns the lights on/off

CTH36AS034

414
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

3-5. Using the interior lights
Personal lights

■ Illuminated entry system
Vehicles without a smart key system
The lights automatically turn on/off according to the engine switch position,
whether the doors are locked/unlocked, and whether the doors are open/
closed.
Vehicles with a smart key system
The lights automatically turn on/off according to “ENGINE START STOP”
switch mode, the presence of the electronic key, whether the doors are
locked/unlocked, and whether the doors are open/closed.
■ To prevent battery discharge
If the following lights remain on when the door is not fully closed, the lights
will go off automatically after 20 minutes:

● Engine switch light
position)

● Rear interior light (when the switch is in the

position)

Interior features

● Front interior light (when the switch is in the

● Footwell lights
● Inside door handle lights
■ Customization that can be configured at Toyota dealer
Settings (e.g. the time elapsed before lights turn off) can be changed.
(Customizable features →P. 638)

415
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

3-6. Using the storage features

List of storage features

CTH36AS036

Auxiliary box
Glove box
Bottle holders
Tissue pocket
Cup holders
Pen holder
Console box
Coin holder

416
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

3-6. Using the storage features
Glove box

Glove box
The glove box can be opened by pressing the lock release button
and can be locked and unlocked by using the master key (vehicles
without a smart key system) or the mechanical key (vehicles with a
smart key system).
Open
Unlock
Lock

3
CTH36AS033

■ Caution while driving
Keep the glove box closed. In the event of sudden braking, an accident may
occur due to an occupant being struck by the open glove box or the items
stored inside.

417
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Interior features

CAUTION

3-6. Using the storage features
Console box

Console box
Lift the lid while pulling up the
knob to release the lock.

CTH36AS011

■ The separator can be used in either of the positions shown in the illustration
Change the separator position.

CTH36AS012

CAUTION
■ Caution while driving
Keep the console box closed. In the event of sudden braking, an accident
may occur due to an occupant being struck by the open console box or the
items stored inside.

418
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

3-6. Using the storage features
Coin holder

Coin holder
Lift the lid while pulling up the
knob to release the lock.

Interior features

CTH36AS013

419
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

3-6. Using the storage features
Tissue pocket

Tissue pocket
Lift the lid while pulling up the
knob to release the lock.

CTH36AS014

420
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

3-6. Using the storage features
Pen holder

Pen holder
Lift the lid while pulling up the
knob to release the lock.

Interior features

CTH36AS015

421
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

3-6. Using the storage features
Auxiliary box

Auxiliary box
Push the lid.

CTH36AS016

CAUTION
■ Items that should not be left in the auxiliary box
Do not leave glasses or lighters in the box.
If the interior of the vehicle becomes hot, lighters may explode and glasses
may warp or crack.
■ Caution while driving
Keep the auxiliary box closed. In the event of sudden braking, an accident
may occur due to an occupant being struck by an open auxiliary box or the
items stored inside.
■ Items unsuitable for storing
Do not store items heavier than 0.4 lb. (0.2 kg).
Doing so may cause the auxiliary box to open and the items inside may fall
out, resulting in an accident.

422
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

3-6. Using the storage features
Cup holders

Cup holders
Front seats (standard type transmission)

CTH36AS038

Front seats (multi-mode type transmission)

Interior features

CTH36AS009

Rear seats (without third row seats)
Pull down the rear seat center
armrest.

CTH36AS005

423
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

3-6. Using the storage features
Cup holders

Second row seats (with third row seats)
Pull down the second row seat
center armrest and press down
the button on the armrest.

CTH36AS006

Third row seats (if equipped)

CTH36AS020

424
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

3-6. Using the storage features
Cup holders

■ Adjusting the size of the cup holders
Front seats (standard type transmission)
Remove the adapter.

CTH36AS039

Front seats (multi-mode type transmission)
Remove the adapter.

Interior features

CTH36AS010

Rear seats (without third row seats)
Remove the adapter.

CTH36AS031

425
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

3-6. Using the storage features
Cup holders

CAUTION
■ Items unsuitable for the cup holder
Do not place anything other than cups or beverage cans in the cup holders.
Other items may be thrown out of the holders in the event of an accident or
sudden braking, causing injury. If possible, cover hot drinks to prevent burns.
■ When not in use (second row seat cup holders only)
Keep the cup holders closed. In the event of sudden braking, an accident
may occur due to an occupant being struck by the open cup holders or the
items stored inside.

NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to the rear cup holders (second row seats only)
Stow the cup holders before stowing the armrest.

426
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

3-6. Using the storage features
Bottle holders

Bottle holders
Front seats

CTH36AS018

Rear seats (without third row seats)/Second row seats (with third
row seats)

Interior features

CTH36AS019

■ When using the bottle holder
● When storing a bottle, close the cap.
● The bottle may not be stored depending on its size or shape.

CAUTION
■ Items unsuitable for the bottle holder
Do not place anything other than a bottle in the bottle holders.
Other items may be thrown out of the holders in the event of an accident or
sudden braking and cause injury.

427
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

3-6. Using the storage features
Bottle holders

NOTICE
■ Items that should not be stowed in the bottle holders
Put the cap on before stowing a bottle. Do not place open bottles in the bottle holders, or glasses and paper cups containing liquid. The contents may
spill and glasses may break.

428
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

3-7. Other interior features

Sun visors

To set the visor in the forward position, flip it down.
To set the visor in the side
position, flip down, unhook,
and swing it to the side.

CTH37AS007

To use the side extender,
place the visor in the side
position, then slide it backward.
3

Interior features
429
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

3-7. Other interior features

Vanity mirrors
Slide the cover to open.
The light turns on when the
cover is opened.

CTH37AS008

NOTICE
■ To prevent battery discharge
Do not leave the vanity lights on for extended periods while the engine is off.

430
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

3-7. Other interior features

Clock
Adjusts the hours
Adjusts the minutes

Interior features
431
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

3-7. Other interior features

■ For quicker adjustment of the clock
To advance the minutes and hours quickly, press and hold the “M” or “H” button.
The time can be adjusted back or forth by following the procedure below:
The hour or minute can be moved forward or backward by pressing the
“MODE/
” or “SET/ ” button while
pressing and holding the “H” or “M” button. If the “MODE/ ” or “SET/
” button is also pressed and held in the above
operation, the hour or minute will move
faster.
■ The clock is displayed when
Vehicles without a smart key system
The engine switch is in the “ACC” or “ON” position.
Vehicles with a smart key system
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON
mode.
■ When disconnecting and reconnecting battery terminals
The clock data will be reset.

432
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

3-7. Other interior features

Outside temperature display
The temperature display shows temperatures within the ranges of
-40°F (-40°C) and 122°F (50°C).

Vehicles without Multi-terrain Select

Interior features
433
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

3-7. Other interior features

Vehicles with Multi-terrain Select

■ The outside temperature is displayed when
Vehicles without a smart key system
The engine switch is in the “ON” position.
Vehicles with a smart key system
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.

434
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

3-7. Other interior features

■ ICE indicator
Vehicles without Multi-terrain Select
If the outside temperature lowers to 37 °F
(3 °C) or below when the engine switch is
in the “ON” position (vehicles without a
smart key system) or the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON
mode (vehicles with a smart key system),
the “ICE” indicator will come on to warn
the driver that roads may be icy. Check
the road surface and drive carefully. (The
indicator will go off when the outside temperature rises to 41 °F [5 °C].)
3

Vehicles with Multi-terrain Select

■ Display
In the following situations, the correct outside temperature may not be displayed, or the display may take longer than normal to change:
● When the vehicle is stopped, or moving at low speeds (less than 14 mph
[24 km/h])
● When the outside temperature has changed suddenly (at the entrance/
exit of a garage, tunnel, etc.)

435
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Interior features

If the outside temperature lowers to 37 °F
(3 °C) or below when the engine switch is
in the “ON” position, the “ICE” indicator
will come on to warn the driver that roads
may be icy. Check the road surface and
drive carefully. (The indicator will go off
when the outside temperature rises to
41 °F [5 °C].)

3-7. Other interior features

Power outlets (12V DC)
The power outlet can be used for 12 V accessories that run on less
than 10 A.

Center panel

CTH37AS006

436
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

3-7. Other interior features

Glove box

Interior features

CTH37AS019

Luggage compartment (vehicles without the 120V AC)

CTH37AS020

437
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

3-7. Other interior features

Luggage compartment (vehicles with the 120V AC)

CTH37AS021

■ The power outlet can be used when
Vehicles without a smart key system
The engine switch is in the “ACC” or “ON” position.
Vehicles with a smart key system
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON
mode.

NOTICE
■ To avoid damaging the power outlet
Close the power outlet lid when the power outlet is not in use.
Foreign objects or liquids that enter the power outlet may cause a short circuit.
■ To prevent blown fuse
Do not use an accessory that uses more than 12 V 10 A.
■ To prevent battery discharge
Do not use the power outlet longer than necessary when the engine is not
running.

438
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

3-7. Other interior features

Power outlets (120V AC)∗
The power outlet can be used for electrical appliances.

Main switch
To use the power outlet, turn
on the main switch.
The power supply starts a few
seconds after the main switch
is pressed.

CTH37AS055

Power outlet socket (in the console box)

Interior features

CTH37AS023

∗: If equipped
439
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

3-7. Other interior features

Power outlet socket (luggage compartment)

CTH37AS024

Maximum available capacity of the power outlet
■ While the vehicle is being driven
The maximum capacity of the power outlet is always 120V AC/
100W.
■ When the vehicle is stationary
The maximum capacity of the power outlet varies depending on
the position of the shift lever.
● The maximum capacity is 120V AC/100W when the shift lever is
in any position other than P or N.
● The maximum capacity is 120V AC/400W when the shift lever is
in P or N.
The maximum capacity of 400W can only be restored by turning
the power outlet main switch off and then on again with the shift
lever in P or N.

440
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

3-7. Other interior features

■ The power outlet can be used when
The engine is running.
■ The indicator light changes according to the maximum available
capacity as follows:

120V AC/400W
120V AC/100W

CTH37AS025

■ When the power outlet is in operation

■ If the engine is started with the power outlet main switch on
The maximum capacity of the power supply may decrease to below the standard, or may be cut off completely, even when the vehicle is stationary.
■ The protection circuit may be activated to cut the power supply if any
of the following conditions apply:
● The engine is started with the power outlet main switch on.
● Use of electrical appliances exceeding the maximum capacity is
attempted.
A sound may be heard when the protection circuit is activated. This is normal and does not indicate a malfunction.
● Electrical appliances, which consume power exceeding 100W, have
been used continuously for a long time period.
● The total power usage by all electrical features (headlights, air conditioning, etc.) has exceeded the total vehicle maximum for an extended
period of time.

441
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Interior features

The sound of the cooling fan may be heard from the right side of the luggage
compartment. This is normal and does not indicate a malfunction.

3-7. Other interior features

■ If the protection circuit is activated and the power supply is cut, conduct the following procedure:
STEP 1 Park the vehicle in a safe place, and then securely apply the park-

ing brake.
STEP 2 Check and ensure that the shift lever is in P or N.
STEP 3 Make sure that the power consumption of the electric appliance is

within the maximum capacity of the power outlet and the appliance
is not broken.
STEP 4 Press the power outlet main switch again.

When the cabin temperature is high, open the windows to cool the temperature down. Once it reaches the normal temperature, turn the power outlet
main switch on again.
If the power supply does not resume even after the above procedure has
been performed, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

442
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

3-7. Other interior features

CAUTION
■ Using a power outlet
Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of injury.
● Use of the power outlet when it is wet with water or snow may result in
electrical shocks and is extremely dangerous. The power outlet must be
thoroughly dried before use.
● Do not allow children to use or play with the power outlet.
● Be careful not to get any part of your body caught in the power outlet lid.
● When using electrical appliances, strictly follow any cautions and notices
written on their labels and in the manufacturers' instruction manuals.

■ To prevent injuries and accidents, secure all electric appliances before
use and do not use any appliances that may do any of the following:
● Distract the driver while driving, or hamper safe driving.
● Result in a fire or burn injuries due to the appliance rolling, falling or overheating while driving.
● Emit steam while the windows of the cabin are closed.
■ To prevent unexpected accidents, such as electric shocks, do not perform any of the following actions:
● Using the power outlet for electric heaters while sleeping.
● Contaminating the power outlet with liquid substances or mud.
● Handling electrical appliance plugs at the power outlet with wet hands or
feet.
● Inserting foreign objects into the power outlet.
● Using malfunctioning electric appliances.
● Inserting inappropriate or badly fitting plugs into the power outlet.

443
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Interior features

● Do not modify, disassemble or repair the power outlet or its inverter in any
way. Doing so may result in unexpected malfunctions or accidents, which
could cause serious damage or injuries. Contact your Toyota dealer for
any necessary repairs.

3-7. Other interior features

NOTICE
■ To avoid damaging the power outlet and the plug
● Close the power outlet lid when not in use.
● Do not allow foreign objects or liquids to enter the power outlet, as this
may cause a short circuit.
● Do not use plug adaptors to connect too many plugs to the power outlet.
● After removing a plug, gently close the power outlet lid.
■ To prevent the fuse from being blown
Do not use a 120V AC appliance that requires more than the maximum
capacity of the power outlet. If a 120V AC appliance that consumes more
than the maximum capacity is used, the protection circuit will cut the power
supply.
■ Appliances that may not operate properly (120V AC)
The following 120V AC appliances may not operate even if their power consumption is under maximum capacity.
● Appliances with high initial peak wattage
● Measuring devices that process precise data.
● Other appliances that require an extremely stable power supply
■ To prevent battery discharge
Turn off all the vehicle's electronic equipment and accessories, such as the
headlights and air conditioning, when electrical appliances that consume in
excess of 100W are used continuously for long periods of time.
■ To prevent any damage caused by heat
● Do not use any electrical appliances that give off intense heat, such as
toasters, in any locations including the internal or external trim, seats and
deck.
● Do not use any electrical appliances that are easily affected by vibration or
heat inside the vehicle. Vibration while driving, or the heat of the sun while
parking, may result in damage to those electrical appliances.

444
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

3-7. Other interior features

NOTICE
■ If any electrical appliances are to be used while driving
Securely fasten both the appliances and their cables to prevent them from
falling or getting caught in any of the power train components.
■ If the power outlet is loose when an electrical appliance plug is connected
Replace the outlet. Contact your Toyota dealer for any necessary replacements.
■ If the power outlet gets dirty
Turn the main switch off and use a soft, clean cloth to wipe it gently. Do not
use any cleansing materials, such as organic solvents, wax, or compound
cleaners, as these may damage the power outlet or cause it to malfunction.

Interior features
445
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

3-7. Other interior features

Seat heaters∗

Front passenger’s
seat

The indicator light comes on.

Adjusts the seat temperature

Driver’s seat

The further you move the dial
forward, the warmer the seat
becomes.

CTH37AS005

■ The seat heaters can be used when
Vehicles without a smart key system
The engine switch is in the “ON” position.
Vehicles with a smart key system
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
■ When not in use
Move the dial fully backward. The indicator light turns off.

∗: If equipped
446
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

3-7. Other interior features

CAUTION
■ Burns
● Use caution when seating the following persons in a seat with the seat
heater on to avoid the possibility of burns:
• Babies, small children, the elderly, the sick and the physically challenged
• Persons with sensitive skin
• Persons who are fatigued
• Persons who have taken alcohol or drugs that induce sleep (sleeping
drugs, cold remedies, etc.)
● Do not cover the seat with anything when using the seat heater.
Using the seat heater with a blanket or cushion increases the temperature
of the seat and may lead to overheating.

NOTICE
■ To prevent seat heater damage
Do not put heavy objects that have an uneven surface on the seat and do
not stick sharp objects (needles, nails, etc.) into the seat.
■ To prevent battery discharge
Turn the seat heaters off when the engine is not running.

447
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Interior features

● Do not use the seat heater more than necessary. Doing so may cause
minor burns or overheating.

3-7. Other interior features

Armrest
Fold down the armrest for use.

CTH37AS056

NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to the armrest
Do not apply too much load on the armrest.

448
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

3-7. Other interior features

Floor mat
Securely place a mat that matches the size of the space onto the carpet.

Secure the driver’s floor mat
using the hooks provided.

CTH37AS074

CAUTION

Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in the floor mat slipping and interfering with the
movement of the pedals during driving, resulting in an accident.
● Make sure the floor mat is properly placed on the vehicle carpet and the
correct side faces upward.
● Do not place floor mats on top of existing mats.

449
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Interior features

■ When inserting the floor mat

3-7. Other interior features

Compass
The compass on the accessory meter display indicates the direction
in which the vehicle is heading.

“MODE/
“SET/

” button
” button

Direction display

■ Displays and directions
Display

Direction

“N”

North

“NE”

Northeast

“E”

East

“SE”

Southeast

“S”

South

“SW”

Southwest

“W”

West

“NW”

Northwest

450
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

3-7. Other interior features

Calibrating the compass

3
Samoa: 5

Guam: 8 Saipan: 8

CTH37AS072

If you cross over one of the map boundaries shown in illustration, the
compass will deviate.
To obtain higher precision or perfect calibration, refer to “Deviation calibration”.

451
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Interior features

The direction display deviates from the true direction determined by
the earth’s magnetic field. The amount of deviation varies depending
on the geographic position of the vehicle.

3-7. Other interior features

Deviation calibration
STEP 1

Stop the vehicle.

STEP 2

Change the accessory meter display to deviation calibration
mode by doing the following.

Vehicles without Multi-terrain Select
When the parking lights are
turned on:
Press and hold the “MODE/ ”
button.
A number (1 to 15) will appear
on the display.
When the parking lights are off:
In accessory meter light control
mode (→P. 196), press and hold
the “MODE/ ” button.
A number (1 to 15) will appear
on the display.
Vehicles with Multi-terrain Select
When the parking lights are
turned on:
Press and hold the “MODE/ ”
button.
A number (1 to 15) will appear
on the display.
When the parking lights are off:
In accessory meter light control
mode (→P. 196), press and hold
the “MODE/ ” button.
A number (1 to 15) will appear
on the display.

452
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

3-7. Other interior features

STEP 3

Referring to the map above, press the “MODE/ ” or “SET/
” button to select the number of the zone you are in.

STEP 4

Press and hold the “SET/ ” button to confirm the number
and to exit deviation calibration mode. (If no buttons are
pressed for more than 6 seconds, the number will automatically be confirmed and the display returned to normal.)

Circling calibration
If “•” appears on the left side of
the direction display, circling calibration needs to be performed.
3

Stop the vehicle in a place where it is safe to drive in a circle.
In deviation calibration mode
(→P. 452), press and hold the
“MODE/ ” button to change to
circling calibration mode.

STEP 2

“•” on the left side of the direction
display will blink.

Drive the vehicle at 5 mph (8 km/
h) or less in a circle until a direction is displayed.

STEP 3

If there is not enough space to
drive in a circle, drive around the
block until a direction is displayed.

453
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Interior features

STEP 1

3-7. Other interior features

STEP 4

Press and hold the “SET/ ” button to confirm the direction
and to exit circling calibration mode. (If no buttons are
pressed for several minutes, the direction will automatically be
confirmed and the display returned to normal.)

STEP 5

Make sure that “•” on the left side of the direction display has
gone off. If “•” is illuminated, perform the above procedure
again.

■ Conditions unfavorable to correct operation
The compass may not show the correct direction in the following conditions:
● The vehicle is stopped immediately after turning.
● The vehicle is on an inclined surface.
● The vehicle is in a place where the earth's magnetic field is subject to
interference by artificial magnetic fields (underground car park/parking
lot, under a steel tower, between buildings, roof car park/parking lot, near
an intersection, near a large vehicle, etc.).
● The vehicle has become magnetized.
(There is a magnet or metal object near the accessory meter display.)
● The battery has been disconnected.
● A door is open.
■ Circling calibration error message (vehicles with Multi-terrain Select)
In the following situations, an error message regarding the circling calibration will
appear on the accessory meter display
for a few seconds:
● The vehicle was driven too fast during
the circling calibration.
● The circling calibration was not completed successfully within about two
minutes.

454
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

3-7. Other interior features

CAUTION
■ While driving the vehicle
Do not adjust the display. Adjust the display only when the vehicle is
stopped.
■ When doing the circling calibration
Secure a wide space, and watch out for people and vehicles in the vicinity.
Do not violate any local traffic rules while performing circling calibration.

NOTICE
■ To avoid compass malfunctions

■ To ensure normal operation of the compass
● Do not perform a circling calibration of the compass in a place where the
earth's magnetic field is subject to interference by artificial magnetic fields.
● During calibration, do not operate electric systems (moon roof, power windows, etc.) as they may interfere with the calibration.

455
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Interior features

Do not place magnets or any metal objects near the accessory meter display.
Doing this may cause the compass sensor to malfunction.

3-7. Other interior features

Luggage compartment features
■ Cargo hooks
Vehicles with third seats
STEP 1

Fold down the third seats. (→P. 72)
Raise the hook to use.

STEP 2

The cargo hooks are provided
for securing loose items.

CTH37AS041

Vehicles without third seats
Raise the hook to use.
The cargo hooks are provided
for securing loose items.

CTH37AS045

456
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

3-7. Other interior features

■ Cargo net hooks
The cargo net itself is not included as original equipment.
Vehicles with third seats (pattern 1)
Raise the rear cargo hook to
use.

CTH37AS075

Vehicles with third seats (pattern 2)
Fold down the third seats. (→P. 72)

Interior features

STEP 1

Raise the cargo hook to use.

STEP 2

CTH37AS076

Vehicles without third seats (pattern 1)
Raise the rear cargo hook to
use.

CTH37AS071

457
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

3-7. Other interior features

Vehicles without third seats (pattern 2)
Raise the cargo hook to use.

CTH37AS046

■ Storage compartment
Type A (if equipped)
Open the storage compartment as shown.

CTH37AS014

Type B (if equipped)
Open the storage compartment as shown.

CTH37AS047

458
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

3-7. Other interior features

■ Slide deck (if equipped)
Slide the deck while turning
the lock release lever, and
then release the lever after
sliding the deck to the lock
position.
Half-slide locked position
Full-slide locked position

Interior features

CTH37AS048

■ Grocery bag hooks
Type A

CTH37AS049

459
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

3-7. Other interior features

Type B (if equipped)
To use the grocery bag hooks,
slide the slide deck to the fullslide locked position.
(→P. 459)

CTH37AS050

CAUTION
■ When the cargo hooks are not in use
To avoid injury, always return the cargo hooks to their stowed positions.
■ Slide deck operating precaution (if equipped)
● Be careful not to get hands or feet pinched by the slide deck.
● Be careful not to allow the slide deck to hit any persons or luggage while
sliding the deck.
● Do not operate the slide deck while someone is on it.
Doing so may cause an accident.
● If operating the slide deck when the vehicle is stopped on an incline, the
slide deck may move faster. Be careful not to allow the slide deck to hit
you or pinch your fingers etc.
● After sliding the deck, make sure it is securely locked in position.
● Do not close the back door while any person is sitting on the slide deck or
any person is between the slide deck and back door.
● Do not stow any objects into the space between the slide deck rails.

460
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

3-7. Other interior features

NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to the cargo net hooks
Avoid hanging things other than a cargo net on them.
■ Slide deck weight capacity (if equipped)
Do not load anything heavier than 440 lb. (200 kg) on the sliding deck.
■ Grocery bag hook weight capacity
Do not hang any object heavier than 8.8 lb. (4 kg) on the grocery bag hooks.
■ When using the slide deck (if equipped)
● Do not close the back door while the slide deck is sliding out. Doing so
may cause the back door or slide deck to break.

461
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Interior features

● If operating the slide deck when the vehicle is stopped on an incline, the
slide deck may move faster. Be careful as luggage may become damaged
or fly out and damage the cabin.

3-7. Other interior features

Garage door opener
The garage door opener can be programmed to operate garage
doors, gates, entry doors, door locks, home lighting systems, security systems, and other devices.
The garage door opener (HomeLink® Universal Transceiver) is manufactured under license from HomeLink®.

Programming HomeLink® (for U.S. owners)
The HomeLink® compatible transceiver in your vehicle has 3 buttons
which can be programmed to operate 3 different devices. Refer to the
programming method below appropriate for the device.
Indicator light
Buttons

CTH37AS044

462
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

3-7. Other interior features

■ Programming HomeLink®
Point the remote control transmitter for the device 1 to 3 in. (25
to 75 mm) from the HomeLink®
buttons.

STEP 1

Keep the HomeLink® indicator
light in view while programming.

463
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Interior features

Press and hold one of the
HomeLink® buttons and the
transmitter button. When the
HomeLink®
indicator
light
changes from a slow to a rapid
flash after 20 seconds, release
both buttons.

STEP 2

3-7. Other interior features

Test the HomeLink® operation
by pressing the newly programmed button.

STEP 3

If a HomeLink® button has been
programmed for a garage door,
check to see if the garage door
opens and closes. If the garage
door does not operate, see if your
garage transmitter is of the rolling
code type. Press and hold the
programmed HomeLink® button.
The remote control transmitter is
of the rolling code type if the
HomeLink® indicator light flashes
rapidly for 2 seconds and then
remains lit. If your transmitter is
the rolling code type, proceed to
the heading “Programming a rolling code system”.
STEP 4

Repeat the steps above to program another device for any of
the remaining HomeLink® buttons.

464
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

3-7. Other interior features

■ Programming a rolling code system (for U.S. owners)
If your device is rolling code equipped, follow the steps under the
heading “Programming HomeLink®” before proceeding with the
steps listed below.
STEP 1

Locate the learn button on the ceiling mounted garage door
opener motor. The exact location and color of the button may
vary by brand of garage door opener.
Refer to the operation manual supplied with the garage door opener
for the location of the learn button.

STEP 2

Press the learn button.
Following this step, you have 30 seconds in which to initiate step 3
below.

STEP 3

but-

If the garage door opens, the programming process is complete. If
the door does not open, press and release the button a third time.
This third press and release will complete the programming process
by opening the garage door.
The ceiling mounted garage door opener motor should now recognize the HomeLink® signal and operate the garage door.
STEP 4

Repeat the steps above to program another rolling code system for any of the remaining HomeLink® buttons.

465
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Interior features

Press and release the vehicle’s programmed
ton twice. The garage door may open.

HomeLink®

3-7. Other interior features

■ Programming an entry gate (for U.S. owners)/Programming a
device in the Canadian market
STEP 1

Place the remote control transmitter 1 to 3 in. (25 to 75 mm)
away from the HomeLink® buttons.
Keep the HomeLink® indicator light in view while programming.

STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
STEP 5

STEP 6

Press and hold the selected HomeLink® button.
Repeatedly press and release (cycle) the remote control
transmitter for 2 seconds each until step 4 is completed.
When the HomeLink® indicator light starts to flash rapidly,
release the buttons.
Test the HomeLink® operation by pressing the newly programmed button. Check to see if the gate/device operates
correctly.
Repeat the steps above to program another device for any of
the remaining HomeLink® buttons.

■ Programming other devices
To program other devices such as home security systems, home
door locks and lighting, contact your Toyota dealer for assistance.
■ Reprogramming a button

The individual HomeLink® buttons cannot be erased but can be
reprogrammed. To reprogram a button, follow the “Reprogramming
a HomeLink® button” instructions.

466
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

3-7. Other interior features

Operating HomeLink®
Press the appropriate HomeLink® button. The HomeLink® indicator
light should come on.
The HomeLink® compatible transceiver in your vehicle continues to send
a signal for up to 20 seconds as long as the button is pressed.

Erasing the entire HomeLink® memory (all three programs)
Press and hold the 2 outside buttons for 20 seconds until the indicator light flashes.

■ Before programming
● Install a new battery in the remote control transmitter.
● The battery side of the remote control transmitter must be pointed away
from the HomeLink® button.

467
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Interior features

If you sell your vehicle, be sure to
erase the programs stored in the
HomeLink® memory.

3-7. Other interior features

■ Certification for the garage door opener
For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.
FCC ID: CB2300NHL3
NOTE:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation.
FCC WARNING:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible
for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
For vehicles sold in Canada
NOTE:
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not
cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
■ When support is necessary
Visit on the web at www.homelink.com or call 1-800-355-3515.

CAUTION
■ When programming a garage door or other remote control devices
The garage door or other devices may operate, so ensure people and
objects are out of danger to prevent potential harm.
■ Conforming to federal safety standards
Do not use the HomeLink® compatible transceiver with any garage door
opener or device that lacks safety stop and reverse features as required by
federal safety standards.
This includes any garage door that cannot detect an interfering object. A
door or device without these features increases the risk of death or serious
injury.

468
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

3-7. Other interior features

Safety Connect∗

Safety Connect is a subscription-based telematics service that uses
Global Positioning System (GPS) data and embedded cellular technology to provide safety and security features to subscribers. Safety
Connect is supported by Toyota’s designated response center,
which operates 24 hours per day, 7 days per week.
Safety Connect service is available by subscription on select,
telematics hardware-equipped vehicles.
By using the Safety Connect service, you are agreeing to be bound
by the Telematics Subscription Service Agreement and its Terms and
Conditions, as in effect and amended from time to time, a current
copy of which is available at Toyota.com. All use of the Safety Connect service is subject to such then-applicable Terms and Conditions.

Interior features

■ System components
Microphone
“SOS” button
LED light indicators

CTH37AS054

∗: If equipped
469
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

3-7. Other interior features

■ Services
Subscribers have the following Safety Connect services available:
● Automatic Collision Notification*
Helps drivers receive necessary response from emergency
service providers. (→P. 472)

*: U.S. Patent No. 7,508,298 B2
● Stolen Vehicle Location
Helps drivers in the event of vehicle theft. (→P. 473)
● Emergency Assistance Button (SOS)
Connects drivers to response-center support. (→P. 473)
● Enhanced Roadside Assistance
Provides drivers various on-road assistance. (→P. 473)
■ Subscription
After you have signed the Telematics Subscription Service
Agreement and are enrolled, you can begin receiving services.
A variety of subscription terms is available for purchase. Contact
your Toyota dealer, call 1-800-331-4331, or push the “SOS” button in your vehicle for further subscription details.

470
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

3-7. Other interior features

■ Safety Connect Services Information
● Phone calls using the vehicles Bluetooth® technology will not be possible
during Safety Connect.
● Safety Connect is available beginning Fall 2009 on select Toyota models.
Contact with the Safety Connect response center is dependent upon the
telematics device being in operative condition, cellular connection availability, and GPS satellite signal reception, which can limit the ability to
reach the response center or receive emergency service support. Enrollment and Telematics Subscription Service Agreement required. A variety
of subscription terms is available; charges vary by subscription term
selected.

● Safety Connect services are not subject to section 255 of the Telecommunications Act and the device is not TTY compatible.
■ Languages
The Safety Connect response center will offer support in multiple languages.
The Safety Connect system will offer voice prompts in English and Spanish.
Please indicate your language of choice when enrolling.
■ When contacting the response center
You may be unable to contact the response center if the network is busy.

471
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Interior features

● Safety Connect services will function in the United States, including
Hawaii and Alaska, and in Canada. The services will not function outside
of the United States in countries other than Canada. For details about the
service, contact your Toyota dealer.

3-7. Other interior features

Safety Connect LED light Indicators
When the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is turned to IGNITION ON
mode (vehicles with a smart key system) or the engine switch is
turned to the “ON” position (vehicles without a smart key system), the
red indicator light comes on for 2 seconds then turns off. Afterward,
the green indicator light comes on, indicating that the service is
active.
The following indicator light patterns indicate specific system usage
conditions:
● Green indicator light on = Active service
● Green indicator light flashing = Safety Connect call in process
● Red indicator light (except at vehicle start-up) = System malfunction (contact your Toyota dealer)
● No indicator light (off) = Safety Connect service not active
Safety Connect services
■ Automatic Collision Notification
In case of either airbag deployment or severe rear-end collision,
the system is designed to automatically call the response center.
The responding agent receives the vehicle’s location and attempts
to speak with the vehicle occupants to assess the level of emergency. If the occupants are unable to communicate, the agent
automatically treats the call as an emergency, contacts the nearest
emergency services provider to describe the situation, and
requests that assistance be sent to the location.

472
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

3-7. Other interior features

■ Stolen Vehicle Location
If your vehicle is stolen, Safety Connect can work with local authorities to assist them in locating and recovering the vehicle. After filing a police report, call the Safety Connect response center at 1800-331-4331 and follow the prompts for Safety Connect to initiate
this service.
In addition to assisting law enforcement with recovery of a stolen
vehicle, Safety-Connect-equipped vehicle location data may, under
certain circumstances, be shared with third parties to locate your
vehicle. Further information is available at Toyota.com.
■ Emergency Assistance Button (“SOS”)

If you accidentally press the “SOS” button, tell the response-center agent
that you are not experiencing an emergency.

■ Enhanced Roadside Assistance
Enhanced Roadside Assistance adds GPS data to the already
included warranty-based Toyota roadside service.
Subscribers can press the “SOS” button to reach a Safety Connect
response-center agent, who can help with a wide range of needs,
such as: towing, flat tire, fuel delivery, etc. For a description of the
Enhanced Roadside Assistance services and their limitations,
please see the Safety Connect Terms and Conditions, which are
available at Toyota.com.

473
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Interior features

In the event of an emergency on the road, push the “SOS” button
to reach the Safety Connect response center. The answering
agent will determine your vehicle’s location, assess the emergency, and dispatch the necessary assistance required.

3-7. Other interior features

Safety information for Safety Connect
Important! Read this information before using Safety Connect.
■ Exposure to radio frequency signals
The Safety Connect system installed in your vehicle is a low-power
radio transmitter and receiver. It receives and also sends out radio
frequency (RF) signals.
In August 1996, the Federal Communications Commission (FCC)
adopted RF exposure guidelines with safety levels for mobile wireless phones. Those guidelines are consistent with the safety standards previously set by the following U.S. and international
standards bodies.
● ANSI (American National Standards Institute) C95.1 [1992]
● NCRP (National Council on Radiation Protection and Measurement) Report 86 [1986]
● ICNIRP (International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation
Protection) [1996]
Those standards were based on comprehensive and periodic evaluations of the relevant scientific literature. Over 120 scientists,
engineers, and physicians from universities, and government
health agencies and industries reviewed the available body of
research to develop the ANSI Standard (C95.1).
The design of Safety Connect complies with the FCC guidelines in
addition to those standards.

474
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

3-7. Other interior features

■ License
Licensed by QUALCOMM Incorporated under one or more of the following
United States Patents and/or their counterparts in other nations:
4,901,307
5,506,865
5,267,261
5,600,754
5,710,784

5,490,165
5,109,390
5,544,196
5,414,796
5,778,338

5,056,109
5,511,073
5,267,262
5,657,420

5,504,773
5,228,054
5,568,483
5,416,797

5,101,501
5,535,239
5,337,338
5,659,569

■ Certification for Safety Connect
FCC ID: O9EGTM1
FCC ID: O6Y-CDMRF101

FCC WARNING:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible
for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

475
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Interior features

NOTE:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation.

3-7. Other interior features

476
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

4-1. Maintenance and care

Cleaning and protecting the vehicle exterior
Perform the following to protect the vehicle and maintain it in prime
condition:

● Working from top to bottom, liberally apply water to the vehicle
body, wheel wells and underside of the vehicle to remove any
dirt and dust.
● Wash the vehicle body using a sponge or soft cloth, such as a
chamois.
● For hard-to-remove marks, use car wash soap and rinse thoroughly with water.
● Wipe away any water.
● Wax the vehicle when the waterproof coating deteriorates.
If water does not bead on a clean surface, apply wax when the vehicle body is cool.

■ Automatic car washes
● Fold the mirrors and remove the detachable pole antenna before washing the vehicle. Start washing from the front of the vehicle. Make sure to
re-install the antenna and extend the mirrors before driving.
● Brushes used in automatic car washes may scratch the vehicle surface
and harm your vehicle’s paint.
● In certain automatic car washes, the roof antenna (if equipped) or rear
spoiler may interfere with machine operation. This may prevent the vehicle from being cleaned properly or result in damage to the antenna or
rear spoiler.
■ High pressure car washes
● Do not allow the nozzles of the car wash to come within close proximity
of the windows.
● Before using the car wash, check that the fuel filler door on your vehicle
is closed properly.

478
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

4-1. Maintenance and care

■ Aluminum wheels (if equipped)
Remove any dirt immediately by using a neutral detergent. Do not use hard
brushes or abrasive cleaners. Do not use strong or harsh chemical cleaners.
Use the same mild detergent and wax as used on the paint.
■ Bumpers and side moldings
Do not scrub with abrasive cleaners.
■ To prevent paint deterioration and body corrosion
● Wash the vehicle immediately in the following cases:
•
•
•
•

After driving near the sea coast
After driving on salted roads
If coal tar or tree sap is present on the paint surface
If dead insects, insect droppings or bird droppings are present on the
paint surface
• After driving in an area contaminated with soot, oily smoke, mine dust,
iron powder or chemical substances
• If the vehicle becomes heavily soiled with dust or mud
• If liquids such as benzene and gasoline are spilled on the paint surface
● If the paint is chipped or scratched, have it repaired immediately.

■ When washing the vehicle
Do not apply water to the inside of the engine compartment. Doing so may
cause the electrical components etc. to catch fire.
■ Precautions regarding the exhaust pipe
Exhaust gasses cause the exhaust pipe to become quite hot.
When washing the vehicle, be careful not to touch the pipe until it has cooled
sufficiently, as touching a hot exhaust pipe can cause burns.

479
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Maintenance and care

CAUTION

4-1. Maintenance and care

NOTICE
■ To protect your vehicle’s painted surfaces
Do not use organic cleaners such as benzene and gasoline.
■ Cleaning the exterior lights
● Wash carefully. Do not use organic substances or scrub with a hard brush.
This may damage the surfaces of the lights.
● Do not apply wax on the surfaces of the lights.
Wax may cause damage to the lenses.
■ Detachable pole antenna installation and removal precautions
● Before driving, ensure that the antenna is installed.
● When the antenna is removed, such as before entering an automatic car
wash, make sure to store it in a suitable place so as not to lose it. Also,
before driving, make sure to reinstall the antenna in its original position.
■ High pressure car washes (vehicles with rear view monitor system)
When washing the vehicle, do not apply intensive bursts of water to the camera or camera area. Doing so many result in the camera malfunctioning.

480
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

4-1. Maintenance and care

Cleaning and protecting the vehicle interior
The following procedures will help protect your vehicle’s interior and
keep it in top condition:

■ Protecting the vehicle interior
Remove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner. Wipe dirty surfaces with a cloth dampened with lukewarm water.
■ Cleaning the leather areas
● Remove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner.
● Wipe off any excess dirt and dust with a soft cloth dampened
with diluted detergent.
Use a diluted water solution of approximately 5% neutral wool detergent.

● Wring out any excess water from the cloth and thoroughly
wipe off all remaining traces of detergent.

■ Cleaning the synthetic leather areas
● Remove loose dirt using a vacuum cleaner.
● Apply a mild soap solution to the synthetic leather using a
sponge or soft cloth.
● Allow the solution to soak in for a few minutes. Remove the
dirt and wipe off the solution with a clean, damp cloth.

481
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Maintenance and care

● Wipe the surface with a dry, soft cloth to remove any remaining moisture. Allow the leather to dry in a shaded and ventilated area.

4-1. Maintenance and care

■ Caring for leather areas
Toyota recommends cleaning the interior of the vehicle at least twice a year
to maintain the quality of the vehicle’s interior.
■ Shampooing the carpets
There are several commercial foaming-type cleaners available. Use a
sponge or brush to apply the foam. Rub in overlapping circles. Do not use
water. Wipe dirty surfaces and let them dry. Excellent results are obtained by
keeping the carpet as dry as possible.
■ Seat belts
Clean with mild soap and lukewarm water using a cloth or sponge. Also
check the belts periodically for excessive wear, fraying or cuts.

CAUTION
■ Water in the vehicle
● Do not splash or spill liquid in the vehicle.
Doing so may cause electrical components etc. to malfunction or catch
fire.
● Do not get any of the SRS components or wiring in the vehicle interior wet.
(→P. 114)
An electrical malfunction may cause the airbags to deploy or not function
properly, resulting in death or serious injury.

482
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

4-1. Maintenance and care

NOTICE
■ Cleaning detergents
Do not use the following types of detergent, as they may discolor the vehicle
interior or cause streaks or damage to painted surfaces:
● Non-seat portions: Organic substances such as benzene or gasoline,
alkaline or acidic solutions, dye, and bleach.
● Seats: Alkaline or acidic solutions, such as thinner, benzene, and alcohol.
■ Preventing damage to leather surfaces
Observe the following precautions to avoid damage to and deterioration of
leather surfaces:
● Remove any dust or dirt from leather surfaces immediately.
● Do not expose the vehicle to direct sunlight for extended periods of time.
Park the vehicle in the shade, especially during summer.
● Do not place items made of vinyl, plastic, or containing wax on the upholstery, as they may stick to the leather surface if the vehicle interior heats
up significantly.

■ Water on the floor

■ Cleaning the inside of the back window
● Do not use glass cleaner to clean the back window, as this may cause
damage to the rear window defogger heater wires. Use a cloth dampened
with lukewarm water to gently wipe the window clean. Wipe the window in
strokes running parallel to the heater wires.
● Be careful not to scratch or damage the heater wires.

483
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Maintenance and care

Do not wash the vehicle floor with water.
Vehicle systems such as the audio system may be damaged if water comes
into contact with electrical components such as the audio system above or
under the floor of the vehicle. Water may also cause the body to rust.

4-2. Maintenance

Maintenance requirements
To ensure safe and economical driving, day-to-day care and regular
maintenance are essential. It is the owner’s responsibility to perform
regular checks. Toyota recommends performing the following maintenance:

■ General maintenance
General maintenance should be performed on a daily basis.
This can be done by yourself or by a Toyota dealer.
■ Scheduled maintenance
Scheduled maintenance should be performed at specified intervals according to the maintenance schedule.
For details about maintenance items and schedules, refer to the
“Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.

■ Do-it-yourself maintenance
You can perform some maintenance procedures by yourself.
Please be aware that do-it-yourself maintenance may affect warranty coverage.
The use of Toyota Repair Manuals is recommended.
For details about warranty coverage, see the separate “Owner’s Warranty Information Booklet” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.

■ Repair and replacement
It is recommended that genuine Toyota parts be used for repairs to ensure
performance of each system. If non-Toyota parts are used in replacement or
if a repair shop other than a Toyota dealer performs repairs, confirm the warranty coverage.

484
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

4-2. Maintenance

■ Reset the maintenance data (U.S.A. only)
After the required maintenance is performed according to the maintenance
schedule, please reset the maintenance data.
To reset the data, follow the procedures described below:
STEP 1 Switch the display to the trip meter A (→P. 184) when the engine is

running.
STEP 2 Vehicles without a smart key system

Turn the engine switch off.
Vehicles with a smart key system
Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch off.
STEP 3 Vehicles without a smart key system

While pressing the trip meter reset button (→P. 184), turn the
engine switch to the “ON” position (do not start the engine because
reset mode will be canceled). Continue to press and hold the button
until the trip meter displays “000000”.
4

Vehicles with a smart key system

■ Allow inspection and repairs to be performed by a Toyota dealer
● Toyota technicians are well-trained specialists and are kept up to date
with the latest service information. They are well informed about the
operations of all systems on your vehicle.
● Keep a copy of the repair order. It proves that the maintenance that has
been performed is under warranty coverage. If any problem should arise
while your vehicle is under warranty, your Toyota dealer will promptly
take care of it.

485
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Maintenance and care

While pressing the trip meter reset button (→P. 184), turn the
“ENGINE START STOP” switch to the IGNITION ON mode (do not
start the engine because otherwise the reset mode will be canceled). Continue to press and hold the button until the trip meter
displays “000000”.

4-2. Maintenance

CAUTION
■ If your vehicle is not properly maintained
Improper maintenance could result in serious damage to the vehicle and
possible serious injury or death.
■ Handling of the battery
● Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and a wide variety of automobile
components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects and other reproductive harm. Work in a
well ventilated area.
● Oils, fuels and fluids contained in vehicles as well as waste produced by
component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. Avoid
exposure and wash any affected area immediately.
● Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead
compounds which are known to cause brain damage. Wash your hands
after handling. (→P. 509)

486
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

4-2. Maintenance

General maintenance
Listed below are the general maintenance items that should be performed at the intervals specified in the “Owner's Warranty Information Booklet” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement/Scheduled
Maintenance Guide”. It is recommended that any problem you notice
should be brought to the attention of your Toyota dealer or qualified
service shop for advice.

Engine compartment
Items

Check points
Check the connections.
(→P. 509)

Brake fluid

Is the brake fluid at the correct
level?
(→P. 505)

Engine coolant

Is the engine coolant at the
correct level?
(→P. 503)

Engine oil

Is the engine oil at the correct
level?
(→P. 498)

Exhaust system

There should not be any fumes or
strange sounds.

Power steering fluid

Is the power steering fluid at the
correct level?
(→P. 507)

Radiator/condenser

The radiator and condenser
should be free from foreign
objects.
(→P. 504)

Washer fluid

Is there sufficient washer fluid?
(→P. 512)

Maintenance and care

Battery

487
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

4-2. Maintenance

Vehicle interior
Items

Check points

Accelerator pedal

• The accelerator pedal should
move smoothly (without uneven
pedal effort or catching).

Automatic transmission “Park”
mechanism

• When parked on a slope and the
shift lever is in P, is the vehicle
securely stopped?

Brake pedal

• Does the brake pedal move
smoothly?
• Does the brake pedal have appropriate clearance from the floor?
• Does the brake pedal have the
correct amount of free play?

Brakes

• The vehicle should not pull to one
side when the brakes are applied.
• The brakes should work effectively.
• The brake pedal should not feel
spongy.
• The brake pedal should not get
too close to the floor when the
brakes are applied.

Head restraints

• Do the head restraints move
smoothly and lock securely?

Indicators/buzzers

• Do the indicators and buzzers
function properly?

Lights

• Do all the lights come on?

488
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

4-2. Maintenance

Items

Check points

Parking brake

• Does the parking brake pedal
move smoothly?
• When parked on a slope and the
parking brake is on, is the vehicle
securely stopped?

Seat belts

• Do the seat belts operate
smoothly?
• The seat belts should not be damaged.

Seats

• Do the seat controls operate
properly?

Steering wheel

• Does the steering wheel rotate
smoothly?
• Does the steering wheel have the
correct amount of free play?
• There should not be any strange
sounds coming from the steering
wheel.

Maintenance and care
489
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

4-2. Maintenance

Vehicle exterior
Items

Check points

Doors

• Do the doors operate smoothly?

Engine hood

• Does the engine hood lock system work properly?

Fluid leaks

• There should not be any signs of
fluid leakage after the vehicle has
been parked.

Tires

• Is the tire inflation pressure correct?
• The tires should not be damaged or excessively worn.
• Have the tires been rotated
according to the maintenance
schedule?
• The wheel nuts should not be
loose.

CAUTION
■ If the engine is running
Turn the engine off and ensure that there is adequate ventilation before performing maintenance checks.

490
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

4-2. Maintenance

Emission inspection and maintenance (I/M) programs
Some states have vehicle emission inspection programs which
include OBD (On Board Diagnostics) checks. The OBD system monitors the operation of the emission control system.

■ If the malfunction indicator lamp comes on
The OBD system determines that a problem exists somewhere in
the emission control system. Your vehicle may not pass the I/M
test and may need to be repaired. Contact your Toyota dealer to
service the vehicle.
■ Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test in the following situations:
● When the battery is disconnected or discharged

● When the fuel tank cap is loose
The malfunction indicator lamp comes on indicating a temporary malfunction and your vehicle may not pass the I/M test.
■ When the malfunction indicator lamp still remains on after
several driving trips
The error code in the OBD system will not be cleared unless the
vehicle is driven 40 or more times.
■ If your vehicle does not pass the I/M test
Contact your Toyota dealer to prepare the vehicle for re-testing.

491
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Maintenance and care

Readiness codes that are set during ordinary driving are
erased.
Also, depending on your driving habits, the readiness codes
may not be completely set.

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Do-it-yourself service precautions
If you perform maintenance by yourself, be sure to follow the correct
procedure as given in these sections.
Items

Battery condition

Brake fluid level

Engine oil level

(→P. 509)

• Warm water
• Baking soda
• Grease
• Conventional wrench
(for terminal clamp bolts)

(→P. 505)

• FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 or SAE
J1703 brake fluid
• Rag or paper towel
• Funnel (used only for adding
brake fluid)

(→P. 503)

• “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant”
or a similar high quality ethylene
glycol based non-silicate, nonamine, non-nitrite and non-borate
coolant with long-life hybrid
organic acid technology
For the U.S.A.:
“Toyota Super Long Life
Coolant” is pre-mixed with 50%
coolant and 50% deionized
water.
For Canada:
“Toyota Super Long Life
Coolant” is pre-mixed with 55%
coolant and 45% deionized
water.
• Funnel (used only for adding
engine coolant)

(→P. 498)

• “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or
equivalent
• Rag or paper towel
• Funnel (used only for adding
engine oil)

Maintenance and care

Engine coolant level

Parts and tools

491
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Items
Fuses

Light bulbs

Parts and tools
(→P. 531)

• Fuse with same amperage rating
as original

(→P. 541)

• Bulb with same number and wattage rating as original
• Phillips-head screwdriver
• Flathead screwdriver
• Wrench

Power steering fluid level
(→P. 507)

• Automatic transmission fluid
DEXRON® II or III
• Rag or paper towel
• Clean funnel

Radiator and condenser

⎯

(→P. 504)

Tire inflation pressure (→P. 520)

• Tire pressure gauge
• Compressed air source

Washer fluid

• Water or washer fluid containing
antifreeze (for winter use)
• Funnel (used only for adding
water or washer fluid)

(→P. 512)

492
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

CAUTION
The engine compartment contains many mechanisms and fluids that may
move suddenly, become hot, or become electrically energized. To avoid death
or serious injury, observe the following precautions:
■ When working on the engine compartment:
● Keep hands, clothing and tools away from the moving fan and engine
drive belt.
● Be careful not to touch the engine, radiator, exhaust manifold, etc. right
after driving as they may be hot. Oil and other fluids may also be hot.
● Do not leave anything that may burn easily, such as paper and rags, in the
engine compartment.
● Do not smoke, cause sparks or expose an open flame to fuel or the battery. Fuel and battery fumes are flammable.
● Be extremely cautious when working on the battery. It contains poisonous
and corrosive sulfuric acid.
4

■ Safety glasses

NOTICE
■ If you remove the air cleaner filter
Driving with the air cleaner filter removed may cause excessive engine wear
due to dirt in the air. Also, a backfire could cause a fire in the engine compartment.

493
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Maintenance and care

Wear safety glasses to prevent flying or falling material, fluid spray, etc. from
getting in your eyes.

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Hood
Release the lock from the inside of the vehicle to open the hood.

Pull the hood release lever.

STEP 1

The hood will pop up slightly.

CTH43AS009

Pull up the auxiliary catch
lever and lift the hood.

STEP 2

CTH43AS087

CAUTION
■ Pre-driving check
Check that the hood is fully closed and locked.
If the hood is not locked properly, it may open while the vehicle is in motion
and cause an accident, which may result in death or serious injury.

494
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Engine compartment
2.7 L 4-cylinder (2TR-FE) engine

4
CTH43AS131

Engine coolant reservoir
(→P. 503)

Brake fluid reservoir
(→P. 505)
Fuse box

(→P. 531)

Engine oil filler cap
(→P. 498)

Battery

(→P. 509)

Condenser

(→P. 504)

Power steering fluid reservoir
(→P. 507)

Radiator

(→P. 504)

Maintenance and care

Washer fluid tank (→P. 512)

Engine oil level dipstick
(→P. 498)

495
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

4.0 L V6 (1GR-FE) engine

CTH43AS117

Washer fluid tank (→P. 512)
Power steering fluid reservoir
(→P. 507)

Brake fluid reservoir
(→P. 505)
Fuse box

(→P. 531)

Engine oil level dipstick
(→P. 498)

Battery

(→P. 509)

Condenser

(→P. 504)

Engine coolant reservoir
(→P. 503)

Radiator

(→P. 504)

Engine oil filler cap
(→P. 498)

496
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Engine compartment cover
■ Removing the engine compartment cover

CTH43AS121

■ Installing the clips

Maintenance and care

CTH43AS018

497
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Engine oil
With the engine at operating temperature and turned off, check the oil
level on the dipstick.
■ Checking the engine oil
STEP 1

Park the vehicle on level ground. After turning off the engine,
wait more than 5 minutes for the oil to drain back into the bottom of the engine.

STEP 2

Holding a rag under the end, pull the dipstick out.

2.7 L 4-cylinder (2TR-FE) engine

CTH43AS128

4.0 L V6 (1GR-FE) engine

CTH43AS012

STEP 3

Wipe the dipstick clean.

STEP 4

Reinsert the dipstick fully.

STEP 5

Holding a rag under the end, pull the dipstick out and check
the oil level.

STEP 6

Wipe the dipstick and reinsert it fully.

498
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

2.7 L 4-cylinder (2TR-FE) engine
Low
Full

4.0 L V6 (1GR-FE) engine
Low
Full

Maintenance and care
499
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

■ Adding engine oil
2.7 L 4-cylinder (2TR-FE) engine
If the oil level is below or near
the low level mark, add engine
oil of the same type as that
already in the engine.

CTH43AS129

4.0 L V6 (1GR-FE) engine
If the oil level is below or near
the low level mark, add engine
oil of the same type as that
already in the engine.

CTH43AS122

Make sure to check the oil type and prepare the items needed before
adding oil.
Engine oil selection
Oil quantity
(Low → Full)
Items

→P. 614
2.7 L 4-cylinder (2TR-FE) engine
1.6 qt. (1.5 L, 1.3 Imp. qt.)
4.0 L V6 (1GR-FE) engine
1.8 qt. (1.7 L, 1.5 Imp. qt.)
Clean funnel

STEP 1

Remove the oil filler cap by turning it counterclockwise.

STEP 2

Add engine oil slowly, checking the dipstick.

STEP 3

Install the oil filler cap by turning it clockwise.

500
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

■ Engine oil consumption
● The amount of engine oil consumed depends on the oil viscosity, the
quality of the oil and the way the vehicle is driven.
● More oil is consumed under driving conditions such as high speeds and
frequent acceleration and deceleration.
● A new engine consumes more oil.
● When judging the amount of oil consumption, keep in mind that the oil
may have become diluted, making it difficult to judge the true level accurately.
● Oil consumption: Max. 1.1 qt./600 miles (0.9 Imp. qt./600 miles, 1.0 L/
1000 km)
● If your vehicle consumes more than 1.1 qt. (1.0 L, 0.9 Imp. qt.) every 600
miles (1000 km), contact your Toyota dealer.

Maintenance and care
501
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

CAUTION
■ Used engine oil
● Used engine oil contains potentially harmful contaminants which may
cause skin disorders such as inflammation and skin cancer, so care
should be taken to avoid prolonged and repeated contact. To remove used
engine oil from your skin, wash thoroughly with soap and water.
● Dispose of used oil and filters only in a safe and acceptable manner. Do
not dispose of used oil and filters in household trash, in sewers or onto the
ground. Call your Toyota dealer, service station or auto parts store for
information concerning recycling or disposal.
● Do not leave used engine oil within the reach of children.

NOTICE
■ To prevent serious engine damage
Check the oil level on a regular basis.
■ When replacing the engine oil
● Be careful not to spill engine oil on the vehicle components.
● Avoid overfilling, or the engine could be damaged.
● Check the oil level on the dipstick every time you refill the vehicle.
● Be sure the engine oil filler cap is properly tightened.

502
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Engine coolant
The coolant level is satisfactory if it is between the “F” and “L” lines on
the reservoir when the engine is cold.
Reservoir cap
“F” line
“L” line
If the level is on or below the “L”
line, add coolant up to the “F” line.
(→P. 603)
CTH43AS108

■ Coolant selection
Only use “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” or a similar high quality ethylene
glycol based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrite, and non-borate coolant
with long-life hybrid organic acid technology.
“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is a mixture of 50% coolant
and 50% deionized water. (Minimum temperature: -31°F [-35°C])

Canada: “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is a mixture of 55% coolant
and 45% deionized water. (Minimum temperature: -44°F [-42°C])
For more details about engine coolant, contact your Toyota dealer.
■ If the coolant level drops within a short time of replenishing
Visually check the radiator, hoses, engine coolant reservoir caps, drain cock
and water pump.
If you cannot find a leak, have your Toyota dealer test the cap and check for
leaks in the cooling system.

503
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Maintenance and care

U.S.A.:

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

CAUTION
■ When the engine is hot
Do not remove the engine coolant reservoir cap.
The cooling system may be under pressure and may spray hot coolant if the
cap is removed, causing burns or other injuries.

NOTICE
■ When adding coolant
Coolant is neither plain water nor straight antifreeze. The correct mixture of
water and antifreeze must be used to provide proper lubrication, corrosion
protection and cooling. Be sure to read the antifreeze or coolant label.
■ If you spill coolant
Be sure to wash it off with water to prevent it from damaging parts or paint.

Radiator and condenser
Check the radiator and condenser and clear away any foreign
objects.
If either of the above parts is extremely dirty or you are not sure of
their condition, have your vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.
CAUTION
■ When the engine is hot
Do not touch the radiator or condenser as they may be hot and cause burns.

504
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Brake fluid
■ Checking fluid level
The brake fluid level should be
between the “MAX” and “MIN”
lines on the tank.
MAX
MIN

CTH43AS120

■ Adding fluid
Make sure to check the fluid type and prepare the necessary item.
Fluid type
Item

FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 or SAE J1703 brake fluid
Clean funnel

STEP 1

Vehicles without a smart key system
Turn the engine switch off.
Vehicles with a smart key system
Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch off.

STEP 2

Depress the brake pedal more than 40 times.

STEP 3

Remove the reservoir cap by hand. Add brake fluid up to the
“MAX” line.

If you do not follow the procedure above, the reservoir may overflow.

505
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Maintenance and care

■ Refilling brake fluid

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

■ Brake fluid can absorb moisture from the air
Excess moisture in the brake fluid can cause a dangerous loss of braking
efficiency. Use only newly opened brake fluid.

CAUTION
■ When filling the reservoir
Take care as brake fluid can harm your hands and eyes and damage painted
surfaces.
If fluid gets on your hands or in your eyes, flush the affected area with clean
water immediately.
If you still experience discomfort, see a doctor.

NOTICE
■ If the fluid level is low or high
It is normal for the brake fluid level to go down slightly as the brake pads
wear out or when the fluid level in the accumulator is high.
If the reservoir needs frequent refilling, there may be a serious problem.

506
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Power steering fluid
■ Fluid level
The fluid level should be within the appropriate range.
2.7 L 4-cylinder (2TR-FE) engine
Full (when cold)
Add fluid (when cold)
Full (when hot)
Add fluid (when hot)

CTH43AS130

4.0 L V6 (1GR-FE) engine
Full (when cold)

Add fluid (when cold)
Full (when hot)

CTH43AS016

Hot: Vehicle has been driven around 50 mph (80 km/h) for 20
minutes, or slightly longer in frigid temperatures. (Fluid temperature, 140°F - 175°F [60°C - 80°C]).
Cold: Engine has not been run for about 5 hours. (Room temperature, 50°F - 85°F [10°C - 30°C]).

507
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Maintenance and care

Add fluid (when hot)

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

■ Checking the fluid level
Make sure to check the fluid type and prepare the necessary items.
Fluid type
Items

Automatic transmission fluid DEXRON® II or III
Rag or paper, clean funnel (only for adding fluid)

STEP 1

Clean all dirt off the reservoir.

STEP 2

Remove the cap by turning it counterclockwise.

STEP 3

Wipe the dipstick clean.

STEP 4

Reinstall the cap and remove it again.

STEP 5

Check the fluid level.

CAUTION
■ When checking the reservoir
Take care as the reservoir may be hot.

NOTICE
■ When adding fluid
Avoid overfilling, or the power steering may be damaged.
■ After replacing the reservoir cap
Check the steering box case, vane pump and hose connections for leaks or
damage.

508
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Battery
Check the battery as follows:
Make sure that the battery terminals are not corroded and that there
are no loose connections, cracks, or loose clamps.
Terminals
Hold-down clamp

CTH43AS118

■ Before recharging

When recharging, the battery produces hydrogen gas which is flammable
and explosive. Therefore, observe the following before recharging:

● Make sure the power switch on the charger is off when connecting and
disconnecting the charger cables to the battery.

509
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Maintenance and care

● If recharging with the battery installed on the vehicle, be sure to disconnect the ground cable.

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

■ After recharging/reconnecting the battery (vehicles with smart key system)
● Unlocking the doors using the smart key system may not be possible
immediately after disconnecting the battery. If this happens, use the wireless remote control or the mechanical key to lock/unlock the doors.
● Start the engine with the “ENGINE START STOP” switch in ACCESSORY mode. The engine may not start with the “ENGINE START STOP”
switch turned OFF. However, the engine will operate normally from the
second attempt.
● The “ENGINE START STOP” switch mode is recorded by the vehicle. If
the battery is reconnected, the vehicle will return the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch mode to the status it was in before the battery was disconnected. Make sure to turn off the engine before disconnect the battery.
Take extra care when connecting the battery if the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch mode prior to discharge is unknown.
If the system will not start even after multiple attempts, contact your Toyota
dealer.

CAUTION
■ Chemicals in the battery
Batteries contain poisonous and corrosive sulfuric acid and may produce
hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive. To reduce the risk of death
or serious injury, take the following precautions while working on or near the
battery:
● Do not cause sparks by touching the battery terminals with tools.
● Do not smoke or light a match near the battery.
● Avoid contact with eyes, skin and clothes.
● Never inhale or swallow electrolyte.
● Wear protective safety glasses when working near the battery.
● Keep children away from the battery.

510
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

CAUTION
■ Where to safely charge the battery
Always charge the battery in an open area. Do not charge the battery in a
garage or closed room where there is insufficient ventilation.
■ How to recharge the battery
Only perform a slow charge (5 A or less). The battery may explode if
charged at a quicker rate.
■ Emergency measures regarding electrolyte
● If electrolyte gets in your eyes
Flush your eyes with clean water for at least 15 minutes and get immediate medical attention. If possible, continue to apply water with a sponge or
cloth while traveling to the nearest medical facility.
● If electrolyte gets on your skin
Wash the affected area thoroughly. If you feel pain or burning, get medical
attention immediately.

● If you accidentally swallow electrolyte
Drink a large quantity of water or milk. Get emergency medical attention
immediately.

NOTICE
■ When recharging the battery
Never recharge the battery while the engine is running. Also, be sure all
accessories are turned off.

511
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Maintenance and care

● If electrolyte gets on your clothes
It can soak through clothing on to your skin. Immediately take off the clothing and follow the procedure above if necessary.

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Washer fluid
Type A
If any washer does not work or
the low washer fluid warning light
comes on, the washer tank may
be empty. Add washer fluid.

CTH43AS119

Type B
If the washer fluid level is at
“LOW”, add washer fluid.

CTH43AS071

CAUTION
■ When adding washer fluid
Do not add washer fluid when the engine is hot or running as washer fluid
contains alcohol and may catch fire if spilled on the engine etc.

512
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

NOTICE
■ Do not use any fluid other than washer fluid
Do not use soapy water or engine antifreeze instead of washer fluid.
Doing so may cause streaking on the vehicle’s painted surfaces.
■ Diluting washer fluid
Dilute washer fluid with water as necessary.
Refer to the freezing temperatures listed on the washer fluid tank.

Maintenance and care
513
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Tires
Replace or rotate tires in accordance with maintenance schedules and treadwear.

■ Checking tires
New tread
Treadwear indicator
Worn tread
The location of treadwear
indicators is shown by the
“TWI” or “Δ” marks, etc.,
molded on the sidewall of
each tire.
Check spare tire condition
and pressure if not rotated.

■ Tire rotation
Rotate the tires in the order
shown.
To equalize tire wear and
extend tire life, Toyota recommends that tire rotation is
carried out at the same interval as tire inspection.

Front

■ Tire pressure warning system
Your vehicle is equipped with a tire pressure warning system
that uses tire pressure warning valves and transmitters to detect
low tire inflation pressure before serious problems arise.
(→P. 567)

514
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Installing tire pressure warning valves and transmitters
When replacing tires or wheels, tire pressure warning valves and
transmitters must also be installed.
When new tire pressure warning valves and transmitters are
installed, new tire pressure warning valve and transmitter ID codes
must be registered in the tire pressure warning computer and the tire
pressure warning system must be initialized. Have tire pressure
warning valve and transmitter ID codes registered by your Toyota
dealer. (→P. 515)
Registering ID codes
The tire pressure warning valve and transmitter is equipped with a
unique ID code. When replacing a tire pressure warning valve and
transmitter, it is necessary to register the ID code of tire pressure
warning valve and transmitter. Have the ID code registered by your
Toyota dealer.

Maintenance and care
515
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

■ When to replace your vehicle’s tires

Tires should be replaced if:
● You have tire damage such as cuts, splits, cracks deep enough to

expose the fabric, and bulges indicating internal damage

● A tire goes flat repeatedly or cannot be properly repaired due to the

size or location of a cut or other damage

If you are not sure, consult with your Toyota dealer.
■ Replacing tires and wheels

If the ID code of the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter is not
registered, the tire pressure warning system will not work properly. After
driving for about 20 minutes, the tire pressure warning light comes on
after blinking for 1 minute to indicate a system malfunction.
■ Tire life

Any tire over 6 years old must be checked by a qualified technician even
if they have seldom or never been used or damage is not obvious.
■ Routine tire inflation pressure checks

The tire pressure warning system does not replace routine tire inflation
pressure checks. Make sure to check tire inflation pressure as part of
your routine of daily vehicle checks.
■ Maximum load of tire

Check that the number given by dividing the maximum load by 1.10 of
the replacement tire is greater than 1/2 of the Gross Axle Weight Ratings
(GAWR) of either the front axle or the rear axle, whichever is greater.
For the GAWR, see the Certification
Label. For the maximum load of the
tire, see the load limit at maximum cold
tire inflation pressure mentioned on the
sidewall of the tire. (→P. 626)
CTH43AS081

516
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

■ Tire types
● Summer tires

Summer tires are high-speed performance tires best suited to highway
driving under dry conditions. Since summer tires do not have the same
traction performance as snow tires, summer tires are inadequate for
driving on snow-covered or icy roads. For driving on snow-covered
roads or icy roads, the use of snow tires is recommended. When
installing snow tires, be sure to replace all four tires.
● All season tires

All season tires are designed to provide better traction in snow and to
be adequate for driving in most winter conditions as well as for use
year-round. All season tires, however, do not have adequate traction
performance compared with snow tires in heavy or loose snow. Also,
all season tires fall short in acceleration and handling performance
compared with summer tires in highway driving.
● Snow tires

■ If the tread on snow tires wears down below 0.16 in. (4 mm)

The effectiveness of the tires as snow tires is lost.

517
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Maintenance and care

For driving on snow-covered roads or icy roads, we recommend using
snow tires. If you need snow tires, select tires of the same size, construction and load capacity as the originally installed tires. Since your
vehicle has radial tires as original equipment, make sure your snow
tires also have radial construction. Do not install studded tires without
first checking local regulations for possible restrictions. Snow tires
should be installed on all wheels. (→P. 275)

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

■ Tire pressure warning system certification

FCC ID: PAXPMV107J
FCC ID: HYQ13BCX
IC ID: 3729A-PMV107J
IC ID: 1551A-13BCX
For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject
to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
FCC WARNING:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
For vehicles sold in Canada
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may
not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference,
including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

CAUTION
■ When inspecting or replacing tires

Observe the following precautions to prevent accidents. Failure to do so
may cause damage to parts of the drive train as well as dangerous handling characteristics, which may lead to an accident resulting in death or
serious injury.
● Do not mix tires of different makes, models or tread patterns. Also, do

not mix tires of remarkably different treadwear.

● Do not use tire sizes other than those recommended by Toyota.
● Do not mix differently constructed tires (radial, bias-belted or bias-ply

tires.)

● Do not mix summer, all season and snow tires.

518
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

NOTICE
■ Repairing or replacing tires, wheels and tire pressure warning

valves and transmitters

When removing or fitting the wheels, tires or the tire pressure warning
valves and transmitters, contact your Toyota dealer as the tire pressure
warning valves and transmitter may be damaged if not handled correctly.
■ To avoid damaging the tire pressure warning valves and transmit-

ters

Do not use liquid sealants on flat tires.
■ Driving on rough roads

Take particular care when driving on roads with loose surfaces or potholes. These conditions may cause losses in tire inflation pressure,
reducing the cushioning ability of the tires. In addition, driving on rough
roads may cause damage to the tires themselves, as well as the vehicle’s wheels and body.
■ If tire inflation pressures of each tire becomes low while driving

Do not continue driving, or your tires and/or wheels may be ruined.
Maintenance and care
519
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Tire inflation pressure
■ Tire inflation pressure
The recommended cold tire inflation pressure and tire size are
displayed on the tire and loading information label. (→P. 626)

CTH43AS078

520
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

■ Inspection and adjustment procedure
Tire valve
Tire pressure gauge

STEP 1

Remove the tire valve cap.

STEP 2

Press the tip of the tire pressure gauge onto the tire valve.

STEP 3

Read the pressure using the gauge gradations.

STEP 4

If the tire inflation pressure is not at the recommended
level, adjust the pressure.
If you add too much air, press the center of the valve to
deflate.
After completing the tire inflation pressure measurement
and adjustment, apply soapy water to the valve and check
for leakage.

STEP 6

Put the tire valve cap back on.

■ Tire inflation pressure check interval

You should check tire inflation pressure every two weeks, or at least
once a month.
Do not forget to check the spare.

521
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Maintenance and care

STEP 5

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

■ Effects of incorrect tire inflation pressure

Driving with incorrect tire inflation pressure may result in the following:
● Reduced fuel efficiency
● Reduced driving comfort and tire life
● Reduced safety
● Damage to the drive train

If a tire needs frequent inflating, have it checked by your Toyota dealer.
■ Instructions for checking tire inflation pressure

When checking tire inflation pressure, observe the following:
● Check only when the tires are cold.

If your vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours or has not been
driven for more than 1 mile or 1.5 km, you will get an accurate cold
tire inflation pressure reading.

● Always use a tire pressure gauge.

The appearance of the tire can be misleading. In addition, tire inflation pressure that is even just a few pounds off can affect ride quality
and handling.

● Do not reduce tire inflation pressure after driving. It is normal for tire

inflation pressure to be higher after driving.

● Never exceed the vehicle capacity weight.

Passengers and luggage weight should be placed so that the vehicle
is balanced.

522
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

CAUTION
■ Proper inflation is critical to save tire performance

Keep your tires properly inflated. Otherwise, the following conditions
may occur and result in an accident causing death or serious injury:
● Excessive wear
● Uneven wear
● Poor handling
● Possibility of blowouts resulting from overheated tires
● Poor sealing of the tire bead
● Wheel deformation and/or tire separation
● A greater possibility of tire damage from road hazards

NOTICE
4

■ When inspecting and adjusting tire inflation pressure

523
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Maintenance and care

Be sure to put the tire valve caps back on.
Without the valve caps, dirt or moisture could get into the valve and
cause air leakage, which could result in an accident. If the caps are lost,
replace them as soon as possible.

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Wheels
If a wheel is bent, cracked or heavily corroded, it should be
replaced. Otherwise, the tire may separate from the wheel or
cause a loss of handling control.

■ Wheel selection
When replacing wheels, care should be taken to ensure that
they are equivalent to those removed in load capacity, diameter,
rim width and inset*.
Replacement wheels are available at your Toyota dealer.
*: Conventionally referred to as “offset”.

Toyota does not recommend using the following:
● Wheels of different sizes or types
● Used wheels
● Bent wheels that have been straightened
■ Aluminum wheel precautions
● Use only Toyota wheel nuts and wrenches designed for use
with your aluminum wheels.
● When rotating, repairing or changing your tires, check that the
wheel nuts are still tight after driving 1000 miles (1600 km).
● Be careful not to damage the aluminum wheels when using
tire chains.
● When balancing your wheels, use only Toyota genuine balance weights or the equivalent. If clip-on balance weights are
being used, use a plastic or rubber hammer to install the
weight.

524
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

■ When replacing wheels
The wheels of your vehicle are equipped with tire pressure warning valves
and transmitters that allow the tire pressure warning system to provide
advanced warning in the event of a loss in tire inflation pressure. Whenever
wheels are replaced, the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters must
be installed. (→P. 515)

CAUTION
■ When replacing wheels
● Do not use wheels that are a different size from those recommended in the
Owner’s Manual, as this may result in a loss of handling control.
● Never use an inner tube in a leaking wheel which is designed for a tubeless tire. Doing so may result in an accident, causing death or serious
injury.
4

NOTICE

● Because tire repair or replacement may affect the tire pressure warning
valves and transmitters, make sure to have tires serviced by your Toyota
dealer or other qualified service shop. In addition, make sure to purchase
your tire pressure warning valves and transmitters at your Toyota dealer.
● Ensure that only genuine Toyota wheels are used on your vehicle.
Tire pressure warning valves and transmitters may not work properly with
non-genuine wheels.

525
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Maintenance and care

■ Replacing tire pressure warning valves and transmitters

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Air conditioning filter
The air conditioning filter must be cleaned or changed regularly to
maintain air conditioning efficiency.

■ Removal method
STEP 1

Turn the engine switch (vehicles without a smart key system) or “ENGINE START STOP” switch (vehicles with a
smart key system) off.

STEP 2

Open the glove box and
remove the cover.

CTH43AS089

Remove the filter cover.

STEP 3

CTH43AS024

Remove the filter.

STEP 4

The “↑UP” marks shown on
the filter should be pointing up.

CTH43AS025

526
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

■ Cleaning method
If the filter is dirty, clean by
blowing
compressed
air
through the filter from the
underside.

CTH43AS026

Hold the air gun 2 in. (5 cm)
from the filter and blow for
approximately 2 minutes at 72
psi (500 kpa, 5.0 kgf/cm2 or
bar).
If an air gun is not available,
have the filter cleaned by your
Toyota dealer.

■ Checking interval

■ If air flow from the vents decreases dramatically
The filter may be clogged. Check the filter and replace if necessary.

NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to the system
● When using the air conditioning system, make sure that a filter is always
installed.
● When cleaning the filter, do not clean with water.

527
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Maintenance and care

Inspect, clean and replace the air conditioning filter according to the maintenance schedule. In dusty areas or areas with heavy traffic flow, more frequent cleaning or early replacement may be required. (For scheduled
maintenance information, please refer to the “Scheduled Maintenance
Guide” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.)

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Wireless remote control/electronic key battery
Replace the battery with a new one if it is depleted.

■ You will need the following items:
● Flathead screwdriver
● Lithium battery CR2016 (vehicles without a smart key system), or CR1632 (vehicles with a smart key system)
■ Replacing the battery (vehicles without a smart key system)
Remove the cover.

STEP 1

To prevent damage to the key,
cover the tip of the screwdriver
with a rag.

STEP 2

Remove the module.

STEP 3

Open the case cover using a
coin protected with tape etc.
and remove the depleted battery.
Insert a new battery with the
“+” terminal facing up.

528
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

■ Replacing the battery (vehicles with a smart key system)
STEP 1

Take out the mechanical key.

STEP 2

Remove the cover.
To prevent damage to the key,
cover the tip of the screwdriver
with a rag.
4

Insert a new battery with the
“+” terminal facing up.

529
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Maintenance and care

Remove the depleted battery.

STEP 3

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

■ Use a CR2016 (vehicles without a smart key system) or CR1632 (vehicles with a smart key system) lithium battery
● Batteries can be purchased at your Toyota dealer, local electrical appliance shops or camera stores.
● Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the
manufacturer.
● Dispose of used batteries according to local laws.
■ If the key battery is depleted
The following symptoms may occur:
● The smart key system and wireless remote control will not function properly.
● The operational range will be reduced.

CAUTION
■ Removed battery and other parts
Keep away from children.
These parts are small and if swallowed by a child, they can cause choking.

NOTICE
■ For normal operation after replacing the battery
Observe the following precautions to prevent accidents:
● Always work with dry hands.
Moisture may cause the battery to rust.
● Do not touch or move any other component inside the remote control.
● Do not bend either of the battery terminals.

530
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Checking and replacing fuses
If any of the electrical components do not operate, a fuse may have
blown. If this happens, check and replace the fuses as necessary.
STEP 1

Vehicles without a smart key system
Turn the engine switch off.
Vehicles with a smart key system
Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch off.

STEP 2

Open the fuse box cover.

Engine compartment
Push the tab in and lift the lid
off.

4
CTH43AS123

Maintenance and care

Driver’s side instrument panel
Remove the lid.

CTH43AS028

531
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

STEP 3

After a system failure, see “Fuse layout and amperage ratings” (→P. 535) for details about which fuse to check.

STEP 4

Remove the fuse.
Only type A fuse can be
removed using the pull-out
tool.

CTH43AS029

STEP 5

Check if the fuse is blown.

Type A
Normal fuse
Blown fuse
Replace the blown fuse with a
new fuse of an appropriate
amperage rating. The amperage rating can be found on the
fuse box lid.
CTH43AS030

Type B
Normal fuse
Blown fuse
Replace the blown fuse with a
new fuse of an appropriate
amperage rating. The amperage rating can be found on the
fuse box lid.
CTH43AS031

532
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Type C
Normal fuse
Blown fuse
Replace the blown fuse with a
new fuse of an appropriate
amperage rating. The amperage rating can be found on the
fuse box lid.
CTH43AS073

Type D
Normal fuse
Blown fuse
Replace the blown fuse with a
new fuse of an appropriate
amperage rating. The amperage rating can be found on the
fuse box lid.

Type E
Normal fuse
Blown fuse
Replace the blown fuse with a
new fuse of an appropriate
amperage rating. The amperage rating can be found on the
fuse box lid.
CTH43AS075

533
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Maintenance and care

CTH43AS074

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Type F
Normal fuse
Blown fuse
Contact your Toyota dealer.

CTH43AS076

534
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Fuse layout and amperage ratings
■ Engine compartment

CTH43AS079

Fuse
PTC HTR NO.3

Ampere
30 A

DEF

30 A

Rear window defogger

DEICER

20 A

Windshield wiper de-icer

PTC HTR NO.2

30 A

PTC heater

SUB BATT

30 A

Trailer sub battery

PTC HTR NO.1

50 A

MIR HTR

10 A

TOWING TAIL

30 A

PTC heater
Outside rear view mirror defoggers
Trailer tail light

A/C COMP

10 A

Air conditioning system

STOP

10 A

Stop/tail lights
INJ, IGN, GAUGE fuses
Horn(s)
Multiport fuel injection system/
sequential multiport fuel injection system
A/F sensor

IG2

HORN

10 A

EFI

25 A

A/F

20 A

PTC heater
Maintenance and care

20 A

Circuit

535
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Fuse

Ampere

H-LP RH-HI

10 A

H-LP LH-HI

10 A

HTR

50 A

Circuit
Right-hand headlight (high
beam)
Left-hand headlight (high
beam)
Air conditioning system

400W INV

80 A

Power outlets

30 A

Starter system

H-LP HI

20 A

H-LP RH-HI, H-LP LH-HI fuses

ALT-S

7.5 A

TURN&HAZ

15 A

ETCS

10 A

24
25
26

TOWING
SHORT PIN
RAD NO.1

30 A
⎯
10 A

Charging system
Turn signal lights, emergency
flashers
Multiport fuel injection system/
sequential multiport fuel injection system
Trailer stop/turn lights
No circuit
Audio system

AM2

7.5 A

Starter system

MAYDAY

7.5 A

Safety connect

AMP

30 A

Audio system

ABS NO.1

50 A

ABS, VSC

ABS NO.2

30 A

AIR PMP

50 A

DOME

10 A

ECU-B

10 A

H-LP RH-LO

10 A

H-LP LH-LO

10 A

INJ

10 A

ABS, VSC
Multiport fuel injection system/
sequential multiport fuel injection system
Interior lights, vanity lights
Multiplex communication system, meter and gauge
Right-hand headlight (low
beam)
Left-hand headlight (low beam)
Multiport fuel injection system/
sequential multiport fuel injection system

536
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Fuse
38

EFI NO.2

Ampere
7.5 A

120 A*

ALT

140 A*

Circuit
Multiport fuel injection system/
sequential multiport fuel injection system
HTR, 400W INV, A/C COMP,
TOWING TAIL, SUB BATT,
MIR HTR, DEF, DEICER,
STOP, PTC HTR NO.1, PTC
HTR NO.2, PTC HTR NO.3,
S/HTR FR, ACC, P/OUTLET,
IG1, ECU-IG NO.1, ECU-IG
NO.2, WIP, WASHER, KDSS,
4WD, BKUP LP, TOWING
BKUP, DOOR P, DOOR RL,
DOOR RR, DOOR D, P/SEAT
FL, P/SEAT FR, DOOR, A/C,
OBD, DOOR BACK, S/ROOF,
PANEL, TAIL, FOG FR, D/L
NO.2 fuses

SPARE

10 A

⎯

SPARE

15 A

⎯

SPARE

20 A

⎯

P/I-B

80 A

SECURITY

10 A

SMART

7.5 A

IG2, EFI, A/F, HORN fuses
Multiport fuel injection system/
sequential multiport fuel injection system
Smart key system

STRG LOCK

20 A

Steering lock system

TOWING BRK

30 A

Trailer brake controller

Maintenance and care

*: Replace the fuse with one of the same ampere rating as the original

537
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

■ Driver’s side instrument panel

1
2
3

Fuse
TAIL
PANEL
GAUGE

Ampere
10 A
7.5 A
7.5 A

IGN

10 A

5
6
7
8
9

WASHER
WIP
S/ROOF
DOOR RR
DOOR D

20 A
30 A
25 A
25 A
25 A

DOOR BACK

30 A

11
12
13

DOOR P
P/SEAT FR
S/HTR FR

30 A
30 A
20 A

ECU-IG NO.2

10 A

IG1

7.5 A

ECU-IG NO.1

10 A

DOOR

7.5 A

538
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Circuit
Stop/tail lights
Instrument panel lights
Meter and gauge
Multiport fuel injection system/
sequential multiport fuel injection system, air bag system,
smart key system
Wiper and washer
Wiper and washer
Electric moon roof
Power windows
Power windows
Multiplex communication system
Power windows
Front passenger's power seat
Seat heater system
Air conditioning system, multiport fuel injection system/
sequential multiport fuel injection system
Turn signal lights, emergency
flashers
Vehicle stability control system, tire pressure warning system, steering sensor
Power windows

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

18
19
20
21
22

Fuse
DOOR RL
AM1
A/C
OBD
FOG FR

Ampere
25 A
7.5 A
7.5 A
7.5 A
15 A

D/L NO.2

25 A

24
25

P/SEAT FL
4WD

30 A
20 A

KDSS

10 A

27
28

TOWING BKUP
BKUP LP

10 A
10 A

ACC

7.5 A

P/OUTLET

15 A

Circuit
Power windows
Starter system
Air conditioning system
On-Board diagnosis
Fog lights
Multiplex communication system
Front driver’s power seat
Four wheel drive system
Kinetic dynamic suspension
system
Trailer back-up lights
Back-up lights
Multiport fuel injection system/
sequential multiport fuel injection system
Power outlets

Maintenance and care
539
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

■ After a fuse is replaced
● If the lights do not turn on even after the fuse has been replaced, a bulb
may need replacement. (→P. 541)
● If the replaced fuse blows again, have the vehicle inspected by your
Toyota dealer.
■ If there is an overload in a circuit
The fuses are designed to blow before the entire wiring harness is damaged.

CAUTION
■ To prevent system breakdowns and vehicle fire
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause damage, and possibly a fire or injury.
● Never use a fuse of a higher amperage rating than that indicated, or use
any other object in place of a fuse.
● Always use a genuine Toyota fuse or equivalent.
Never replace a fuse with a wire, even as a temporary fix.
This can cause extensive damage or even fire.
● Do not modify the fuses or fuse boxes.

NOTICE
■ Before replacing fuses
Have the cause of electrical overload determined and repaired by your
Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

540
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Light bulbs
You may replace the following bulbs yourself. The difficulty level of
replacement varies depending on the bulb. If necessary bulb
replacement seems difficult to perform, contact your Toyota dealer.
For more information about replacing other light bulbs, contact your
Toyota dealer.

■ Preparing for light bulb replacement
Check the wattage of the light bulb to be replaced. (→P. 622)
■ Removing the engine compartment cover
→P. 497
■ Front bulb locations
Parking light
and front side
marker light

Headlight low beam
Headlight high beam
4

Front turn signal light and
daytime running light

CTH43AS100

541
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Maintenance and care

Fog light
(if equipped)

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

■ Rear bulb locations
Stop/tail and rear
side marker light

Back-up light

Rear turn signal
light

License plate lights
CTH43AS102

Replacing light bulbs
■ Headlight
Turn the bulb base counterclockwise.

STEP 1

High beam (inside)
Low beam (outside)

CTH43AS126

542
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Unplug the connector while
depressing the lock release.

STEP 2

High beam
Low beam

CTH43AS091

■ Parking light and front side marker light
Turn the steering wheel in the
opposite direction of the parking
light and front side marker light
that you wish to replace.

STEP 1

CTH43AS072

For example, if you wish to
replace the parking light and front
side marker light on the right side,
turn the steering wheel to the left.

CTH43AS092

Partly remove the fender liner.

STEP 3

CTH43AS093

543
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Maintenance and care

Remove the fender liner screws.

STEP 2

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Turn the bulb base counterclockwise.

STEP 4

CTH43AS114

Remove the light bulb.

STEP 5

CTH43AS115

■ Fog light (if equipped)
Turn the steering wheel in the
opposite direction of the fog light
that you wish to replace.

STEP 1

For example, if you wish to
replace the fog light on the right
side, turn the steering wheel to
the left.
CTH43AS072

Remove the fender liner screws.

STEP 2

CTH43AS092

544
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Partly remove the fender liner.

STEP 3

CTH43AS093

Unplug the connector while
depressing the lock release.

STEP 4

CTH43AS094

CTH43AS095

545
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Maintenance and care

Turn the bulb base counterclockwise.

STEP 5

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

■ Front turn signal light and daytime running light
Turn the steering wheel in the
opposite direction of the front
turn signal light and daytime running light that you wish to
replace.

STEP 1

CTH43AS072

For example, if you wish to
replace the front turn signal light
and daytime running light on the
right side, turn the steering wheel
to the left.

Remove the fender liner screws.

STEP 2

CTH43AS092

Partly remove the fender liner.

STEP 3

CTH43AS093

546
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Turn the bulb base counterclockwise.

STEP 4

CTH43AS060

Remove the light bulb.

STEP 5

CTH43AS125

Maintenance and care
547
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

■ Stop/tail and rear side marker light and back-up light
Open the back door and remove
the cover.

STEP 1

Using a flathead screwdriver or
equivalent which is wrapped with
a cloth.

CTH43AS042

Turn the bulb base counterclockwise.

STEP 2

Stop/tail and rear side marker
light
Back-up light

CTH43AS043

Remove the light bulb.

STEP 3

Stop/tail and rear side marker
light
Back-up light

CTH43AS044

548
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

■ Rear turn signal light
Open the back door and remove
the cover.

STEP 1

Using a flathead screwdriver or
equivalent which is wrapped with
a cloth.

CTH43AS042

CTH43AS045

Remove the light bulb.

STEP 3

CTH43AS046

549
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Maintenance and care

Turn the bulb base counterclockwise.

STEP 2

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

■ License plate light
Remove the screws and lens.

STEP 1

CTH43AS103

Remove the light bulb.

STEP 2

CTH43AS048

■ Lights other than the above
If any of the lights listed below has burnt out, have your Toyota
dealer replace it.
● Side turn signal lights (if equipped)
● High mounted stoplight
● Outer foot lights (if equipped)

550
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

■ LED light bulbs
The side turn signal lights and high mounted stoplight consist of a number of
LEDs. If any LEDs burn out, take your vehicle to your Toyota dealer to have
the light replaced.
■ Condensation build-up on the inside of the lens
Contact your Toyota dealer for more information in the following situations.
Temporary condensation build-up on the inside of the headlight lens does
not indicate a malfunction.
● Large drops of water are built up on the inside of the lens.
● Water has built up inside the headlight.

CAUTION
■ Replacing light bulbs
● Turn off the lights. Do not attempt to replace the bulb immediately after
turning off the lights.
The bulbs become very hot and may cause burns.

● Fully install light bulbs and any parts used to secure them. Failing to do so
may result in heat damage, fire, or water entering the headlight unit. This
may damage the headlights or cause condensation to build up on the lens.
■ To prevent damage or fire
Make sure bulbs are fully seated and locked.

551
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Maintenance and care

● Do not touch the glass portion of the light bulb with bare hands. Hold the
bulb by the plastic or metal portion.
If the bulb is scratched or dropped it may blow out or crack.

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

552
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

5-1. Essential information

Emergency flashers
Use the emergency flashers if the vehicle malfunctions or is
involved in an accident.

Press the switch to flash all
the turn signal lights. To turn
them off, press the switch
once again.

CTH51AS005

NOTICE
■ To prevent battery discharge
Do not leave the emergency flashers on longer than necessary when the
engine is not running.

554
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

5-1. Essential information

If your vehicle needs to be towed
If towing is necessary, we recommend having your vehicle towed by
your Toyota dealer or a commercial towing service, using a lift-type
truck or flatbed truck.
Use a safety chain system for all towing, and abide by all state/provincial and local laws.

Before towing
The following may indicate a problem with your transmission. Contact
your Toyota dealer before towing.
● The engine is running but the vehicle will not move.
● The vehicle makes an abnormal sound.
Emergency towing

555
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

When trouble arises

CTH51AS010

If a tow truck is not available in
an emergency, your vehicle may
be temporarily towed using a
cable or chain secured to the
emergency towing eyelet(s).
This should only be attempted
on hard surfaced roads for short
distances at low speeds.
A driver must be in the vehicle to
steer and operate the brakes.
The vehicle’s wheels, drive train,
axles, steering and brakes must
be in good condition.

5-1. Essential information

Vehicles with a front spoiler only:
Before using the front emergency towing eyelet(s), remove
the cover(s).

CTH51AS007

Removing the clips
Installing the clips

CTH51AS008

Towing with a sling-type truck
Do not tow with a sling-type truck
to prevent body damage.

556
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

5-1. Essential information

Towing with a wheel lift-type truck
From the front
Use a towing dolly under the rear
wheels.

From the rear (2WD models)
Vehicles without a smart key
system: Turn the engine switch
to the “ACC” position so that the
steering wheel is unlocked.
Vehicles with a smart key system: Turn the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch to ACCESSORY
mode so that the steering wheel
is unlocked.

Full-time 4WD models: Use a
towing dolly under the front
wheels.
Part-time 4WD models: When
not using a towing dolly, turn the
engine switch to the “ACC” position, shift the shift lever to N and
shift the front-wheel drive control
lever to H2.

557
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

When trouble arises

From the rear (4WD models)

5-1. Essential information

Using a flatbed truck
If you use chains or cables to tie
down your vehicle, the angles
shaded in black must be 45°.
Do not overly tighten the tie
downs or the vehicle may be
damaged.

■ Before emergency towing
STEP 1 Vehicles without a smart key system: Turn the engine switch to the

“ACC” (engine off) or “ON” position.
Vehicles with a smart key system: Turn the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch to ACCESSORY (engine off) or IGNITION ON mode
(engine running).
STEP 2 Part-time 4WD models: Shift the front-wheel drive control lever to

H2.
Full-time 4WD models: Put the four-wheel drive control switch in
H4F. (The center differential is unlocked.)
STEP 3 Shift the shift lever to N.
STEP 4 Release the parking brake.

558
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

5-1. Essential information

CAUTION
■ Caution while towing
● Use extreme caution when towing the vehicle.
Avoid sudden starts or erratic driving maneuvers which place excessive
stress on the emergency towing eyelets and the cables or chains. Always
use caution for the surroundings and other vehicles while towing.
● Vehicles with a smart key system: Do not turn the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch off.
Doing so will lock the steering wheel and prevent operation, possibly causing an accident and resulting in death or serious injury.
● If the engine is not running, the power assist for the brakes and steering
will not function, making steering and braking more difficult.

NOTICE
■ To prevent causing serious damage to the transmission and transfer
(4WD models) when towing using a wheel-lift type truck
2WD models: Never tow this vehicle from the front with the rear wheels on
the ground.
4WD models: Never tow this vehicle with any of the wheels in contact with
the ground.

● 2WD models without a smart key system: Do not tow the vehicle from the
rear when the engine switch is in the “LOCK” position or the key is
removed. The steering lock mechanism is not strong enough to hold the
front wheels straight.
● 2WD models with a smart key system: Do not tow the vehicle from the rear
when the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is off. The steering lock mechanism is not strong enough to hold the front wheels straight.
● When raising the vehicle, ensure adequate ground clearance for towing at
the opposite end of the raised vehicle. Without adequate clearance, the
vehicle could be damaged while being towed.

559
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

When trouble arises

■ To prevent damage to the vehicle when towing using a wheel-lift type
truck

5-1. Essential information

NOTICE
■ To prevent body damage when towing with a sling-type truck
Do not tow with a sling-type truck, either from the front or rear.
■ To prevent causing serious damage to the transmission and transfer
(4WD models) in emergency towing
Never tow a vehicle from the rear with four wheels on the ground. This may
cause serious damage to the transmission and transfer.

560
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

5-1. Essential information

If you think something is wrong
If you notice any of the following symptoms, your vehicle probably
needs adjustment or repair. Contact your Toyota dealer as soon as
possible.

■ Visible symptoms
● Fluid leaks under the vehicle
(Water dripping from the air conditioning after use is normal.)
● Flat-looking tires or uneven tire wear
● Engine coolant temperature gauge needle continually points
higher than normal
● Voltmeter (if equipped) continually points higher or lower than
normal
■ Audible symptoms
● Changes in exhaust sound
● Excessive tire squeal when cornering
● Strange noises related to the suspension system
● Pinging or other noises related to the engine

■ Operational symptoms
● Appreciable loss of power
● Vehicle pulls heavily to one side when braking
● Vehicle pulls heavily to one side when driving on a level road
● Loss of brake effectiveness, spongy feeling, pedal almost
touches the floor

561
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

When trouble arises

● Engine missing, stumbling or running roughly

5-1. Essential information

Fuel pump shut off system
To minimize the risk of fuel leakage when the engine stalls or when
an airbag inflates upon collision, the fuel pump shut off system
stops the supply of fuel to the engine.

Follow the procedure below to restart the engine after the system is
activated.
Vehicles without a smart key system
STEP 1

Turn the engine switch to the “ACC” or “LOCK” position.

STEP 2

Restart the engine.

Vehicles with a smart key system
STEP 1

Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch off.

STEP 2

Restart the engine.

NOTICE
■ Before starting the engine
Inspect the ground under the vehicle.
If you find that fuel has leaked onto the ground, the fuel system has been
damaged and is in need of repair. Do not restart the engine.

562
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

5-1. Essential information

Event data recorder
Your vehicle has computers that monitor and control certain aspects
of your vehicle. These computers assist in driving and maintaining
optimal vehicle performance.

Besides storing data useful for troubleshooting, there is an event
data recorder (EDR) that records data in a crash or near crash
event.

In a crash or near crash event
The SRS airbag sensor assembly contains the EDR. In a crash or
near crash event, this device may record some or all of the following
information:
● Gasoline engine speed
● Whether the brake pedal was depressed or not
● Vehicle speed
● To what extent the accelerator pedal was depressed
● Position of the transmission shift lever

● Whether the driver and front passenger wore seat belts or not
When trouble arises

● Driver’s seat position
● SRS airbag deployment data
● SRS airbag system diagnostic data
● Front passenger’s occupant classification
The information above is intended to be used for the purpose of
improving vehicle safety performance. Unlike general data recorders,
the EDR does not record sound data such as conversation between
passengers.

563
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

5-1. Essential information

Disclosure of the data
Toyota will not disclose the data recorded in an EDR to a third party
except when:
● An agreement from the vehicle’s owner (or the leasing company for
a leased vehicle) is obtained
● Officially requested to by the police or other authorities
● Necessary, to be used as a defense for Toyota in a law suit
● Ordered by a court of law
However, if necessary Toyota will:
● Use the data for research on Toyota vehicle safety performance
● Disclose the data to a third party for research purposes without disclosing details of the vehicle owner, and that only when deemed
necessary
● Disclose summarized data cleared of vehicle identification information to a non-Toyota organization for research purposes

564
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If a warning light turns on or a warning buzzer sounds
Calmly perform the following actions if any of the warning lights
comes on or flashes. If a light comes on or flashes, but then goes
off, this does not necessarily indicate a malfunction in the system.
However, if this continues to occur, have the vehicle inspected by
your Toyota dealer.

Stop the vehicle immediately. Continuing to drive the vehicle
may be dangerous.
The following warning indicates a possible problem in the brake system. Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact your
Toyota dealer.
Warning light

(type A)

(type B)

Warning light/Details

Brake system warning light (warning buzzer)*
• Low brake fluid
• Malfunction in the brake system
This light also comes on when the parking brake is not
released. If the light turns off after the parking brake is
fully released the system is operating normally.

*: Parking brake engaged warning buzzer:
A buzzer will sound if the vehicle is driven at a speed of approximately 3 mph
(5 km/h) or more.

565
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

When trouble arises

(type C)

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Stop the vehicle immediately.
The following warnings indicate the possibility of damage to the vehicle that may lead to an accident. Immediately stop the vehicle in a
safe place and contact your Toyota dealer.
Warning light

Warning light/Details
Charging system warning light
Indicates a malfunction in the vehicle’s charging system
Low engine oil pressure warning light
Indicates that the engine oil pressure is too low

Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately.
Failure to investigate the cause of the following warnings may lead to
the system operating abnormally and possibly cause an accident.
Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately.
Warning light

Warning light/Details
Malfunction indicator lamp
Indicates a malfunction in:
• The emission control system;
• The electronic engine control system;
• The electronic throttle control system; or
• The electronic automatic transmission control system
SRS warning light
Indicates a malfunction in:
• The SRS airbag system;
• The front passenger occupant classification system; or
• The seat belt pretensioner system

566
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Warning light

(U.S.A.)

Warning light/Details
ABS warning light
Indicates a malfunction in:
• The ABS; or
• The brake assist system

(Canada)
Slip indicator
Indicates a malfunction in:
• The VSC system;
• The TRAC (TRC) system;
• The active traction control system;
• The AUTO LSD system;
• The downhill assist control system;
• The hill-start assist control system; or
• The Crawl Control system
Power steering warning light
Indicates a malfunction in the power steering system
Unengaged “Park” warning light (if equipped)
Indicates a malfunction in the transmission “Park” mechanism.

Follow the correction procedures.
After taking the specified steps to correct the suspected problem,
check that the warning light goes off.
Warning light

Warning light/Details

Correction procedure

Open door warning light
(warning buzzer)*1
Indicates that a door is not
fully closed

Check that all the doors are
closed.

567
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

When trouble arises

KDSS warning light (if equipped)
Indicates a malfunction in KDSS

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Warning light

(On the center panel)

Warning light/Details

Correction procedure

Low fuel level warning
light
Indicates remaining fuel is
approximately 3.5 gal.
(13.1 L, 2.9 Imp. gal.) or
less

Refuel the vehicle.

Driver’s seat belt
reminder light (warning
buzzer)*2
Warns the driver to fasten
his/her seat belt

Fasten the seat belt.

Front passenger’s seat
belt reminder light (warning buzzer)*2
Warns the front passenger to fasten his/her seat
belt

Fasten the seat belt.

Tire pressure warning
light

(Canada)

When the light comes on:
Low tire inflation pressure

Adjust the tire inflation
pressure.

When the light comes on
after blinking for 1 minute:
Malfunction in the tire
pressure warning system

Have the system checked
by your Toyota dealer.

Automatic transmission
fluid temperature warning
light
Indicates that the automatic transmission fluid
temperature is too high

Stop the vehicle in a safe
place and shift the shift
lever to P.
If the light does not go off,
contact your Toyota dealer.

Low windshield washer
fluid warning light
Low level of washer fluid

Fill the tank.

568
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Warning light

Warning light/Details

Correction procedure

Maintenance required
reminder light*3
Indicates that maintenance
is required according to the
driven distance on the maintenance schedule.

(U.S.A.)

Illuminates for about 3 seconds and then flashes for
about 15 seconds approximately 4500 miles (7200
km) after the maintenance
data has been reset.

If necessary, perform maintenance.

Comes on and remains on if
the distance driven exceeds
5000 miles (8000 km) after
the maintenance data has
been reset.
(The Indicator will not work
unless the maintenance
data has been reset.)

Perform the necessary
maintenance.
Please reset the maintenance data after the maintenance is performed.
See page “Reset the
mainteance data”

*1:Open door warning buzzer:

*2:Driver’s and front passenger’s seat belt buzzer:
The driver’s and front passenger’s seat belt buzzer sounds to alert the driver
and front passenger that his or her seat belt is not fastened. The buzzer
sounds intermittently for 10 seconds after the vehicle reaches a speed of 12
mph (20 km/h). Then, if the seat belt is still unfastened, the buzzer will
sound in a different tone for 20 more seconds.

*3:Maintenance required reminder light:
Refer to the seperate “Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or “Owner’s Manual
Supplement” for the maintenance interval applicable to your vehicle.

569
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

When trouble arises

The open door warning buzzer sounds to alert one or more of the doors is
not fully closed (with the vehicle having reached a speed of 3 mph [5 km/h]).

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Follow the correction procedures. (vehicles with a smart key system)
After taking the specified steps to correct the suspected problem,
check that the warning light goes off.
Interior
buzzer

Once

Exterior
buzzer

Warning
light

Warning light/Details

Correction
procedure

⎯

Smart key system warning
light
Indicates that the electronic
key is not present when the
“ENGINE START STOP”
switch is pressed

Confirm the
location of the
electronic
key*.

3 times

Smart key system warning
light
Indicates that a door other
than the driver’s door has
been opened and closed with
the “ENGINE START STOP”
switch in any mode other
than off and the electronic
key has been taken out of
the detection area

Confirm the
location of the
electronic
key.

3 times

Smart key system warning
light
Indicates that the driver’s
door has been opened and
closed with the shift lever in
P, the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch in any mode
other than off and the electronic key has been taken out
of the detection area

Turn the
“ENGINE
START
STOP” switch
off or confirm
the location of
the electronic
key.

570
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Interior
buzzer

Continuous

Once

Correction
procedure

Continuous

Smart key system warning
light
Indicates that the driver’s
door has been opened and
closed with the shift lever not
in P, the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch in any mode
other than off and the electronic key has been taken out
of the detection area

• Shift the shift
lever to P.
• Confirm the
location of the
electronic
key.

Sounds
for 10
seconds

Smart key system warning
light
Indicates that the electronic
key has been taken out of
the vehicle and an attempt
was made to lock the doors
with the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch in any mode
other than off

Turn the
“ENGINE
START
STOP” switch
off and lock
the doors
again.

Smart key system warning
light
Indicates that an attempt was
made to drive when the electronic key was not present

Confirm the
location of the
electronic
key.

⎯

Warning
light

(Remains
on for 60
seconds)

*: If the engine does not start when the electronic key is inside the vehicle, the electronic key battery may be depleted or there may be difficulties receiving the signal from the key. (→P. 41)

571
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

When trouble arises

Warning light/Details

Exterior
buzzer

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

■ SRS warning light
This warning light system monitors the airbag sensor assembly, front airbag
sensors, side and curtain shield airbag sensors, curtain shield airbag sensors, floor sensor, driver's seat belt buckle switch, front passenger occupant
classification system, SRS airbag on-off indicator, roll sensing of curtain
shield airbags off indicator, front passenger's seat belt buckle switch, seat
belt pretensioner assemblies, inflators, interconnecting wiring and power
sources. (→P. 114)
■ Key reminder buzzer (vehicles without a smart key system)
The buzzer indicates that the key has not been removed with the engine off
and the driver’s door opened.
■ Open moon roof reminder buzzer (if equipped)
The buzzer indicates that the moon roof is not fully closed with the engine off
and the driver’s door opened.
■ Front passenger detection sensor, passenger seat belt reminder and
warning buzzer
● If luggage is placed on the front passenger seat, the front passenger
detection sensor may cause the warning light to flash and the warning
buzzer to sound even if a passenger is not sitting in the seat.
● If a cushion is placed on the seat, the sensor may not detect a passenger, and the warning light may not operate properly.
■ If the malfunction indicator lamp comes on while driving
First check the following:
● Is the fuel tank empty?
If it is, fill the fuel tank immediately.
● Is the fuel tank cap loose?
If it is, tighten it securely.
The light will go off after several driving trips.
If the light does not go off even after several trips, contact your Toyota dealer
as soon as possible.

572
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

■ The tire pressure warning light may come on due to natural causes

The tire pressure warning light may come on due to natural causes such
as natural air leaks and tire inflation pressure changes caused by temperature. In this case, adjusting the tire inflation pressure will turn off the
warning light (after a few minutes).
■ When a tire is replaced with a spare tire

The spare tire is not equipped with a tire pressure warning valve and
transmitter. If a tire goes flat, the tire pressure warning light will not turn
off even though the flat tire has been replaced with the spare tire.
Replace the spare tire with the repaired tire and adjust the tire inflation
pressure. The tire pressure warning light will go off after a few minutes.

When trouble arises
573
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

■ If the tire pressure warning system is not functioning

The tire pressure warning system will be disabled in the following conditions:
(When the condition becomes normal, the system will work properly.)
● If tires not equipped with tire pressure warning valves and transmit-

ters are used

● If the ID code on the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters is

not registered in the tire pressure warning computer

● If the tire inflation pressure is 73 psi (500 kPa, 5.1 kgf/cm2 or bar) or

higher

The tire pressure warning system may be disabled in the following conditions:
(When the condition becomes normal, the system will work properly.)
● If electronic devices or facilities using similar radio wave frequencies

are nearby

● If a radio set at a similar frequency is in use in the vehicle
● If a window tint that affects the radio wave signals is installed
● If there is a lot of snow or ice on the vehicle, particularly around the

wheels or wheel housings

● If non-genuine Toyota wheels are used (Even if you use Toyota

wheels, the tire pressure warning system may not work properly with
some types of tires.)

● If tire chains are used
■ If the tire pressure warning light comes on after flashing frequently

for 1 minute

If the tire pressure warning light comes on after flashing frequently for 1
minute when the “ENGINE START STOP” switch (vehicles with a smart
key system) or the engine switch (vehicles without a smart key system)
is turned on, have it checked by your Toyota dealer.
■ Customization that can be configured at Toyota dealer
The vehicle speed linked seat belt reminder buzzer can be disabled.
(Customizable features →P. 638) However, Toyota recommends that the
seat belt reminder buzzer be operational to alert the driver and front passenger when seat belts are not fastened.
574
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

CAUTION
■ If the tire pressure warning light comes on

Be sure to observe the following precautions. Failure to do so could
cause a loss of vehicle control and result in death or serious injury.
● Stop your vehicle in a safe place as soon as possible. Adjust the tire

inflation pressure immediately.

● If the tire pressure warning light comes on even after tire inflation pres-

sure adjustment, it is probable that you have a flat tire. Check the tires.
If a tire is flat, change it with the spare tire and have the flat tire
repaired by the nearest Toyota dealer.

● Avoid abrupt maneuvering and braking. If the vehicle tires deteriorate,

you could lose control of the steering wheel or the brakes.

■ If a blowout or sudden air leakage should occur

The tire pressure warning system may not activate immediately.

When trouble arises
575
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

CAUTION
■ Maintenance of the tires

Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly
when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the
vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure
label (tire and load information label). (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label [tire and load information label], you should determine the
proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire
pressure monitoring system (TPMS-tire pressure warning system) that
illuminates a low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light) when
one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly,
when the low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light) illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and
inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may
affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the
level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale (tire
pressure warning light).

576
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

CAUTION
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS (tire pressure warning
system) malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure
warning light). When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will
flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as
long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure
as intended.
TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires
or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS (tire pressure warning
system) from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) to
continue to function properly.

NOTICE

■ Precaution when installing a different tire

577
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

When trouble arises

When a tire of a different specification or maker is installed, the tire pressure warning system may not operate properly.

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If you have a flat tire
Remove the flat tire and replace it with the spare tire provided.

■ Before jacking up the vehicle
● Stop the vehicle on a hard, flat surface.
● Set the parking brake.
● Shift the shift lever to P.
● Stop the engine.
● Turn on the emergency flashers.
■ Location of the spare tire, jack and tools

Tool bag

Jack
Spare tire

578
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

CTH52AS032

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Taking out the jack and tool bag
Remove the cover.

STEP 1

CTH52AS020

Unhook and take out the tool
bag.

STEP 2

CTH52AS004

Take out the jack.

STEP 3

For loosening
When trouble arises

For tightening

CTH52AS035

579
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Taking out the spare tire
Assemble the jack handle extension as shown. Be sure to tighten
each bolt securely.

STEP 1

CTH52AS006

When connecting the jack handle extensions, use the jack handle to tighten the square head
bolt. Make sure that the bolt fits
into the depression on the joint.

STEP 2

CTH52AS007

580
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

When connecting the jack handle extension with the jack handle, tighten the round head bolt
by hand.

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Insert the end of the jack handle
extension into the lowering
screw and turn it counterclockwise.

STEP 3

Lower the spare tire completely
to the ground.

CTH52AS008

Pull out the spare tire and
remove the holding bracket.

STEP 4

When trouble arises

CTH52AS009

581
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Replacing a flat tire
Chock the tires.

STEP 1

Flat tire

CTH52AS038

Wheel
chock positions

Lefthand
side

Behind the
rear righthand side
tire

Righthand
side

Behind the
rear lefthand side
tire

Lefthand
side

In front of
the front
right-hand
side tire

Righthand
side

In front of
the front
left-hand
side tire

Front

Rear

Remove the wheel ornament
using the wheel ornament
remover.

STEP 2

CTH52AS041

582
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

To protect the wheel
place a rag between
ornament remover
wheel ornament, as
the illustration.

ornament,
the wheel
and the
shown in

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Slightly loosen the wheel nuts
(one turn).

STEP 3

CTH52AS012

Position the jack at the jack
points as shown.

STEP 4

Front - Under the chassis frame
side rail
Rear - Under the rear axle housing

Assemble the jack handle extension as shown. Be sure to tighten
each bolt securely.

STEP 5

CTH52AS014

583
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

When trouble arises

CTH52AS039

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

When connecting the jack handle extensions, use the jack handle to tighten the square head
bolt. Make sure that the bolt fits
into the depression on the joint.

STEP 6

CTH52AS007

When connecting the jack handle extension with the jack handle, tighten the round head bolt
by hand.

Raise the vehicle until the tire is
slightly raised off the ground.

STEP 7

When positioning the jack under
the rear axle housing, make
sure the groove on the top of
the jack fits with the rear axle
housing.
CTH52AS015

Remove all the wheel nuts and
the tire.

STEP 8

When resting the tire on the
ground, place the tire so that the
wheel design faces up to avoid
scratching the wheel surface.
CTH52AS016

584
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Installing the spare tire
Remove any dirt or foreign matter from the wheel contact surface.

STEP 1

CTH52AS017

STEP 2

If foreign matter is on the wheel
contact surface, the wheel nuts
may loosen while the vehicle is
in motion, causing the tire to
come off.

Install the spare tire and loosely tighten each wheel nut by
hand by approximately the same amount.

Tapered
portion
Disc wheel seat

When replacing an aluminum
wheel with a steel wheel, tighten
the wheel nuts until the tapered
portion comes into loose contact
with the disc wheel seat.

CTH52AS034

Disc wheel
CTH52AS037

585
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

When trouble arises

Washer

When replacing an aluminum
wheel with an aluminum wheel,
tighten the wheel nuts until the
washers comes into contact with
the disc wheel.

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Lower the vehicle.

STEP 3

CTH52AS019

Firmly tighten each wheel nut
two or three times in the order
shown in the illustration.

STEP 4

Tightening torque:
83 ft•lbf (110 N•m, 11.5 kgf•m)

CTH52AS029

Stowing the flat/spare tire, jack and tools
Lay down the tire with the outer
side facing up, and install the
holding bracket.

STEP 1

CTH52AS031

STEP 2

Raise the tire.
Vehicles with kinetic dynamic suspension: Pull the tire toward
the rear of the vehicle when raising. After raising, visually
check that tire is not interfering with components.

STEP 3

Stow the tools and jack securely, and replace the cover.

586
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

■ After completing the tire change

The tire pressure warning system must be reset. (→P. 515)
■ When using the spare tire

As the spare tire is not equipped with a tire pressure warning valve and
transmitter, low inflation pressure of the spare tire will not be indicated by
the tire pressure warning system. Also, if you replace the compact spare
tire after the tire pressure warning light comes on, the light remains on.

CAUTION
■ Using the tire jack

Improper use of the tire jack may cause the vehicle to suddenly fall off
the jack, leading to death or serious injury.
● Do not use the tire jack for any purpose other than replacing tires or

installing and removing tire chains.

● Only use the tire jack that comes with this vehicle for replacing a flat

tire.
Do not use it on other vehicles, and do not use other tire jacks for
replacing tires on this vehicle.

● Always check that the tire jack is securely set to the jack point.

● Do not put any part of your body under the vehicle while it is supported
● Do not start or run the engine while your vehicle is supported by the

jack.

● Do not raise the vehicle while someone is inside.
● When raising the vehicle, do not put an object on or under the jack.
● Do not raise the vehicle to a height greater than that required to

replace the tire.

● Use a jack stand if it is necessary to get under the vehicle.

Take particular care when lowering the vehicle to ensure that no one
working on or near the vehicle may be injured.

587
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

When trouble arises

by the jack.

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

CAUTION
■ Using the jack handle

Tighten all the jack handle bolts securely using a Phillips-head screwdriver, to prevent the extension parts from coming apart unexpectedly.
■ Replacing a flat tire

Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of death or serious
injury.
● Lower the spare tire completely to the ground before removing it from

under the vehicle.

● Do not try to remove the wheel ornament by hand. Take due care in

handling the ornament to avoid unexpected personal injury.

● Never use oil or grease on the wheel bolts or wheel nuts.

Oil and grease may cause the wheel nuts to be excessively tightened,
leading to bolt or disc wheel damage. In addition, the oil or grease can
cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel may fall off, causing a
serious accident. Remove any oil or grease from the wheel bolts or
wheel nuts.

● Have the wheel nuts tightened with a torque wrench to 83 ft•lbf (110

N•m, 11.5 kgf•m) as soon as possible after changing wheels.

● Do not attach a heavily damaged wheel ornament, as it may fly off the

wheel while the vehicle is moving.

● When installing a tire, only use wheel nuts that have been specifically

designed for that wheel.

● If there are any cracks or deformations in the bolt screws, nut threads

or bolt holes of the wheel, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota
dealer.

Failure to follow these precautions could cause the wheel nuts to loosen
and the tire to fall off, resulting in death or serious injury.

588
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

NOTICE
■ Do not drive the vehicle with a flat tire

Do not continue driving with a flat tire.
Driving even a short distance with a flat tire can damage the tire and the
wheel beyond repair.
■ When stowing the flat tire

Ensure that there is no object caught between the tire and the vehicle
underbody.
■ When replacing the tires
● When removing or fitting the wheels, tires or the tire pressure warning

valve and transmitter, contact your Toyota dealer as the tire pressure
warning valve and transmitter may be damaged if not handled correctly.

● Replace the grommets for the tire pressure warning valves and trans-

mitters as well.

■ To avoid damage the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters

Do not use liquid sealants on flat tires.

When trouble arises
589
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If the engine will not start
If the engine will not start even though correct starting procedures
are being followed (→P. 164, 167), consider each of the following
points:

■ The engine will not start even though the starter motor
operates normally.
One of the following may be the cause of the problem:
● There may not be sufficient fuel in the vehicle’s tank.
Refuel the vehicle.
● The engine may be flooded.
Try to restart the engine again following correct starting procedures. (→P. 164, 167)
● There may be a malfunction in the engine immobilizer system.
(→P. 106)
■ The starter motor turns over slowly, the interior lights and
headlights are dim, or the horn does not sound or sounds at
a low volume.
One of the following may be the cause of the problem:
● The battery may be discharged. (→P. 598)
● The battery terminal connections may be loose or corroded.
■ The starter motor does not turn over.
The engine starting system may be malfunctioning due to an
electrical problem such as an open circuit or a blown fuse. However, an interim measure is available to start the engine.
(→P. 591)

590
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

■ The starter motor does not turn over, the interior lights and
headlights do not turn on, or the horn does not sound.
One of the following may be the cause of the problem:
● One or both of the battery terminals may be disconnected.
● The battery may be discharged. (→P. 598)
● There may be a malfunction in the steering lock system. (vehicles with a smart key system)
Contact your Toyota dealer if the problem cannot be repaired, or if
repair procedures are unknown.

Emergency start function (vehicles with a smart key system)
When the engine does not start, the following steps can be used as
an interim measure to start the engine if the “ENGINE START STOP”
switch is functioning normally:
Set the parking brake.

STEP 2

Shift the shift lever to P.

STEP 3

Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to ACCESSORY
mode.

STEP 4

Press and hold the “ENGINE START STOP” switch for about
15 seconds while depressing the brake pedal firmly.

Even if the engine can be started using the above steps, the system
may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota
dealer.

591
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

When trouble arises

STEP 1

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P
If the shift lever cannot be shifted with your foot on the brake pedal,
there may be a problem with the shift lock system (a system to prevent accidental operation of the shift lever). Have the vehicle
inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately.
The following steps may be used as an emergency measure to
ensure that the shift lever can be shifted:
STEP 1

Set the parking brake.

STEP 2

Vehicles with a smart key system: Turn the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch to ACCESSORY mode.
Vehicles without a smart key system: Turn the engine
switch to the “ACC” position.

STEP 3

Depress the brake pedal.

Standard type
Pry the cover up with a flathead screwdriver or equivalent tool.

STEP 4

CTH52AS045

Press the shift lock override
button.

STEP 5

The shift lever can be shifted
while the button is pressed.

CTH52AS046

592
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Multi-mode type
Pry the cover up with a flathead screwdriver or equivalent tool.

STEP 4

CTH52AS021

Press the shift lock override
button.

STEP 5

The shift lever can be shifted
while the button is pressed.

CTH52AS022

When trouble arises
593
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If you lose your keys
New genuine keys can be made by your Toyota dealer. For vehicles
with the smart key system, bring the other key and the key number
stamped on the key number plate. For vehicles without the smart key
system, bring a master key and the key number stamped on the key
number plate.

594
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If you cannot operate back door opener
If the back door opener does not operate, there may be a problem
with the back door opener system. Have the vehicle inspected by
your Toyota dealer immediately.
The following steps may be used as an emergency measure to
ensure that the back door can be opened from the inside.

Remove the cover on the back
door trim.

STEP 1

CTH52AS023

Tear the plastic film. Remove the
cover.

STEP 2

When trouble arises

CTH52AS040

Pull the lever.

STEP 3

CTH52AS036

595
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If the electronic key does not operate properly (vehicles with a smart key system)
If communication between the electronic key and vehicle is interrupted (→P. 41) or the electronic key cannot be used because the
battery is depleted, the smart key system and wireless remote control cannot be used. In such cases, the doors can be opened and the
engine can be started by following the procedure below.

Locking and unlocking the doors
Use the mechanical key (→P.
31) in order to perform the following operations:
Locks all doors

CTH52AS001

596
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Unlocks all doors
Turning the key rearward
unlocks the driver’s door.
Turning the key once again
unlocks the other doors.

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Changing “ENGINE START STOP” switch modes and starting the
engine
STEP 1

Ensure that the shift lever is in P and depress the brake pedal.

STEP 2

Touch the Toyota emblem side of
the electronic key to the
“ENGINE START STOP” switch.

CTH52AS002

STEP 3

If any of the doors is opened or
closed while the key is being
touched to the switch, an alarm
will sound to indicate that the start
function cannot detect the key.

To change “ENGINE START STOP” switch modes: Within 10
seconds of the buzzer sounding, release the brake pedal and
press the “ENGINE START STOP” switch. Modes can be
changed each time the switch is pressed. (→P. 168)
To start the engine: Press the “ENGINE START STOP” switch
within 10 seconds of the buzzer sounding, keeping the brake
pedal depressed.

In the event that the “ENGINE START STOP” switch cannot be operated, contact your Toyota dealer.

Shift the shift lever to P and press the “ENGINE START STOP” switch as
you normally do when stopping the engine.
■ Replacing the key battery
As the above procedure is a temporary measure, it is recommended that the
electronic key battery be replaced immediately when the battery is depleted.
(→P. 529)

597
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

When trouble arises

■ Stopping the engine

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If the vehicle battery is discharged
The following procedures may be used to start the engine if the vehicle's battery is discharged.
You can also call your Toyota dealer or a qualified repair shop.

If you have a set of jumper (or booster) cables and a second vehicle with a 12-volt battery, you can jump start your vehicle by following the steps below.
2.7 L 4-cylinder (2TR-FE) engine
STEP 1

CTH52AS048

598
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

4.0 L V6 (1GR-FE) engine
STEP 1

CTH52AS044

Connect the jumper cables according to the following procedure:
Connect a positive jumper cable clamp to the positive (+) battery
terminal on your vehicle.
Connect the clamp on the other end of the positive cable to the
positive (+) battery terminal on the second vehicle.
Connect a negative cable clamp to the negative (-) battery terminal on the second vehicle.

599
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

When trouble arises

Connect the clamp at the other end of the negative cable to a
solid, stationary, unpainted metallic point away from the battery
and any moving parts, as shown in the illustration.

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

STEP 2

Start the engine of the second vehicle. Increase the engine
speed slightly and maintain at that level for approximately 5
minutes to recharge the battery of your vehicle.

STEP 3

Vehicles with a smart key system only: Open and close any
of the doors of your vehicle with the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch off.

STEP 4

Maintain the engine speed of the second vehicle and start
the engine of your vehicle by turning the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch to IGNITION ON mode (vehicles with a smart
key system) or turning the engine switch to the “ON” position (vehicles without a smart key system).

STEP 5

Once the vehicle’s engine has started, remove the jumper
cables in the exact reverse order from which they were connected.

Once the engine starts, have the vehicle inspected at your Toyota
dealer as soon as possible.

600
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

■ Starting the engine when the battery is discharged
The engine cannot be started by push-starting.
■ To prevent battery discharge
● Turn off the headlights and the audio system while the engine is off.
● Turn off any unnecessary electrical components when the vehicle is running at a low speed for an extended period, such as in heavy traffic.
■ Precautions when the battery is discharged (vehicles with a smart key
system)
● In some cases, it may not be possible to unlock the doors using the smart
key system when the battery is discharged. Use the wireless remote control or the mechanical key to lock or unlock the doors.
● The engine may not start on the first attempt after the battery has
recharged but will start normally after the second attempt. This is not a
malfunction.
● The “ENGINE START STOP” switch mode is memorized by the vehicle.
When the battery is reconnected, the system will return to the mode it
was in before the battery was discharged. Before disconnecting the battery, turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch off.
If you are unsure what mode the “ENGINE START STOP” switch was in
before the battery discharged, be especially careful when reconnecting
the battery.

When trouble arises
601
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

CAUTION
■ Avoiding battery fires or explosions
Observe the following precautions to prevent accidentally igniting the flammable gas that may be emitted from the battery:
● Make sure each jumper cable is connected to the correct terminal and that
it is not unintentionally in contact with any other than the intended terminal.
● Do not allow the + and - clamps of the jumper cables to come into contact
with each other.
● Do not smoke, use matches, cigarette lighters or allow open flame near
the battery.
■ Battery precautions
The battery contains poisonous and corrosive acidic electrolyte, while
related parts contain lead and lead compounds. Observe the following precautions when handling the battery:
● When working with the battery, always wear safety glasses and take care
not to allow any battery fluids (acid) to come into contact with skin, clothing
or the vehicle body.
● Do not lean over the battery.
● In the event that battery fluid comes into contact with the skin or eyes,
immediately wash the affected area with water and seek medical attention.
Place a wet sponge or cloth over the affected area until medical attention
can be received.
● Always wash your hands after handling the battery support, terminals, and
other battery-related parts.
● Do not allow children near the battery.

NOTICE
■ When handling jumper cables
When connecting the jumper cables, ensure that they do not become entangled in the cooling fans or belt.

602
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If your vehicle overheats
If your engine overheats:
STEP 1

Stop the vehicle in a safe place and turn off the air conditioning system.

STEP 2

Check to see if steam is coming out from under the hood.
If you see steam:
Stop the engine. Carefully lift the hood after the steam subsides and then restart the engine.
If you do not see steam:
Leave the engine running and carefully lift the hood.

STEP 3

Remove the engine compartment cover. (→P. 497)

STEP 4

Check to see if the cooling fan is operating.
If the fan is operating:
Wait until the temperature of the engine (shown on the
instrument panel) begins to fall and then stop the engine.
If the fan is not operating:
Stop the engine immediately and call your Toyota dealer.

CTH52AS043

603
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

When trouble arises

After the engine has cooled
down sufficiently, check the
engine coolant level and
inspect the radiator core (radiator) for any leaks.

STEP 5

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Add engine coolant if necessary.

STEP 6

Water can be used in an emergency if engine coolant is
unavailable. (→P. 616)

CTH52AS033

Have the vehicle inspected at the nearest Toyota dealer as soon as
possible.

■ Overheating
If you observe the following, your vehicle may be overheating:
● The engine coolant temperature gauge enters the red zone or a loss of
power is experienced.
● Steam comes out from under the hood.

CAUTION
■ To prevent an accident or injury when inspecting under the hood of
your vehicle
● If steam is seen coming from under the hood, do not open the hood until
the steam has subsided. The engine compartment may be very hot, causing serious injuries such as burns.
● Keep hands and clothing away from the fan and drive belt while the engine
is running.
● Do not loosen the radiator cap, or coolant reservoir cap while the engine
and radiator are hot.
Serious injury, such as burns, may result from hot coolant and steam
released under pressure.

604
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

NOTICE
■ When adding engine coolant
Wait until the engine has cooled down before adding engine coolant.
When adding coolant, do so slowly. Adding cool coolant to a hot engine too
quickly can cause damage to the engine.

When trouble arises
605
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If the vehicle becomes stuck
Carry out the following procedures if the tires spin or the vehicle
becomes stuck in mud, dirt or snow:
STEP 1

Stop the engine. Set the parking brake and shift the shift
lever to P.

STEP 2

Remove the mud, snow or sand from around the stuck tire.

STEP 3

Place wood, stones or some other material under the tires
to help provide traction.

STEP 4

Restart the engine.

STEP 5

Shift the shift lever to the D or R position and carefully apply
the accelerator to free the vehicle.
Turn off TRAC (TRC) and VSC if these functions are hampering
your attempts to free the vehicle. (→P. 255)

CAUTION
■ When attempting to free a stuck vehicle
If you choose to push the vehicle back and forth to free it, make sure the surrounding area is clear to avoid striking other vehicles, objects or people. The
vehicle may also lunge forward or lunge back suddenly as it becomes free.
Use extreme caution.
■ When shifting the shift lever
Be careful not to shift the shift lever with the accelerator pedal depressed.
This may lead to unexpected rapid acceleration of the vehicle that may
cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.

606
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

NOTICE
■ To avoid damage to the transmission and other components
● Avoid spinning the wheels and depressing the accelerator pedal more
than necessary.
● If the vehicle remains stuck even after these procedures are performed,
the vehicle may require towing to be freed.

When trouble arises
607
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

608
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

6-1. Specifications

Maintenance data (fuel, oil level, etc.)
Dimensions and weights
Overall length

189.8 in. (4820 mm)

Overall width
Overall height

75.8 in. (1925 mm)

70.1 in. (1780 mm)

Wheelbase
Tread

109.8 in. (2790 mm)
Front

63.2 in. (1605 mm)

Rear

63.2 in. (1605 mm)

Vehicle capacity weight
(Occupants + luggage)

825 lb. (370 kg) *2
1155 lb. (520 kg) *3
2.7 L 4-cylinder (2TR-FE) engine

Towing capacity
(trailer weight + cargo weight)

2000 lb. (907 kg)
4.0 L V6 (1GR-FE) engine
5000 lb. (2270 kg)

Luggage compartment load
capacity

970 lb. (445 kg) *2
670 lb. (309 kg) *3

*1: Unladen vehicle
*2: With 5 occupants
*3: With 7 occupants

610
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

6-1. Specifications

Vehicle identification
■ Vehicle identification number
The vehicle identification number (VIN) is the legal identifier for your
vehicle. This is the primary identification number for your Toyota. It is
used in registering the ownership of your vehicle.
This number is stamped on the
top left of the instrument panel.

CTH61AS001

This number is also on the Certification Label.

CTH61AS020

Vehicle specifications
611
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

6-1. Specifications

■ Engine number
2.7 L 4-cylinder (2TR-FE) engine
The engine number is stamped
on the engine block as shown.

CTH61AS003

4.0 L V6 (1GR-FE) engine
The engine number is stamped
on the engine block as shown.

CTH61AS004

612
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

6-1. Specifications

Engine
2.7 L 4-cylinder (2TR-FE) engine
Model

2TR-FE

Type

4-cylinder in line, 4-cycle, gasoline

Bore and stroke

3.74 × 3.74 in. (95.0 × 95.0 mm)

Displacement

164.4 cu.in. (2694 cm3)

Drive belt tension

Automatic adjustment

Valve clearance
(engine cold)

Automatic adjustment

4.0 L V6 (1GR-FE) engine
Model

1GR-FE

Type

6-cylinder V type, 4-cycle, gasoline

Bore and stroke

3.70 × 3.74 in. (94.0 × 95.0 mm)

Displacement

241.4 cu.in. (3956 cm3)

Valve clearance
(engine cold)

Automatic adjustment

Drive belt tension

Automatic adjustment

Fuel
6

Unleaded gasoline only

Octane rating

87 (Research octane number 91) or higher

Fuel tank capacity

23.0 gal. (87.0 L, 19.1 Imp. gal.)

613
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Vehicle specifications

Fuel type

6-1. Specifications

Lubrication system
Oil capacity
Drain and refill
(Reference)
With filter

Without filter

■ Engine oil selection
“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” is used in your Toyota vehicle. Use
Toyota approved “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent to satisfy
the following grade and viscosity.
Oil grade: ILSAC multigrade engine oil
Recommended viscosity: SAE 0W-20
SAE 0W-20 is the best choice for
good fuel economy and good
starting in cold weather.

Outside temperature

CTH61AS015

If SAE 0W-20 is not available,
SAE 5W-20 oil may be used.
However, it must be replaced
with SAE 0W-20 at the next oil
change.

The 0W portion of the oil viscosity rating indicates the characteristic of the
oil which allows cold startability. Oils with a lower value before the W allow
for easier starting of the engine in cold weather.
The 20 in 0W-20 indicates the oil viscosity when the oil is at its operating
temperature. An oil with a higher viscosity may be better suited if the vehicle is operated at high speeds, or under extreme load conditions.
614
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

6-1. Specifications

How to read oil container label:
The ILSAC (International Lubricant Standardization and Approval
Committee) Certification Mark is added to some oil containers to help
you select the oil you should use.

CTH61AS018

Vehicle specifications
615
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

6-1. Specifications

Cooling system

Capacity

2.7 L 4-cylinder (2TR-FE) engine
8.6 qt. (8.1 L, 7.1 Imp. qt.)
4.0 L V6 (1GR-FE) engine
11.1 qt. (10.5 L, 9.2 Imp. qt.)

Coolant type

Use either of the following:
• “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant”
• A similar high-quality ethylene glycolbased non-silicate, non-amine, nonnitrite, and non-borate coolant with longlife hybrid organic acid technology
Do not use plain water alone.

Ignition system
Spark plug
Make
Gap

DENSO SK20HR11
0.043 in. (1.1 mm)

NOTICE
■ Iridium-tipped spark plugs
Use only iridium-tipped spark plugs. Do not adjust the spark plug gap.

616
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

6-1. Specifications

Electrical system
Battery
Open voltage* at
68°F (20°C):

12.6 ⎯ 12.8 V Fully charged
12.2 ⎯ 12.4 V Half charged
11.8 ⎯ 12.0 V Discharged
(*: Voltage checked 20 minutes after the
engine and all the lights are turned off.)

Charging rates

5 A max.

Transfer (4WD models)

Oil capacity

Part-time 4WD models
1.1 qt. (1.0 L, 0.9 Imp. qt.)
Full-time 4WD models
1.5 qt. (1.4 L, 1.2 Imp. qt.)

Oil type*

Toyota Genuine Transfer gear oil LF or
equivalent

Recommended oil viscosity

SAE 75W

*: “Toyota Genuine Transfer Gear oil LF” is filled in your Toyota vehicle
at factory fill. Use Toyota approved “Toyota Genuine Transfer Gear oil
LF” or an equivalent of matching quality to satisfy the above specification. Please contact your Toyota dealer for further details.
6

Vehicle specifications
617
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

6-1. Specifications

Front differential (4WD models)

Oil capacity

Part-time 4WD models
1.6 qt. (1.55 L, 1.4 Imp. qt.)
Full-time 4WD models
1.5 qt. (1.40 L, 1.2 Imp. qt.)

Oil type and viscosity*

Toyota Genuine Differential gear oil LT
75W-85 GL-5 or equivalent

*: “Toyota Genuine Differential Gear Oil” is filled in your Toyota vehicle
at the factory. Use Toyota approved “Toyota Genuine Differential
Gear Oil” or an equivalent of matching quality to satisfy the above
specification. Please contact your Toyota dealer for further details.
Rear differential

Oil capacity

Vehicles without a rear differential lock
2.9 qt. (2.70 L, 2.4 Imp. qt.)
Vehicles with a rear differential lock
2.8 qt. (2.65 L, 2.3 Imp. qt.)

Oil type and viscosity*

Toyota Genuine Differential gear oil LT
75W-85 GL-5 or equivalent

618
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

6-1. Specifications

Automatic transmission

Fluid capacity*

2.7 L 4-cylinder (2TR-FE) engine
10.5 qt. (9.9 L, 8.7 Imp. qt.)
4.0 L V6 (1GR-FE) engine
11.3 qt. (10.7 L, 9.4 Imp. qt.)

Fluid type

Toyota Genuine ATF WS

*: The fluid capacity is a reference quantity. If replacement is necessary,
contact your Toyota dealer.
NOTICE
■ Transmission fluid type
Using transmission fluid other than “Toyota Genuine ATF WS” may cause
deterioration in shift quality, locking up of the transmission accompanied by
vibration and, ultimately, damage to the vehicle’s transmission.

Brakes
Pedal clearance

3.62 in. (92 mm) Min.

Pedal free play

Less than 0.04 ⎯ 0.24 in. (1 ⎯ 6 mm)

Brake pad wear limit

0.04 in. (1.0 mm)
0.04 in. (1.0 mm)

Parking brake pedal travel *

5 ⎯ 7 clicks

Fluid type

SAE J1703 or FMVSS No. 116 DOT 3

: Minimum pedal clearance when depressed with a force of 110 lbf (490 N, 50
kgf) while the engine is running.

*2: Parking brake pedal travel when depressed with a force of 67 lbf (300 N, 30
kgf).

619
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Vehicle specifications

Parking brake lining wear limit

6-1. Specifications

Chassis lubrication
Propeller shafts
Spider
Slide yoke

Lithium base chassis grease, NLGI No.2
Molybdenum-disulfide lithium base chassis grease, NLGI No.2 or lithium base multipurpose grease, NLGI No.2

Steering
Free play

Less than 1.2 in. (30 mm)

Power steering fluid type

Automatic transmission fluid DEXRON® II
or III

620
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

6-1. Specifications

Tires and wheels
2.7 L 4-cylinder (2TR-FE) engine
Tire size

P265/70R17 113S

Tire inflation pressure
(Recommended cold tire
inflation pressure)

Front:
33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm2 or bar)
Rear:
33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm2 or bar)
Spare:
33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm2 or bar)

Wheel size

17 × 7J

Wheel nut torque

83 ft•lbf (110 N•m, 11.5 kgf•m)

4.0 L V6 (1GR-FE) engine
Tire size

P265/70R17 113S, P245/60R20 107H

Tire inflation pressure
(Recommended cold tire
inflation pressure)

Front:
32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm2 or bar)
Rear:
32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm2 or bar)
Spare:
32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm2 or bar)

Wheel size

17 × 7J, 17 × 7 1/2J, 20 × 7J

Wheel nut torque

83 ft•lbf (110 N•m, 11.5 kgf•m)

Vehicle specifications
621
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

6-1. Specifications

Light bulbs
Light Bulbs

Bulb No.

Type

⎯
⎯

55
60

A
B

1156NA

Parking lights and front side
marker lights

⎯

Fog lights*

⎯

Rear turn signal lights

⎯

Back-up lights

⎯

License plate lights

⎯

7443

21/5

Outer foot lights*

⎯

Front personal/ front interior
lights

⎯

Rear interior light

⎯

Vanity lights

⎯

168

⎯

Headlights
Low beam
High beam
Front turn signal and daytime
running lights

Exterior

Stop/tail and rear side marker
lights

Interior

Door courtesy lights
Luggage compartment lights

If equipped

A:
B:
C:
D:
E:
F:

H11 halogen bulbs
HB3 halogen bulbs
Single end bulbs (amber)
Wedge base bulbs (clear)
Wedge base bulbs (amber)
Double end bulbs

622
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

6-1. Specifications

Fuel information
You must only use unleaded gasoline in your vehicle.
Select octane rating 87 (Research Octane Number 91) or higher. Use
of unleaded gasoline with an octane rating lower than 87 may result
in engine knocking. Persistent knocking can lead to engine damage.

At minimum, the gasoline you use should meet the specifications
of ASTM D4814 in the U.S.A. and CGSB3.5-M93 in Canada.

■ Fuel tank opening for unleaded gasoline
To help prevent incorrect fueling, your Toyota has a fuel tank opening that
only accommodates the special nozzle on unleaded fuel pumps.
■ Gasoline quality
In very few cases, driveability problems may be caused by the brand of gasoline you are using. If driveability problems persist, try changing the brand of
gasoline. If this does not correct the problem, consult your Toyota dealer.

Vehicle specifications
623
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

6-1. Specifications

■ Gasoline quality standards
● Automotive manufacturers in the U.S.A., Europe and Japan have developed a specification for fuel quality called the World-Wide Fuel Charter
(WWFC), which is expected to be applied worldwide.
● The WWFC consists of four categories that are based on required emission levels. In the U.S., category 4 has been adopted.
● The WWFC improves air quality by lowering emissions in vehicle fleets,
and improves customer satisfaction through better performance.
■ Recommendation of the use of gasoline containing detergent additives
● Toyota recommends the use of gasoline that contains detergent additives
to avoid the build-up of engine deposits.
● All gasoline sold in the U.S.A. contains detergent additives to clean and/
or keep clean intake systems.
■ Recommendation of the use of cleaner burning gasoline
Cleaner burning gasoline, including reformulated gasoline that contains oxygenates such as ethanol or MTBE (Methyl Tertiary Butyl Ether) is available in
many areas.
Toyota recommends the use of cleaner burning gasoline and appropriately
blended reformulated gasoline. These types of gasoline provide excellent
vehicle performance, reduce vehicle emissions and improve air quality.
■ Non-recommendation of the use of blended gasoline
● Toyota allows the use of oxygenate blended gasoline where the oxygenate content is up to 10% ethanol or 15% MTBE.
● If you use gasohol in your vehicle, be sure that it has an octane rating no
lower than 87.
● Toyota does not recommend the use of gasoline containing methanol.

624
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

6-1. Specifications

■ Non-recommendation of the use of gasoline containing MMT
Some gasoline contains an octane enhancing additive called MMT (Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl).
Toyota does not recommend the use of gasoline that contains MMT. If fuel
containing MMT is used, your emission control system may be adversely
affected.
The malfunction indicator lamp on the instrument cluster may come on. If
this happens, contact your Toyota dealer for service.
■ If your engine knocks
● Consult your Toyota dealer.
● You may occasionally notice light knocking for a short time while accelerating or driving uphill. This is normal and there is no need for concern.

NOTICE
■ Notice on fuel quality
● Do not use improper fuels. If improper fuels are used, the engine will be
damaged.
● Do not use leaded gasoline.
Leaded gasoline can cause damage to your vehicle’s three-way catalytic
converters causing the emission control system to malfunction.
● Do not use gasohol other than the type previously stated.
Other gasohol may cause fuel system damage or vehicle performance
problems.

■ Fuel-related poor driveability
If poor driveability is encountered after using a different type of fuel (poor hot
starting, vaporization, engine knocking, etc.), discontinue the use of that type
of fuel.
■ When refueling with gasohol
Take care not to spill gasohol. It can damage your vehicle’s paint.

625
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Vehicle specifications

● Using unleaded gasoline with an octane number or rating lower than the
level previously started will cause persistent heavy knocking.
At worst, this will lead to engine damage.

6-1. Specifications

Tire information
Typical tire symbols

CTH61AS021

Tire size

(→P. 628)

Summer tire or all season tires

(→P. 517)

An all season tire has “M+S” on the sidewall. A tire not marked
“M+S” is a summer tire.

Uniform tire quality grading
For details, see “Uniform Tire Quality Grading” that follows.

DOT and Tire Identification Number (TIN)

(→P. 627)

Tire ply composition and materials
Plies are layers of rubber-coated parallel cords. Cords are the
strands which form the plies in a tire.

Location of treadwear indicators

(→P. 514)

Load limit at maximum cold tire inflation pressure

(→P. 516)

626
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

6-1. Specifications

Maximum cold tire inflation pressure

(→P. 621)

This means the pressure to which a tire may be inflated.

TUBELESS or TUBE TYPE
A tubeless tire does not have a tube and air is directly put into the
tire. A tube type tire has a tube inside the tire and the tube maintains the air pressure.

Radial tires or bias-ply tires
A radial tire has “RADIAL” on the sidewall. A tire not marked “RADIAL”
is a bias-ply tire.

Typical DOT and Tire Identification Number (TIN)
DOT symbol*
Tire Identification
(TIN)

Number

Tire manufacturer’s identification mark
Tire size code
CTH61AS008

Manufacturer’s optional tire
type code (3 or 4 letters)
Manufacturing week
Manufacturing year

*: The

627
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Vehicle specifications

DOT symbol certifies
that the tire conforms to
applicable Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standards.

6-1. Specifications

Tire size
■ Typical tire size information
The illustration indicates typical tire size.
Tire use
(P = Passenger car,
T = Temporary use)
Section width (millimeters)
Aspect ratio
(tire height to section width)
CTH61AS009

Tire construction code
(R = Radial, D = Diagonal)
Wheel diameter (inches)
Load index (2 digits or 3 digits)
Speed symbol
(alphabet with one letter)

■ Tire dimensions
Section width
Tire height
Wheel diameter

628
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

6-1. Specifications

Tire section names
Bead
Sidewall
Shoulder
Tread
Belt
Inner liner
Reinforcing rubber
Carcass
Rim lines
Bead wires
Chafer
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
This information has been prepared in accordance with regulations
issued by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration of the
U.S. Department of Transportation.
It provides the purchasers and/or prospective purchasers of Toyota
vehicles with information on uniform tire quality grading.
Your Toyota dealer will help answer any questions you may have as
you read this information.

■ DOT quality grades

For example: Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A

629
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Vehicle specifications

All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal Safety
Requirements in addition to these grades. Quality grades can be
found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder
and maximum section width.

6-1. Specifications

■ Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear
rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half (1 - 1/2)
times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions
of their use. Performance may differ significantly from the norm due
to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in
road characteristics and climate.

■ Traction AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B and C,
and they represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as
measured under controlled conditions on specified government
test surfaces of asphalt and concrete.
A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.
Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on braking
(straight ahead) traction tests and does not include cornering (turning) traction.

■ Temperature A, B, C
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to
dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to
degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead
to sudden tire failure.
Grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger
car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
No. 109.
Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.

630
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

6-1. Specifications

Warning: The temperature grades of a tire assume that it is properly
inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.

Glossary of tire terminology
Tire related term

Meaning
Tire pressure when the vehicle has been
parked for three hours or more, or has not
been driven more than 1 mile or 1.5 km under
that condition

Maximum inflation
pressure

The maximum cold inflated pressure to which a
tire may be inflated, shown on the sidewall of
the tire

Recommended
inflation pressure

Cold tire inflation pressure recommended by a
manufacturer.

Accessory weight

The combined weight (in excess of those standard items which may be replaced) of automatic transmission, power steering, power
brakes, power windows, power seats, radio
and heater, to the extent that these items are
available as factory-installed equipment
(whether installed or not)

Curb weight

The weight of a motor vehicle with standard
equipment, including the maximum capacity of
fuel, oil and coolant, and if so equipped, air
conditioning and additional weight optional
engine

Maximum loaded
vehicle weight

The sum of:
(a) Curb weight
(b) Accessory weight
(c) Vehicle capacity weight
(d) Production options weight

631
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Vehicle specifications

Cold tire inflation
pressure

6-1. Specifications

Tire related term

Meaning

Normal occupant
weight

150 lb. (68 kg) times the number of occupants
specified in the second column of Table 1* that
follows

Occupant distribution

Distribution of occupants in a vehicle as specified in the third column of Table 1* below

Production options
weight

The combined weight of installed regular production options weighing over 5 lb. (2.3 kg) in
excess of the standard items which they
replace, not previously considered in curb
weight or accessory weight, including heavy
duty brakes, ride levelers, roof rack, heavy duty
battery, and special trim

Rim

A metal support for a tire or a tire and tube
assembly upon which the tire beads are seated

Rim diameter
(Wheel diameter)

Nominal diameter of the bead seat

Rim size designation

Rim diameter and width

Rim type designation

The industry manufacturer’s designation for a
rim by style or code

Rim width

Nominal distance between rim flanges

Vehicle capacity
weight (Total load
capacity)

The rated cargo and luggage load plus 150 lb.
(68 kg) times the vehicle’s designated seating
capacity

Vehicle maximum load
on the tire

The load on an individual tire that is determined
by distributing to each axle its share of the
maximum loaded vehicle weight, and dividing
by two

632
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

6-1. Specifications

Tire related term

Meaning

Weather side

The surface area of the rim not covered by the
inflated tire

Bead

The part of the tire that is made of steel wires,
wrapped or reinforced by ply cords and that is
shaped to fit the rim

Bead separation

A breakdown of the bond between components
in the bead

Bias ply tire

A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that
extend to the beads are laid at alternate angles
substantially less than 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread

Carcass

The tire structure, except tread and sidewall
rubber which, when inflated, bears the load

Chunking

The breaking away of pieces of the tread or
sidewall

Cord

The strands forming the plies in the tire

Cord separation

The parting of cords from adjacent rubber compounds

Cracking

Any parting within the tread, sidewall, or innerliner of the tire extending to cord material

A pneumatic tire with an inverted flange tire
and rim system in which the rim is designed
with rim flanges pointed radially inward and the
tire is designed to fit on the underside of the
rim in a manner that encloses the rim flanges
inside the air cavity of the tire

633
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Vehicle specifications

Vehicle normal load
on the tire

The load on an individual tire that is determined
by distributing to each axle its share of curb
weight, accessory weight, and normal occupant weight (distributed in accordance with
Table 1* below), and dividing it by two

6-1. Specifications

Tire related term

Meaning

Extra load tire

A tire designed to operate at higher loads and
at higher inflation pressures than the corresponding standard tire

Groove

The space between two adjacent tread ribs

Innerliner

The layer(s) forming the inside surface of a
tubeless tire that contains the inflating medium
within the tire

Innerliner separation

The parting of the innerliner from cord material
in the carcass

Intended outboard
sidewall

(a)The sidewall that contains a whitewall, bears
white lettering, or bears manufacturer, brand,
and/or model name molding that is higher or
deeper than the same molding on the other
sidewall of the tire, or
(b)The outward facing sidewall of an asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that must
always face outward when mounted on a vehicle

Light truck (LT) tire

A tire designated by its manufacturer as primarily intended for use on lightweight trucks or
multipurpose passenger vehicles

Load rating

The maximum load that a tire is rated to carry
for a given inflation pressure

Maximum load rating

The load rating for a tire at the maximum permissible inflation pressure for that tire

Maximum permissible
inflation pressure

The maximum cold inflation pressure to which
a tire may be inflated

Measuring rim

The rim on which a tire is fitted for physical
dimension requirements

Open splice

Any parting at any junction of tread, sidewall, or
innerliner that extends to cord material

Outer diameter

The overall diameter of an inflated new tire

634
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

6-1. Specifications

Tire related term

Meaning

Passenger car tire

A tire intended for use on passenger cars, multipurpose passenger vehicles, and trucks, that
have a gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR) of
10,000 lb. or less.

Ply

A layer of rubber-coated parallel cords

Ply separation

A parting of rubber compound between adjacent plies

Pneumatic tire

A mechanical device made of rubber, chemicals, fabric and steel or other materials, that,
when mounted on an automotive wheel, provides the traction and contains the gas or fluid
that sustains the load

Radial ply tire

A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that
extend to the beads are laid at substantially 90
degrees to the centerline of the tread

Reinforced tire

A tire designed to operate at higher loads and
at higher inflation pressures than the corresponding standard tire

Section width

The linear distance between the exteriors of
the sidewalls of an inflated tire, excluding elevations due to labeling, decoration, or protective bands

Sidewall

That portion of a tire between the tread and
bead

Sidewall separation

The parting of the rubber compound from the
cord material in the sidewall

635
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Vehicle specifications

Overall width

The linear distance between the exteriors of
the sidewalls of an inflated tire, including elevations due to labeling, decorations, or protective
bands or ribs

6-1. Specifications

Tire related term

Snow tire

Meaning
A tire that attains a traction index equal to or
greater than 110, compared to the ASTM E1136 Standard Reference Test Tire, when
using the snow traction test as described in
ASTM F-1805-00, Standard Test Method for
Single Wheel Driving Traction in a Straight Line
on Snow-and Ice-Covered Surfaces, and which
is marked with an Alpine Symbol (
least one sidewall

) on at

Test rim

The rim on which a tire is fitted for testing, and
may be any rim listed as appropriate for use
with that tire

Tread

That portion of a tire that comes into contact
with the road

Tread rib

A tread section running circumferentially
around a tire

Tread separation

Pulling away of the tread from the tire carcass

Treadwear indicators
(TWI)

The projections within the principal grooves
designed to give a visual indication of the
degrees of wear of the tread

Wheel-holding fixture

The fixture used to hold the wheel and tire
assembly securely during testing

*: Table 1 ⎯ Occupant loading and distribution for vehicle normal load
for various designated seating capacities

636
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

6-1. Specifications

Designated seating
capacity, Number of
occupants

Vehicle normal load,
Number of occupants

Occupant distribution in
a normally loaded
vehicle

2 through 4

2 in front

5 through 10

2 in front, 1 in second
seat

11 through 15

2 in front, 1 in second
seat, 1 in third seat, 1
in fourth seat

16 through 20

2 in front, 2 in second
seat, 2 in third seat, 1
in fourth seat

Vehicle specifications
637
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

6-2. Customization

Customizable features
Your vehicle includes a variety of electronic features that can be personalized to suit your preferences. Programming these preferences
requires specialized equipment and may be performed by your Toyota dealer.
Some function settings are changed simultaneously with other functions
being customized. Contact your Toyota dealer for further details.

Item

Smart key
system and
wireless
remote control
(→P. 33, 47)

Default setting

Customized
setting

Operation signal
(Emergency flashers)

Off

Operation signal
(Buzzer)

Off

Open door warning
function (when locking
the vehicle)

Off

Automatic door locking
function (if a door is not
opened after being
unlocked)

Off

Function

Time elapsed before
automatic door lock
function is activated if
door is not opened after
being unlocked
Smart key
system
(→P. 33)
Wireless
remote control
(→P. 47)

30 seconds
60 seconds
120 seconds

Smart key system

Off

Wireless remote control

Off

Panic function

Off

Level 7

OFF to level 6

Operation signal
(Buzzer volume)

638
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

6-2. Customization

Item

Door lock
(→P. 51,
596)

Power windows
(→P. 91)

Default setting

Customized
setting

Speed-detecting automatic door lock function

Off

Shifting the shift lever to
position other than P
locks all doors

Off

Shifting the shift lever to
P unlocks all doors

Off

Opening driver’s door
unlocks all doors

Off

Mechanical key linked
operation (close)

Off

Mechanical key linked
operation (open)

Off

Wireless remote control
linked operation (open)

Off

Wireless remote control
linked operation signal
(Buzzer)

Off

Light sensor sensitivity

Level 3

Levels 1 to 5
Off

Time elapsed before
headlights automatically turn off after doors
are closed

30 seconds

Ambient light level at
which instrument illumination begins to dim
(meter lights etc.)

Standard

-2 (darker) to
2 (brighter)

Ambient light level at
which instrument illumination begins to
brighten (meter lights
etc.)

Standard

-2 (darker) to
2 (brighter)

60 seconds

90 seconds

639
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Vehicle specifications

Automatic
light control
system
(→P. 198)

Function

6-2. Customization

Item

Function
Time period before
lights turn off

Illumination
(→P. 413)

Default setting
15 seconds

Customized
setting
7.5 seconds
30 seconds

Vehicles without a
smart key system:
Operation after the
engine switch is turned
to the “LOCK” position
Vehicles with a smart
key system: Operation
after the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch is
turned OFF

Off

Operation when the
doors are unlocked

Off

Vehicles with a smart
key system: Operation
when you approach the
vehicle with the electronic key on your person (When the interior
light switch [ON/DOOR/
OFF] is DOOR)

Off

Footwell lights

Off

Overhead courtesy light

Off

Interior light control

Off

Interior light dimmer
control while driving

Off

640
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

6-2. Customization

Item

Outer foot
lights
(if equipped)
(→P. 413)

Default setting

Customized
setting

Vehicles with a smart
key system: Operation
when you approach the
vehicle with the electronic key on your person

Off

Operation when the
doors are unlocked
using the wireless
remote control, key or
entry function

Off

Operation when the
doors are unlocked
using the door lock
switch

Off

Time period before
lights turn off

15 seconds

7.5 seconds
30 seconds

Lighting control

Off

Mechanical key linked
operation

Off

Mechanical key linked
operation

Open and close

Open only
Close only

Linked operation of
components when door
key is used

Slide only

Tilt only

Wireless remote control
linked operation (open
only)

Off

Linked operation of
components when wireless remote control is
used (open only)

Slide only

Tilt only

Vehicle specifications

Moon roof
(→P. 98)

Function

641
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

6-2. Customization

Item

Rear window
wiper and
washer
(→P. 207)

Power back
window
(→P. 94)

Function

Default setting

Customized
setting

Wiper operates automatically when washer
is operated

Off

Drip prevention function

Off
2 seconds

Wiper operation interval

3 seconds

4 seconds
5 seconds
4 seconds

Time elapsed before
the rear wiper storage
function activates

3 seconds

Vehicles without a
smart key system:
Close operation linked
to door lock operation
using a key

Off

Vehicles without a
smart key system:
Open operation linked
to door unlock operation using a key

Off

Vehicles with a smart
key system: Close
operation linked to door
lock operation using the
switch

Off

Vehicles with a smart
key system: Open operation linked to door
unlock operation using
the switch

Off

642
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

5 seconds
6 seconds

6-2. Customization

Item

Power back
window
(→P. 94)

Function
Vehicles with a smart
key system: Time
required to press and
hold the switch before
the window begins to
open/close

Intuitive
parking
assist
(→P. 213)

Buzzer volume

Seat belt
reminder
(→P. 568)

Vehicle speed linked
seat belt reminder
buzzer

Default setting

Customized
setting
1 second

0.8 seconds

1.2 seconds
1.4 seconds

Max.

Min. to Max.

Off

Vehicle specifications
643
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

6-3. Initialization

Items to initialize
The following item must be initialized for normal system operation in
cases such as after the battery is reconnected, or maintenance is
performed on the vehicle.

Item
Maintenance data

When to initialize

Reference

After the maintenance is performed.

P. 485

644
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a
crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA)
in addition to notifying Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A., Inc.
(Toll-free: 1-800-331-4331).
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation,
and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it
may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your
dealer, or Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A., Inc.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline
toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to
http://www.safercar.gov ; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA,
1200 New Jersey Ave, S.E., Washington, DC 20590. You can
also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.

646
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Seat belt instructions for Canadian owners (in French)
The following is a French explanation of seat belt instructions
extracted from the seat belt section in this manual.
See the seat belt section for more detailed seat belt instructions in
English.

Utilisation correcte des ceintures de sécurité
● Déroulez la sangle diagonale
de telle sorte qu'elle passe
bien sur l'épaule, sans pour
autant être en contact avec
votre cou ou glisser de votre
épaule.
CTH13AS038

● Placez la sangle abdominale
le plus bas possible sur les
hanches.
● Réglez la position du dossier
de siège. Asseyez-vous le dos
le plus droit possible et calezvous bien dans le siège.
● Ne vrillez pas la ceinture de
sécurité.

For owners
647
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Entretien et soin
■ Ceintures de sécurité
Nettoyez avec un chiffon ou une éponge humectée d'eau savonneuse tiède.
Profitez de l'occasion pour vérifier régulièrement que les ceintures ne sont
pas effilochées, entaillées, ou ne paraissent pas exagérément usées.

ATTENTION
■ Détérioration et usure des ceintures de sécurité
Inspectez les ceintures de sécurité périodiquement. Contrôlez qu'elles ne
sont pas entaillées, effilochées, et que leurs ancrages ne sont pas
desserrés. N'utilisez pas une ceinture de sécurité défectueuse avant qu'elle
ne soit remplacée. Une ceinture de sécurité défectueuse n'apporte aucune
garantie de protection de l'occupant en cas d'accident.

648
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Abbreviation list

Abbreviation/Acronym list
ABBREVIATIONS

MEANING

2WD

2 Wheel Drive

4WD

4 Wheel Drive

ABS

Anti-lock Brake System

ACC

Accessory

AI-SHIFT

Artificial Intelligence Shift control

ALR

Automatic Locking Retractor

A-TRAC

Active traction control system

AUTO LSD

Automatic Limited Slip Differential

AUX

Auxiliary

CRS

Child Restraint System

DAC

Downhill assist control system

ECU

Electronic Control Unit

EDR

Event Data Recorder

ELR

Emergency Locking Retractor

GAWR

Gross Axle Weight Rating

GCWR

Gross Combination Weight Rating

GVWR

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating

I/M

Emission Inspection and Maintenance

KDSS

Kinetic Dynamic Suspension System

LATCH

Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children

LED

Light Emitting Diode

LSD

Limited Slip Differential

MAX

Maximum

MIN

Minimum

MMT

Methylcy clopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl

M+S

Mud and Snow

MTBE

Methyl Tertiary Butyl Ether

650
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Abbreviation list

ABBREVIATIONS

MEANING

OBD

On Board Diagnostics

RSCA

Roll Sensing of Curtain Shield airbag

SRS

Supplemental Restraint System

TIN

Tire Identification Number

TPMS

Tire Pressure Warning System

TRAC/TRC

Traction Control

VIN

Vehicle Identification Number

VSC

Vehicle Stability Control

651
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Alphabetical index

Alphabetical index
A A/C.....................................296, 302
ABS ...........................................253
Accessory meter ......................194
Active head restraints ...............62
Active traction control.............230
Air conditioning filter...............526
Air conditioning system
Air conditioning filter..............526
Automatic air conditioning
system ................................302
Manual air conditioning
system ................................296
Airbags
Airbag operating conditions...117
Airbag precautions for your
child ....................................121
Airbag warning light...............566
Curtain shield airbag
operating conditions............117
Curtain shield airbag
precautions .........................121
Front passenger occupant
classification system ...........129
General airbag precautions...121
Locations of airbags ..............114
Modification and disposal
of airbags ............................126
Proper driving posture...112, 121
Roll sensing of curtain shield
airbags off switch ................127
Side airbag operating
conditions............................117
Side airbag precautions ........121
SRS airbags ..........................114

652
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Alarm......................................... 109
Antenna .................................... 321
Anti-lock brake system ........... 253
Armrest ..................................... 448
Audio input............................... 360
Audio remote controls ............ 361
Audio system
Antenna................................. 321
Audio input ............................ 360
AUX adapter ......................... 360
CD player/changer ................ 324
iPod®..................................... 341
MP3/WMA disc ..................... 333
Optimal use........................... 355
Portable music player ........... 360
Radio..................................... 317
Steering wheel audio
switch.................................. 361
Type ...................................... 313
USB memory......................... 348
AUTO LSD system ................... 232
Automatic air conditioning
system .................................... 302
Automatic light control
system .................................... 198
Automatic transmission
Automatic transmission......... 173
If the shift lever cannot be
shifted from P ..................... 592
S mode.................................. 176
AUX adapter ............................. 360
Auxiliary box ............................ 422

Alphabetical index

B Back door
Back door ............................... 56
Back window .......................... 94
Smart key system................... 33
Wireless remote control.......... 47
Back-up lights
Replacing light bulbs ............ 542
Wattage ................................ 622
Back window ............................. 94
Battery
Checking .............................. 509
If the vehicle has a
discharged battery ............ 598
Preparing and checking
before winter ...................... 275
Bluetooth® audio..................... 364
Bluetooth® phone ................... 380
Bottle holder ............................ 427
Brake
Fluid...................................... 505
Parking brake ....................... 180
Brake assist ............................. 253
Break-in tips ............................ 155
Brightness control
Instrument light control ......... 187

C Care
Exterior ................................. 478
Interior .................................. 481
Seat belts ............................. 482
Cargo capacity ........................ 267
Cargo hooks ............................ 456
Cargo net hooks...................... 457
CD player/changer .................. 324
Center differential lock ........... 226
Chains ...................................... 277
Child-protectors ........................ 53

Child restraint system
Booster seats, definition........135
Booster seats, installation .....139
Convertible seats,
definition .............................135
Convertible seats,
installation...........................139
Front passenger occupant
classification system ...........129
Infant seats, definition ...........135
Infant seats, installation.........139
Installing CRS with
LATCH system....................141
Installing CRS with
seat belts ............................144
Installing CRS with top
straps ..................................147
Child safety
Airbag precautions ................121
Battery precautions .......511, 602
Child-protectors.......................53
Child restraint system............135
How your child should wear
the seat belt ..........................82
Installing child restraints........139
Moon roof precautions ..........101
Power window lock switch.......91
Power window precautions .....93
Removed key battery
precautions .........................530
Seat belt extender
precautions ...........................84
Seat belt precautions ..............83
Seat heater precautions ........446
Cleaning
Exterior..................................478
Interior ...................................481
Seat belts ..............................482

653
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Alphabetical index

Clock .........................................431
Coin holder ...............................419
Compass...................................450
Condenser ................................504
Console box .............................418
Cooling system
Engine overheating ...............603
Crawl Control ...........................241
Cruise control...........................209
Cup holder ................................423
Curtain shield airbags .............114
Customizable features.............638

D Daytime running light
system ....................................202
Defogger
Rear window .........................310
Side mirrors...........................310
Dimension.................................610
Dinghy towing ..........................293
Display
Trip information .....................195
Do-it-yourself maintenance.....491
Door courtesy lights
Door courtesy lights ..............413
Wattage.................................622
Door lock
Back door ..........................33, 56
Side door...........................33, 51
Wireless remote control ..........47
Doors
Back door ..........................33, 56
Door glasses ...........................91
Side door...........................33, 51
Side mirrors.............................89
Downhill assist control
system ....................................238
Driver’s seat belt reminder
light .........................................568

654
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Driving
Break-in tips ..........................155
Correct posture ..................... 112
Driving assist systems .......... 253
Off-road precautions ............. 262
Procedures............................ 154
Winter driving tips ................. 275

E Electronic key
If your electronic key
battery is depleted ...... 528, 596
Emergency flashers
Switch ................................... 554
Emergency, in case of
If the electronic key does
not operate properly ........... 596
If the engine will not start ...... 590
If the shift lever cannot be
shifted from P ..................... 592
If the vehicle has a
discharged battery ............. 598
If the warning buzzer
sounds ................................ 565
If the warning light turns on... 565
If you cannot operate back
door opener ........................ 595
If you have a flat tire ............. 578
If you lose your keys ............. 594
If you think something is
wrong.................................. 561
If your vehicle becomes
stuck ................................... 606
If your vehicle needs to be
towed .................................. 555
If your vehicle overheats ....... 603

Alphabetical index

Engine
Compartment........................ 495
Engine switch ............... 164, 167
Hood..................................... 494
How to start
the engine .................. 164, 167
Identification number ............ 611
If the engine will not start...... 590
Ignition switch............... 164, 167
Overheating.......................... 603
Engine compartment cover.... 497
Engine coolant
Capacity ............................... 616
Checking .............................. 503
Preparing and checking
before winter ...................... 275
Engine coolant temperature
gauge ..................................... 182
Engine immobilizer system.... 106
Engine oil
Capacity ............................... 614
Checking .............................. 498
Preparing and checking
before winter ...................... 275
Engine oil maintenance
data ........................................ 501
Engine switch .................. 164, 167
Event data recorder ................ 563

F Floor mat...................................449
Fluid
Brake.....................................505
Power steering ......................507
Washer..................................512
Fog lights
Replacing light bulbs .............541
Switch....................................204
Wattage.................................622
Four-wheel drive
system ............................223, 226
Front passenger occupant
classification system ............129
Front passenger’s seat
belt reminder light .................568
Front seats
Adjustment ..............................61
Front side marker light
Replacing light bulbs .............541
Switch....................................198
Wattage.................................622
Front turn signal lights
Replacing light bulbs .............541
Switch....................................179
Wattage.................................622
Fuel
Capacity ................................613
Fuel gauge ............................182
Fuel pump shut off system ....562
Gas station information .........664
Information ............................623
Refueling ...............................102
Type ......................................613
Fuel door...................................102
Fuel filler door ..........................102
Fuel pump shut off
system ....................................562
Fuses.........................................531

655
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Alphabetical index

G Garage door opener.................462
Gas station information...........664
Gauges......................................182
Glove box..................................417
Grocery bag hooks ..................459

H Hands-free system

J Jack

(for cellular phone) ................380
Hazard lights
Switch....................................554
Head restraints
Adjusting .................................76
Headlights
Replacing light bulbs .............541
Switch....................................198
Wattage.................................622
Heaters
Seat heaters..........................446
Side mirrors...........................310
Hill-start assist control ............253
Hood..........................................494
Hooks
Cargo hook............................456
Cargo net hooks....................457
Grocery bag hooks................459
Horn...........................................181

Interior lights
Interior lights ......................... 413
Switch ................................... 414
Wattage................................. 622
Intuitive parking assist............ 213

I/M test.......................................490
Identification
Engine ...................................611
Vehicle ..................................611
Ignition switch..................164, 167
Illuminated entry system.........415
Indicator lights .........................189
Initialization
Items to initialize....................644
Inside rear view mirror ..............87
Instrument panel light
control ....................................187

656
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Vehicle-equipped jack........... 578
Jack handle .............................. 578

K KDSS......................................... 253
Keyless entry .............................47
Keys
Electronic key..........................30
Engine switch................ 164, 167
If the electronic key does
not operate properly ........... 596
If you lose your keys ............. 594
Ignition switch ............... 164, 167
Key number.............................30
Keyless entry ..........................47
Keys ........................................30
Mechanical key .......................30
Wireless remote control key....47

L Language
Audio..................................... 315
Licence plate lights
Replacing light bulbs............. 541
Wattage................................. 622
Light bulbs
Replacing .............................. 541
Wattage................................. 622

Alphabetical index

Lights
Door courtesy lights.............. 413
Emergency flasher switch .... 554
Engine switch light................ 413
Fog light switch..................... 204
Footwell lights....................... 413
Hazard light switch ............... 554
Headlight switch ................... 198
Inside door handle lights ...... 413
Interior light switch................ 414
Luggage compartment
lights..................................... 57
Outer foot lights .................... 413
Personal light switch............. 414
Replacing light bulbs ............ 541
Shift lever light...................... 413
Turn signal lever................... 179
Vanity lights .......................... 430
Wattage ................................ 622
Limited slip differential........... 253
Load capacity .......................... 273
Lock steering column ..... 165, 170
Luggage compartment
features.................................. 456

M Maintenance
Do-it-yourself
maintenance ...................... 491
General maintenance ........... 486
Maintenance data................. 610
Maintenance requirements... 484
Manual air conditioning
system ................................... 296
Meter
Accessory meter................... 194
Instrument panel light
control ................................ 187
Meters .................................. 182

Mirrors
Inside rear view mirror.............87
Side mirror heaters................310
Side mirrors.............................89
Vanity mirrors ........................430
Moon roof ...................................98
MP3 disc ...................................333
Multi Terrain ABS.....................253
Multi-terrain Select...................245

N Noise from under vehicle ..........24
O Odometer ..................................182
Off-road precautions ...............262
Oil
Engine oil ..............................498
Opener
Fuel filler door .......................102
Hood......................................494
Outside rear view mirrors
Adjusting and folding...............89
Outside temperature
display ....................................433
Overhead console....................422
Overheating, Engine ................603

P Parking brake ...........................180
Parking lights
Replacing light bulbs .............541
Switch....................................198
Wattage.................................622
Party mode switch ...................359
Pen holder ................................421
Personal lights
Switch....................................414
Wattage.................................622
Power back window...................94
Power outlets ...................436, 439
Power steering
Fluid ......................................507
Power windows ..........................91

657
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Alphabetical index

R Radiator ....................................504
Radio .........................................317
Rear differential lock
system ....................................235
Rear seats
Adjustment ..............................65
Folding down...............67, 69, 72
Rear step bumper ......................57
Rear turn signal lights
Replacing light bulbs .............541
Wattage.................................622
Rear view monitor system ......218
Rear window...............................94
Rear window defogger ............310
Rear window wiper ..................207
Replacing
Fuses ....................................531
Key battery ............................528
Light bulbs.............................541
Tires ......................................578
Reporting safety defects
for U.S. owners ......................646
Roll sensing of curtain
shield airbags off switch.......127
Roof luggage carrier................267

S Safety Connect.........................469
Seat belts
Adjusting the seat belt.............79
Automatic Locking
Retractor ...............................81
Child restraint system
installation...........................139
Cleaning and maintaining
the seat belts ......................482
Emergency Locking
Retractor ...............................81
How to wear your seat belt......79
How your child should wear
the seat belt ..........................82

658
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Pregnant women,
proper seat belt use..............81
Reminder light....................... 568
Seat belt extenders .................82
Seat belt pretensioners ...........80
Seat heaters ............................. 446
Seating capacity ...................... 273
Seats
Adjustment ........................ 61, 65
Adjustment precautions .... 64, 75
Child seats/child restraint
system installation .............. 139
Cleaning................................ 481
Head restraints........................76
Properly sitting in the seat.....112
Seat heaters..........................446
Service reminder
indicators .............................. 189
Shift lever
Automatic transmission......... 173
Front-wheel drive .................. 223
If the shift lever cannot be
shifted from P ..................... 592
Shift lock system ..................... 592
Side airbags ............................. 114
Side marker lights
Replacing light bulbs............. 541
Switch ................................... 198
Wattage................................. 622
Side mirrors
Adjusting and folding...............89
Slide deck ................................. 459
Smart key system
Entry function ..........................33
Starting the engine................ 167
“SOS” button ........................... 469
Spare tire
Inflation pressure .................. 621
Storage location .................... 578
Spark plug ................................ 616

Alphabetical index

Specifications.......................... 610
Speech command switch ....... 385
Speedometer ........................... 182
Steering
Column lock release..... 165, 170
Fluid...................................... 507
Steering wheel
Adjustment ............................. 86
Audio switches ..................... 361
Stop lights
Replacing light bulbs ............ 541
Wattage ................................ 622
Storage compartment ............. 458
Storage feature........................ 416
Storage precautions ............... 270
Stuck
If your vehicle becomes
stuck................................... 606
Sun visors................................ 429
Sunshade
Roof........................................ 98
Switch
Emergency flasher switch .... 554
Engine switch ............... 164, 167
Fog light switch..................... 204
Hazard light switch ............... 554
Ignition switch............... 164, 167
Light switches....................... 198
Power back window switch..... 94
Power door lock switch........... 52
Power window switch ............. 91
Rear window wiper and
washer switch .................... 207
Window lock switch ................ 91
Wiper and washer switch ..... 205

T Tachometer
Tachometer ...........................182
Tail lights
Replacing light bulbs .............541
Switch....................................198
Wattage.................................622
Talk switch................................385
Telephone switch.....................385
Theft deterrent system
Alarm.....................................109
Engine immobilizer system ...106
Theft prevention labels............111
Tire inflation pressure .............520
Tire information
Glossary ................................631
Size .......................................628
Tire identification number......627
Uniform tire quality grading ...629
Tires
Chains ...................................275
Checking ...............................514
If you have a flat tire..............578
Inflation pressure...................520
Inflation pressure sensor.......514
Information ............................626
Replacing ..............................578
Rotating tires .........................514
Size .......................................621
Snow tires .............................275
Spare tire...............................578
Tissue pocket ...........................420
Tools .........................................578
Total load capacity...................273
Towing
Dinghy towing........................293
Emergency towing.................555
Trailer towing.........................280
TRAC (TRC) ..............................253
Traction control........................253
Trip information .......................194
Trip meter .................................182

659
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Alphabetical index

Turn signal lights
Replacing light bulbs .............541
Switch....................................179
Wattage.................................622

V Valet key .....................................30
Vanity lights
Vanity lights...........................430
Wattage.................................622
Vanity mirrors...........................430
Vehicle identification
number ...................................611
Vehicle stability control...........253
VSC............................................253

W Warning buzzers
Brake system ........................565
Key reminder.........................572
Open door ............................567
Open moon roof reminder .....572
Seat belt reminder.................568
Warning lights
Anti-lock brake system ..........567
Automatic transmission
fluid temperature.................568
Brake system ........................565
Charging system ...................566
Engine oil pressure ...............566
Engine oil replacement..........569
KDSS ....................................567
Low fuel level ........................568
Low washer fluid ...................568
Malfunction indicator lamp ....566
Open door .............................567
Power steering ......................567
Pretensioners ........................566
Seat belt reminder.................568
Smart key system..................570
SRS airbags ..........................566
Tire pressure .........................568
Unengaged “Park”.................567

660
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Washer
Checking ............................... 512
Preparing and checking
before winter....................... 275
Switch ........................... 205, 207
Washing and waxing ............... 478
Weight
Cargo capacity ...................... 267
Load limits............................. 273
Weight................................... 610
Wheels ...................................... 524
Window glasses .................. 91, 94
Window lock switch...................91
Windows
Power back window ................94
Power windows .......................91
Rear window defogger .......... 310
Washer.......................... 205, 207
Windshield wiper de-icer ........ 312
Windshield wipers ................... 205
Wireless remote control key
Replacing the battery ............ 528
Wireless remote control key....47
WMA disc.................................. 333

What to do if...

What to do if...
A tire punctures

P. 578 If you have a flat tire

P. 106 Engine immobilizer system

The engine does not start

P. 590 If the engine will not start
P. 598 If the battery is discharged

The shift lever cannot be
moved out of P

P. 592

If the shift lever cannot be shifted
from P

The engine coolant temperature
gauge enters the red zone
P. 603 If your vehicle overheats

Steam can be seen coming
from under the hood

The key is lost

P. 594 If you lose your keys

The battery runs out

P. 598 If the battery is depleted

The doors cannot be locked

P. 51

Side doors

P. 56

Back door

The horn begins to sound

P. 109 Alarm

The vehicle is stuck in mud
or sand

P. 606 If the vehicle becomes stuck

A warning light or indicator
light comes on

P. 565 If the warning light turns on

661
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

What to do if...

Vehicles with non-Optitron type meters

Vehicles with Optitron type meters

CTHPIAS082

662
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

What to do if...

■Warning lights
Brake system warning
light

Unengaged “Park”
warning light
P. 567

Power steering warning
light
P. 567
or
P. 565

Low fuel level warning
P. 568
light

Charging system warnP. 566
ing light

Driver’s seat belt
reminder light P. 568

Low engine oil pressure
P. 566
warning light

Front passenger’s seat belt
reminder light
P. 568

Malfunction indicator
lamp
P. 566

Maintenance required
reminder light P. 569

SRS warning light

Low washer fluid warnP. 568
ing light

P. 566

Open door warning light
P. 567

ABS warning light
or
P. 567

Slip indicator

Automatic transmission fluid temperature warning light
P. 568
Tire pressure warning
light
P. 568
Smart key system warning light
P. 570
KDSS warning light

P. 567

663
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

GAS STATION INFORMATION
Auxiliary catch lever
P. 494

Fuel filler door
P. 102

CTHPIAS030

Tire inflation pressure
P. 621

Hood lock release lever
P. 494

Fuel tank capacity
Fuel type

23.0 gal. (87.0 L, 19.1 Imp. gal.)
Unleaded gasoline only

Cold tire inflation
pressure
Engine oil capacity
drain and refill
(Reference)
With filter

Without filter

Engine oil type

P. 613

P. 621

2.7 L 4-cylinder (2TR-FE) engine
6.1 qt. (5.8 L, 5.1 Imp. qt.)
4.0 L V6 (1GR-FE) engine
6.6 qt. (6.2 L, 5.5 Imp. qt.)
2.7 L 4-cylinder (2TR-FE) engine
5.4 qt. (5.1 L, 4.5 Imp. qt.)
4.0 L V6 (1GR-FE) engine
6.0 qt. (5.7 L, 5.0 Imp. qt.)
“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent
Oil grade: ILSAC multigrade engine oil
Recommended oil viscosity: SAE 0W-20

664
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

P. 614

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.6
Linearized                      : Yes
Create Date                     : 2013:05:08 22:37:11-04:00
Modify Date                     : 2013:09:10 16:05:07-05:00
Has XFA                         : No
XMP Toolkit                     : Adobe XMP Core 5.4-c005 78.147326, 2012/08/23-13:03:03
Metadata Date                   : 2013:09:10 16:05:07-05:00
Format                          : application/pdf
Document ID                     : uuid:1c36439b-ac9d-4872-b105-46618b0f2ac7
Instance ID                     : uuid:4035facf-5b14-4162-b2b1-cc088add2aa2
Page Count                      : 682

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

2010 4runner

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation